今天小编在这给大家整理了高二上unit 3 语言点教案(人教版高二英语上册教案教学设计)（共含20篇），我们一起来阅读吧!同时，但愿您也能像本文投稿人“一把柚子”一样，积极向本站投稿分享好文章。
1. .prefer v．更喜欢…..
prefer sth to sth prefer to do sth prefer doing sth; prefer doing sth to doing sth
I much prefer dogs to cats．与猫比起来，我更喜欢狗。
Many people living in cities would actually prefer to live in the country．许多住在城市的人实际上更愿意住在乡村。
Peter prefers traveling by train．彼得更喜欢乘火车旅行。
I prefer staying home to going out today．我今天宁愿呆在家里，也不愿出去。
preference n．偏好
I must admit I have a preference for romantic movies．我必须承认我更喜欢浪漫电影。 ．
I asked her where she wanted to go on vacation，but she didn't express any preference．我问她想到哪儿去度假，但她没表示自己的偏好。
In allocating housing，preference is given to those who have young children．在分配房子时，那些有小孩的人有优先权。
Many people choose the train in preference to driving．许多人宁愿选择火车也不愿选择自己驾车。
2． furniture n. （总称）家具，作不可数名词。例如：
一套家具 a set of furniture 一件家具 a piece of furniture；an article of furniture
This old French table is a very valuable piece of furniture.
这张旧的法国桌子是一件很贵重的家具。
3． convenient adj.方便的；近便的opp. inconvenient 不方便的
（1）作表语时，不可用sb作主语。例如：
Is it convenient for you to come out this evening? 你今天晚上出来方便吗？
不可写为：Are you convenient to come out this evening? （2）作表语时后接主动不定式。
The furniture is convenient to move.
家具搬起来很方便。派生词：convenience n.方便；便利
4. stand vt.承受；经受；承担（to accept successfully; bear）
This work will hardly stand close examination.这种作品很难经得起仔细的检验。（stand sth.）
Could you stand to go there again tomorrow?明天你还有能耐上那里吗？（stand to do sth）
He wants to marry me but I can't stand the sight of him. 他要娶我，但我一见他就受不了。（can't stand sth /doing sth）
5. Architecture looks at the man-made living environment．(P.19) 译文：建筑学关注的是人造生活环境。
[讲解]本句采用了拟人的修辞方法(personification)，把architecture人性化。look at在本句中意为“考虑、关注(consider)”；此外还有“看待(regard)”、“对待(judge)”、“检查、察看(examine to see if it is good or correct)”等意思。
I won't look at such a simple matter． 我不愿考虑这样简单的事情。
We must look at the question from all sides． 我们应该从各个方面考虑这个问题。
You should look at your work attentively．你应认真对待你的工作。
You ought to have your bad teeth looked at． 你应去检查一下你的坏牙。
6. ...who wanted to change society with buildings that went against people's feeling of beauty．(P.19) 他们希望用背离人们审美标准的建筑改变社会。
[讲解]go against有三个意思。①违背，反对(to act in opposition to)；②对(某人)不利(to be in favorable to sb.)③与……相反；与……不符。
[例句]
She went against her own wishes．她违背了她自己的意志。
The opinion is going against us．舆论对我们不利。
The case may go against you这个案子对你不利。
It went against my principles to work for this company． 为这家公司工作违背了我的原则。
[讲解]against的用法总结：
be against a plan(反对计划)／sail against the wind(逆风行船)／stand against the door(靠门而立)／go against the law(违背法律)／be against one's will(违背心愿)／protect(defend)sb. against(from)...(保护……免受)／warn sb. against doing sth...(警告……不……)／Her red clothes stand out clearly against the snow．(她的红色衣服在白雪中格外显眼)／The rain beat against the window．(雨点打在了窗户上)。
7． impress vt.因此impress原意为：压入；按入→vt.①(具体)印、压(盖)印；②(抽象)给……深刻印象；使感动；使佩服；③铭记；铭刻。
I was very impressed by /at /with his performance. 他的表演令人难忘。(sb be impressed by /at /with sth)
My father impressed the value of hard work on me. 我父亲使我铭记勤勉的重要。（impress sth on sb /one's mind; impress sb with sth）
The country impressed me with the high speed of its development. 这个城市给我留下高速度发展的深刻印象。（impress sb with sth）
派生词：impression n.
8．Most of Gaudi's works were constructed in and round Barcelona．(P.20) 高迪的大部分作品都建筑在巴塞罗那及周围。
[讲解]construct v. build(sth)；put or fit together；form建筑；建造(某物)；形成。
[例词]construct a factory／an airplane／a sentence／a modal建工厂；造飞机；造句子；制作模型
9. Both in the choice of materials and shape of buildings, ancient architecture stands much closer to nature. 无论是在选材，还是在外形上，古代建筑都比较贴近自然。
(1)in the choice of意为“在选择……方面”。choice n.①选择(可数或不可数名词)；②被选出的人或东西(可数名词)，常和for，as连用；③可供选择的品种。
I bet we've made a good choice．我确信我们做了一个好的选择。
As to language learning，he was given a choice between English and France．至于语言学习，他被提供了两项选择--英语或法语。
I didn't work all night．-I did it by choice．
我不是非得整夜工作--我是自己选择这样做。
He was a very good choice as chairman．他是作主席的最好人选。
(2) 句中的stand close to 原意为“站得与……靠近”，这里指“与……相适”，“与……相一致”。例如：He stands close to the hive to have a close study on their dance. 他站在靠近蜂房的地方仔细观察蜜蜂的舞蹈。
His conclusion stands closer to the facts than yours. 他的结论比你的更与事实相符。
10. Looking at the architecture by Gandhi is like a dream, full of fantastic colors and shapes.
观赏高迪的建筑就像进了梦境，色彩斑斓和形状奇异。
（1）句中的“looking at…”是动名词短语，在句中作主语，谓语动词用单数形式，在英语中，此类用法很常见。例如：
Missing the bus means waiting for another hour. 错过了这班车意味着再等一个小时。
Mary's coming late made her teacher angry. 玛丽迟到了使她老师很生气。
（2）句中的“full of…”为形容词短语，相当于一个定语从句“which is full of…”。又如：
We visited many palaces, old and beautiful. 我们参观了许多古老而又美丽的宫殿。
（相当于：…，which are old and beautiful.）
11. despite= in spite of prep．不管，不顾
Despite all our efforts to save the school，the headmaster decided to close it.不管我们花了多少努力来挽救这所学校，校长还是决定关掉它。
She went to Spain despite the fact that the doctor had told her to rest．不顾医生告诉她要休息(这个事实)，她还是去了西班牙。
Despite herself, she found his attention rather enjoyable．情不自禁地，她发现他的关注相当令人愉悦。
12. Frank Lloyd Wright，who built an art museum in New York，found himself inspired by Japanese seashells．(P.20) 弗兰克劳埃德赖特设计了纽约的艺术博物馆，是日本的海贝壳激发了他的灵感。
[讲解]inspire v. in 根义：注入。①注入精神→鼓舞，激励；②注入灵气→给……灵感；启迪；启示。
His noble example inspired the rest of us to great effort．他的高尚的榜样激发了我们大家更加努力。
It inspired him with courage．这事鼓起了他的勇气。My father inspired me with a love of knowledge．
我的父亲鼓励我爱好学问。
The beautiful scenery of the West Lake inspired him to write this famous poem．西湖美景给了他灵感写出了这首著名的诗篇。
12. fill up with把…灌满，使充满
Brad just kept filling up everyone’ glass with champagne．布莱德一直给每一个人的杯子灌满香槟。
11. Seen from the top, it looks as if the stadium is covered by a gray net of steel, and it looks just like a bird's nest made of tree branches.从顶上看，仿佛体育场覆盖着灰色的钢网，非常像树枝搭成的鸟巢。
（1）…look as if“看起来好像”，后面可接真实可能发生的事，也可指与事实完全相反的假设。例如：
It looks as if it is going to rain. 看样子要下雨了。（真实语气，有可能发生）
If you put the chopsticks in the water , it looks as if they were broken. 如果你把筷子放进水中，他们看起来仿佛断了似的。
13． belong to 属于；是……成员。
（1）此词组不可用于进行时，例如： The car belongs to her.这车属于她。
（2）不可用于被动语态，其过去分词也不可用作后位定语。
Does the tape belong to Mary? 这磁带是玛丽的吗？
（3）是……成员（to be a member of an organization）
What party do you belong to? 你是哪一党的党员？
（4）与……有关系（to be connected with）
As a writer, he really belongs to the 18th century. 以作家而言，他其实属于18世纪。
They are decorated with small round windows that remind us of ships，bent roofs，...(P.23)
译文：它们被小圆窗装点，还能让你联想到轮船、穹顶……
[讲解]decorate v.装饰、装修(make sth. more beautiful or attractive by sth.(not because it is necessary)。常用句型decorate...with sth.；如宾语是人，意为：授予某人荣誉标志(勋章)。
a Christmas tree decorated with colored lights装饰着彩灯的圣诞树
He was decorated for his bravery．他因勇敢而被授予勋章。
[讲解]remind v.①使某人想起，常用remind sb. of sth.句型②提醒某人做某事，常用remind sb. to do sth.句型。
He reminds me of his brother．他使我想起了他哥哥。
This song reminded me of my childhood．=This song recalled me of my childhood．=This song called up the memory of my childhood．这首歌使我想起了我的童年。
Do I have to remind you？我必须提醒你吗？
That(what you've said)reminds me．I must feed the cat．对啦！我该喂猫了。
14． set aside
（1）把……置于一旁；
He set aside all objections and changed the plan. 他不顾一切反对改变了计划。
（2）留出，拨出
We should set aside enough grain. 我们应该留出充足的粮食。
（3）使无效
The decision of the court set aside the new law. 法院的判决使得那条新法律无效。
（4）为了某种特殊目的而搁置一旁
This is a room set aside for playing card games. 这是一间专供纸牌游戏的房间。
15. so that people in the neighborhood are not disturbed when rock musicians move in and practice for a concert．(P.24) ……目的是当乐师们搬进来为音乐会排练时，邻居不被打扰。
[讲解]disturb vt.①焦虑不安，常用于be disturbed to do sth.(由于做了某事而焦虑不安)；②扰乱、惊动、搅乱；interrupt vt.打断、中断。因此disturb强调“扰”；interrupt强调“断”。
[例句]
He was disturbed to hear of your illness．听到你生病他焦虑不安。
Don't disturb the papers on my desk．不要把我桌上的文件弄乱。
She opened the door quietly so as not to disturb the sleeping child．她轻轻打开门为的是不把睡梦中的小孩弄醒。
Don't interrupt the speaker now；he will answer questions later．现在不要打断他的话，他稍候再回答问题。
We interrupt this programme to bring you a new flash．我们中断节目，报告新闻快讯。
三 词语学习:
5.sale n．销售 for sale 待售 on sale 廉价销售
--Excuse me, are these for sale? 请问这些卖吗?
--No，the particular item is just on show．不，这个只供观赏。
Peter's department store is having a sale this week．这星期彼得百货商店大减价。
Stephen King's new novel will go on sale next week．史第芬金的新小说将会卖到下星期。
I could only afford to buy the CD player because it was on sale．我只买得起CD机，因为它在降价大甩卖。
6.Stuff n. [u] 东西；材料；事情
What's that stuff you're drinking? 你在喝什么东西?
What kind of stuff do you like to read? 你喜欢读什么样的材料?
I've got so much stuff to do this weekend．这个周末我有许多事情要做。
Unit 3 Art and architecture 知识清单
1. .prefer v．__________.
(prefer sth to sth prefer to do sth prefer doing sth; prefer doing sth to doing sth )
I much prefer dogs to cats． Many people living in cities would actually prefer to live in the country．
Peter prefers traveling by train． I prefer staying home to going out today．
preference n．_____________
I must admit I have a preference for romantic movies．
I asked her where she wanted to go on vacation，but she didn't express any preference．
In allocating housing，preference is given to those who have young children．
Many people choose the train in preference to driving．
2． furniture n. （总称）_____，作_____________名词。例如：
a set of furniture a piece of furniture；an article of furniture
This old French table is a very valuable piece of furniture.
3． convenient adj.______________ opp. inconvenient ___________
（1）作表语时，不可用__________作主语。例如：
Is it convenient for you to come out this evening?
可不可以写为：Are you convenient to come out this evening?
（2）作表语时后接主动不定式还是被动不定式。
The furniture is convenient to move.派生词：convenience n.____
4. stand vt._____________（to accept successfully; bear）
This work will hardly stand close examination.（stand sth.）
Could you stand to go there again tomorrow?（stand to do sth）
He wants to marry me but I can't stand the sight of him.（can't stand sth /doing sth）
5. Architecture looks at the man-made living environment．(P.19)建筑学关注的是人造生活环境。
本句采用了拟人的修辞方法(personification)，把architecture人性化。look at在本句中意为“____________”；此外还有“看待(regard)”、“对待(judge)”、“检查、察看(examine to see if it is good or correct)”等意思。
I won't look at such a simple matter． We must look at the question from all sides．
You should look at your work attentively． You ought to have your bad teeth looked at．
6. ...who wanted to change society with buildings that went against people's feeling of beauty．(P.19) 他们希望用背离人们审美标准的建筑改变社会。
[讲解]go against有三个意思。①_______(to act in opposition to)；②___________(to be in favorable to sb.)③______________
She went against her own wishes． The opinion is going against us． The case may go against you
It went against my principles to work for this company．
[讲解]against的用法总结：
be against a plan(____)／sail against the wind(____)／stand against the door(____)／go against the law(____)／be against one's will(____)／protect(defend)sb. against(from)...( ____)／warn sb. against doing sth... (____)／Her red clothes stand out clearly against the snow．(____)／The rain beat against the window．(____)。
7． impress vtvt.①(具体)________；②(抽象)___________；③______________。
I was very impressed by /at /with his performance.(sb be impressed by /at /with sth)
My father impressed the value of hard work on me.（impress sth on sb /one's mind; impress sb with sth）
The country impressed me with the high speed of its development.（impress sb with sth）
派生词：impression n.
8．Most of Gaudi's works were constructed in and round Barcelona．(P.20) 高迪的大部分作品都建筑在巴塞罗那及周围。
[讲解]construct v. build(sth)；put or fit together；form_____________。
[例词]construct a factory／an airplane／a sentence／a moda___________________-
9. Both in the choice of materials and shape of buildings, ancient architecture stands much closer to nature. 无论是在选材，还是在外形上，古代建筑都比较贴近自然。
(1)in the choice of意为“________________”。choice n.①选择(可数或不可数名词)；②被选出的人或东西(可数名词)，常和for，as连用；③可供选择的品种。
I bet we've made a good choice． As to language learning，he was given a choice between English and France．
I didn't work all night．-I did it by choice． He was a very good choice as chairman．
(2) 句中的stand close to 原意为“站得与……靠近”，这里指“______________”。
例如：He stands close to the hive to have a close study on their dance.
His conclusion stands closer to the facts than yours.
10. Looking at the architecture by Gandhi is like a dream, full of fantastic colors and shapes.
观赏高迪的建筑就像进了梦境，色彩斑斓和形状奇异。
（1）句中的“looking at…”是动名词短语，在句中作_________，谓语动词用_____数形式，在英语中，此类用法很常见。例如：
Missing the bus means waiting for another hour. Mary's coming late made her teacher angry.
（2）句中的“full of…”为形容词短语，相当于一个定语从句“which is full of…”。又如：
We visited many palaces, old and beautiful. （相当于：…，which are old and beautiful.）
11. despite= in spite of prep．__________
Despite all our efforts to save the school，the headmaster decided to close it.
She went to Spain despite the fact that the doctor had told her to rest．
Despite herself, she found his attention rather enjoyable．
12. Frank Lloyd Wright，who built an art museum in New York，found himself inspired by Japanese seashells．(P.20) 弗兰克劳埃德赖特设计了纽约的艺术博物馆，是日本的海贝壳激发了他的灵感。
[讲解]inspire v. in①____________-；②________________
His noble example inspired the rest of us to great effort．
It inspired him with courage． My father inspired me with a love of knowledge．
The beautiful scenery of the West Lake inspired him to write this famous poem．
12. fill up with__________________
Brad just kept filling up everyone’ glass with champagne．
11. Seen from the top, it looks as if the stadium is covered by a gray net of steel, and it looks just like a bird's nest made of tree branches.
（1）…look as if“________”，后面可接真实可能发生的事，也可指与事实完全相反的假设。例如：
It looks as if it is going to rain.
If you put the chopsticks in the water , it looks as if they were broken.
13． belong to _____________。
（1）此词组不可用于________时，例如： The car belongs to her.这车属于她。
（2）不可用于被动语态，其过去分词也不可用作后位定语。
Does the tape belong to Mary? 这磁带是玛丽的吗？
（3）是……成员（to be a member of an organization）
What party do you belong to? 你是哪一党的党员？
（4）与……有关系（to be connected with）
As a writer, he really belongs to the 18th century. 以作家而言，他其实属于18世纪。
14. They are decorated with small round windows that remind us of ships，bent roofs，...(P.23)
它们被小圆窗装点，还能让你联想到轮船、穹顶……
decorate v.____________(make sth. more beautiful or attractive by sth.(not because it is necessary)。
常用句型decorate...__________ sth.；如宾语是人，意为：授予某人荣誉标志(勋章)。
a Christmas tree decorated with colored lights. He was decorated for his bravery．
[讲解]remind v.①_____________，常用_________句型②______，常用________句型。
He reminds me of his brother．
This song reminded me of my childhood．=This song recalled me of my childhood．=This song called up the memory of my childhood． Do I have to remind you？
14． set aside
（1）__________； He set aside all objections and changed the plan.
（2）________ We should set aside enough grain.
（3）________ The decision of the court set aside the new law.
（4）为了某种特殊目的而搁置一旁 This is a room set aside for playing card games.
15. so that people in the neighborhood are not disturbed when rock musicians move in and practice for a concert．(P.24) ……目的是当乐师们搬进来为音乐会排练时，邻居不被打扰。
[讲解]disturb vt.①________，常用于_________(由于做了某事而焦虑不安)；②________；
interrupt vt.打断、中断。因此disturb强调“扰”；interrupt强调“断”。
He was disturbed to hear of your illness． Don't disturb the papers on my desk．
She opened the door quietly so as not to disturb the sleeping child．
Don't interrupt the speaker now；he will answer questions later．
We interrupt this programme to bring you a new flash．
I. Listening & Speaking
1. How does nature form a danger to people in the world and how can science help reduce that threat?
Reduce 1)vt.(数量；力量等)减小；缩小；降低价格 She reduced her weight by 5 kg.
2)使成为（多用于被动语态，且与to连用） The house was reduced to ashes.
He was reduced to begging.
2. scare/frighten sb. 使某人害怕 be scared/ frightened/ afraid of sb./ sth. 害怕某人/某物
a scared/ frightened face/ look/ eyes充满恐惧的脸/神色/眼神（此人感到害怕）
a scaring/ frightening face/look/ eyes吓人的脸/神色/眼神（令别人害怕）
be scared/ frightened to death吓得要死
拓展 terrifying/terrified (可怕的/感到害怕的) exciting/excited （令人激动的/激动的）
surprising/surprised（令人吃惊的/吃惊的） moving/moved （使人感动的/感动的）
touching/touched （使人感动的/感动的） puzzling/puzzled （使人迷惑的/迷惑的）
3. It makes my hair stand on end.
stand on end直立，竖着 on end 1)直立；竖直地
It will fit if you lift it on end.如果把它竖着就合适了
2）连续的；继续的
He sat there for hours on end. It has been snowing on end for a week.
II. Reading
1. attract/ draw sb’s attention 引起某人的注意
attract/ draw sb’s attention to将某人的注意力吸引到…上去
pay attention to/ give one’s attention to注意… call sb’s attention to叫某人注意…
bring sth. to sb’s attention使某人注意…
2 sight 1)景象，景物, 场景, 景观 a beautiful sight美丽的景象 a sad sight悲惨的场景
2) 风景，名胜（人工造的景色, 常用复数） see the sights游览名胜see the sights of the West Lake.观赏西湖风景
3)视觉，视力 lose one's sight 失明 have long/far sight远视 have short/near sight近视
have good/poor sight视力好/差 have one’s sight tested视力检查
4) 看，观望；观览at first sight 一见就..., 初次看见时at the sight of一看见…就... catch /have/ gain/ get sight of突然瞥见
5) 视野，眼界 be in sight可看得见的，在视线内out of sight看不见的，在视线之外 be/ go /get out of sight看不见了lose sight of 看不见...了
scene 1）自然景色，风景The scene is a perfect dream when you see the sun rising slowly in the east.
2）眼前的情景，景象（包括人及活动在内）The scene after the earthquake was horrible.地震后的场景十分可怕。
There is a happy scene of children playing in the garden.孩子们在花园里玩耍，好一派欢乐的景象。
3）现场，出事地点a crowd at the scene of the accident在出事地点的人群
4）场所，地点What's new on the film scene?电影院演什么新片？
5）（戏剧）场景，布景
view 1）常指从某处可以看到的自然景色 It's a room with a view. You'll like it. There is a lovely view from this window
2）a point of view观点
scenery指某地总的自然风景或景色，尤指美丽的乡间景色。不可数 。
I hope one day I will have a long holiday and go to a far-away village to enjoy the beautiful scenery.
3. awake vt.(awoke,awaked) 唤起,叫醒；提醒,启发；激起,激发 awake sb.'s sympathy唤起某人的同情心
adj. [用作表语,补语] 醒着的;意识到 be broad /wide awake完全醒着;完全知道, 充分觉察到 (be sound asleep酣睡)
awake to 明白, 认识或意识到
It took her some to awake to the dangers of her situation.过了一段时间她才意识到她处境的危险
4 at hand在手边；在跟前 Help was at hand. 援助近在咫尺
keep sth. at hand把某物放在手边 have sth. at hand手头上有某物
give sb. a hand with sth.在某方面帮某人 be made by hand手工制作的
5。There was no way out except by boat.
way out（克服困难的）办法，出路
find a way out找到出路 help sb. out （of）帮助某人摆脱（…）麻烦
6.escape 常见搭配：escape doing , a narrow escape
7. urge sb. to do sth.= urge sb. into doing sth =urge that sb. (should) do sth. 极力劝/主张/催促/怂恿某人做某事
①他们怂恿我吃那些奇怪的食物。 They urged me to eat the strange food.
②他力劝我们忍耐是必要的。 He urged us on the necessity of patience.
③他主张我向她道歉。 He urged that I (should ) apologize to her.
8. on/ upon arrival一到就
on/ upon one’s arrival at/ in sp= on/ upon arriving at/ in sp 某人一到某地就
on/ upon doing sth.在做某事时，当某事发生时，一做某事就
immediately 立即，马上（at once）
When she heard the good news she came immediately. 一听到好消息，她立刻就来了。
“一……就….”表达法： immediately/ instantly… the moment, instant, minute, second… hardly/scarcely (no sooner)…when (than)…
Immediately he returned from the USA, he began to prepare for a company. 他一从美国回来就开始准备开公司
III. Integrating skills
1. knock about/ around（口语）漫游；闲逛
knock against / on sth 撞，碰；knock into; knock out of;
2. be up发生；出事 What's up怎么了, 发生什么啦? What's up to sb.?某人怎么了, 发生什么啦?
be up to1）胜任, 适于 be up to one’s work胜任某人的工作
2）从事于，忙于，做（坏事）What in the world are you up to?你到底在搞什么鬼？
3）It’s up to sb. to do sth.该由/轮到某人做某事，做某事取决于某人
The success of this project is up to us.这个项目的成败取决于我们
4）（数目）到…之多 up to 100 men可达一百人
up to直到 up to now/ then知道现在/那时
3. do for sb./ sth. “破坏, 使…失败.”
1) The spelling mistake in the exam did for him.
2) The factory will be done for it if capital can’t arrive in fifteen days.
若资金不能在十五天内到位，工厂就完了。
do for “ 设法弄到” 常用于how , what 开头的疑问句中.
eg. How did you do for food when you were in the desert?
Unit 10 Frightening nature
I. Listening & Speaking
1. How does nature form a danger to people in the world and how can science help reduce that threat?
Reduce 1)vt._______________ She reduced her weight by 5 kg.
2)使成为（多用于被动语态，且与to连用）
The house was reduced to ashes. He was reduced to begging.
2. scare/frighten sb. 使某人害怕 be scared/ frightened/ afraid of sb./ sth. 害怕某人/某物
a scared/ frightened face/ look/ eyes_______________
a scaring/ frightening face/look/ eyes_______________
be scared/ frightened to death_______________
拓展 terrifying/terrified (_______________) exciting/excited （_______________）
surprising/surprised（_______________） moving/moved （_______________）
touching/touched （_______________） puzzling/puzzled （_______________）
exercise:
(1.)__the big snake, the girl stood under the tree___.
A. Seeing ;frightened B. Seeing ; frightening C. Seen; frightened D. To see; frightening
(2.)The movie was so___that I was___.
A. moving; moved B. moved; moved C. moved; moving D. moving; moving
3. It makes my hair stand on end. stand on end直立，竖着
on end 1) _______________ It will fit if you lift it on end.
2）_______________ He sat there for hours on end. It has been snowing on end for a week.
II. Reading
1. sight 1)景象，景物, 场景, 景观 a beautiful sight美丽的景象 a sad sight悲惨的场景
2) 风景，名胜（人工造的景色, 常用复数） see the sights_______________see the sights of the West Lake. _______________
3)视觉，视力 lose one's sight _________ have long/far sight_______ have short/near sight_______
4) 看，观望；观览at first sight _________at the sight of_________. catch /have/ gain/ get sight of_________
5) 视野，眼界 be in sight_________out of sight_________ be/ go /get out of sight_________lose sight of _________
scene 1）自然景色，风景The scene is a perfect dream when you see the sun rising slowly in the east.
2）眼前的情景，景象（包括人及活动在内）The scene after the earthquake was horrible.
There is a happy scene of children playing in the garden.
3）现场，出事地点a crowd at the scene of the accident
4）场所，地点What's new on the film scene?
5）（戏剧）场景，布景
view 1）常指从某处可以看到的自然景色 It's a room with a view. You'll like it. There is a lovely view from this window
2）a point of view观点
scenery指某地总的自然风景或景色，尤指美丽的乡间景色。不可数 。
I hope one day I will have a long holiday and go to a far-away village to enjoy the beautiful scenery.
2. awake vt.(awoke, awaken) 唤起,叫醒；提醒,启发；激起,激发 awake sb.'s sympathy唤起某人的同情心
adj. [用作表语,补语] 醒着的;意识到 be broad /wide awake_________ (be sound asleep酣睡)
awake to 明白, 认识或意识到
It took her some to awake to the dangers of her situation.
3 at hand_________________ Help was at hand. _________
keep sth. at hand_________ have sth. at hand_________give sb. a hand with sth. _________ be made by hand_________
4。There was no way out except by boat.
way out_________
find a way out找到出路 help sb. out （of）帮助某人摆脱（…）麻烦
5.escape 常见搭配：escape doing , a narrow escape
6. urge sb. to do sth.= urge sb. into doing sth =urge that sb. (should) do sth. 极力劝/主张/催促/怂恿某人做某事
They urged me to eat the strange food. He urged us on the necessity of patience.
He urged that I (should ) apologize to her.
7. on/ upon arrival_________
on/ upon one’s arrival at/ in sp= on/ upon arriving at/ in sp 某人一到某地就
on/ upon doing sth.在做某事时，当某事发生时，一做某事就
immediately 立即，马上（at once）
When she heard the good news she came immediately. 一听到好消息，她立刻就来了。
“一……就….”表达法：_________; _________; _________; _________
Immediately he returned from the USA, he began to prepare for a company. 他一从美国回来就开始准备开公司
III. Integrating skills
1. knock about/ around（口语）_________
knock against / on sth 撞，碰；knock into; knock out of;
4. be up_________ What's up怎么了, 发生什么啦? What's up to sb.?某人怎么了, 发生什么啦?
be up to1）_________ be up to one’s work胜任某人的工作
2）_________ What in the world are you up to?你到底在搞什么鬼？
3）It’s up to sb. to do sth. _________ The success of this project is up to us.
4）_________ up to 100 men
5) up to_________ up to now/ then_________
2. do for sb./ sth. “_________.”
1) The spelling mistake in the exam did for him.
2) The factory will be done for if capital can’t arrive in fifteen days.
do for “ 设法弄到” 常用于how , what 开头的疑问句中.
eg. How did you do for food when you were in the desert?
语法：省略句与高考
省略句在高考中的体现：
1. --- Go for a picnic this weekend, OK?
--- ______. I love getting close to nature.(福建)
A. I couldn’t agree more B. I’m afraid not C. I believe not D. I don’t think so
2. --- Susan, will you please go and empty that drawer ?
--- _______? (2004 全国I 卷) A. What for B. What is it C. How is it D. How come
3. It is easy to do the repair. ________ you need is a hammer and some nails. (2004天津高考)
A. Something B. All C. Both D. Everything
4. Unless ______ to speak, you should remain silent at the conference. (上海春季高考)
A. invited B. inviting C. being invited D. having invited
5. The man we followed suddenly stopped and looked as if____ whether he was going in the right direction. （20北京春季）
A. seeing B. having seen C. to have seen D. to see
6. Though ______ money, his parents managed to send him to university. ( 年上海高考)
A. lacked B. lacking of C. lacking D. lacked in
7. When ______, the museum will be open to the public next year. ( 上海春季高考)
A. completed B. completing C. being completed D. to be completed
8. He made another wonderful discovery, ____ of great importance to science. ( 上海高考)
A. which I think is B. which I think it is C. which I think itD. I think is
9. If ________ the same treatment again, he is sure to get well. (上海高考)
A. giving B. give C. given D. being given
10.--- Alice, why didn't you come yesterday ?
---I ________, but I had an unexpected visitor. (NMET）
A. had B. would C. was going to D. did
Key:1-5. AABAD 6-10. CAACC
在英语中，为了使句子简洁明快，突出重点，常用“省略句”，只要不影响句意的表达，能省略的成分尽可能省略。
一、 在含有状语从句的复合句中
由when，while，as, once，whenever引导的时间状语从句；或由if，unless引导的条件状语从句；由though，although，even if ，even though引导的让步状语从句；由as though，as if，as引导的方式状语从句；由because引导的原因状语从句；由wherever引导的地点状语从句，若从句的主句是it或与主句的主语相同，且在谓语中含有be时，常省略从句的主语和be。
1. When first ________ to the market, these products enjoyed great success. (NMET 2004全国卷II)
A. introducing B. introduced C. introduce D. being introduced
2. It shames me to say it, but I told a lie when ________ at the meeting by my boss. (NMET 2004全国卷IV) A. questioning B. having questioned C. questioned D. to be questioned
3. The man we followed suddenly stopped and looked as if ________ whether he was going in the right direction. (NMET 安徽春) A. seeing B. having seen C. to have seen D. to see
4. Generally speaking, ________ according to the directions, the drug has no side effect. (NMET2003上海卷) A. when taking B. when taken C. when to take D. when to be taken
5. Unless ________ to speak, you should remain silent at the conference. (NMET 2003上海春)
A. invited B. inviting C. being invited D. having invited
6. When ________ , the museum will be open to the public next year. (NMET 2002上海春)
A. completed B. completing C. being completed D. to be completed
7. Though ________ money, his parents man-aged to send him to university. (NMET 2002上海卷)
A. lacked B. lacking of C. lacking D. lacked in
8. The research is so designed that once ________ nothing can be done to change it. (NMET 2002)
A. begins B. having begun C. beginning D. begun
二、在限定性定语从句中
作宾语的关系代词that，which,whom可以省略；在以the same... as和such... as引导的定语从句中，可以省略与主句相同的部分；the way后面的定语从句中，可以省略that，in which；在含被动语态的定语从句中，关系代词作主语时，可以省略关系代词和be,省略之后,变成过去分词短语作定语。
9. -You 're always working. Come on, let's go shopping.
- ________ you ever want to do is going shopping. (NMET 2002北京、安徽、内蒙古春)
A. Anything B. Something C. All D. That
10. Is this the reason ________ at the meeting for his carelessness in his work?(NMET 2002上海春)
A. he explained B. what he explained C. how he explained D. why he explained
11. What surprised me was not what he said but ________ he said it. (NMET 2004湖北卷)
A. the way B. in the way that C. in the way D. the way which
12. It is easy to do the repair. ________ you need is a hammer and some nails. (NMET 2004天津卷)
A. Something B. All C. Both D. Everything
13. That's an unpleasant thing to say about your father after ________ he's done for you. (NMET 2004全国卷) A. something B. anything C. all D. that
三、 在感官动词或短语中
在see，watch，hear，feel，observe，notice，listen to等感官动词或短语及make，have，let等使役动词之后的“宾语+不定式作宾语补足语” 结构中，不定式前省略to；有时为了避免重复，常省略与上文表达相同意思的不定式符号to之后的内容，只保留不定式符号；不定式在tell，ask， advise， wish， permit， force等动词后面作宾语补足语或主语补足语时，可以省略，但要保留不定式符号to；不定式在happy，glad，eager，ready，willing等形容词后面作状语时，可以省略，但要保留不定式符号to。
14. As you've never been there before, I'll have someone ________ you the way. (MET 1990上海卷)
A. to show B. show C. showing D. showed
15. -I'll be away on a business trip. Would you mind looking after my cat?
-Not at all, ________ . (NMET 1995)
A. I have no time B. I'd rather not C. I'd like it D. I'd be happy to
16. -Does your brother intend to study German?
-Yes, he intends ________ . (NMET 1998上海卷)
A. / B. to C. so D. that
17. -Would you like to go to the Grand Theatre with me tonight?
- ________ . (NMET 上海卷)
A. Yes, I'd like to go to the Grand Theatre B. I'd like to, but I have an exam tomorrow
C. No, I won't D. That's right
18. -You should have thanked her before you left.
-I meant ________ , but when I was leaving I couldn't find her anywhere. (NMET 北京春招卷) A. to do B. to C. doing D. doing to
四、 在if引导的虚拟条件句中
在if引导的虚拟语气条件句中含有had，were，should时，可以把had，were，should放在句首，省略if。
19. ________ it rain tomorrow, we would have to put off the visit to the Yangpu Bridge. (NMET 1994上海卷) A. Were B. Should C. Would D. Will
20. ________ for the free tickets, I would not have gone to the films so often. (NMET 1995上海卷)
A. If it is not B. Were C. Had it not been D. If they were not
五、 在否定结构中
由nor，neither等引导的连续否定的句子也是一种省略句，这种句子在意思上与前面的句子是相同的，而且主谓用倒装。
21. I will never know what was on his mind at the time, nor will ________ . (NMET 2004 江苏卷)
A. anyone B. anyone else C. no one D. no one else
22. Of the making of good books there is no end; neither ________ any end to their influence on man's lives. (NMET 2004 广东卷) A. there is B. there are C. is there D. are there
23. -I would never come to this restaurant again. The food is terrible!
- ________ . (NMET 2004全国卷III)
A. Nor am I B. Neither would I C. Same with me D. So do I
Key:
1-5 BCDBA 6-10 AADCA 11-15 ABCBD 16-20 BBBBC 21-23 BCB
六. 不定式结构中的省略
在同一个句子或联系紧密的对话中,为了避免重复,作宾语或补足语的不定式再次出现时,不定式符号to后面的内容常常被省略,只保留不定式符号to。常用于动词refuse, would like, would love, wish, want, hope, expect, intend以及形容词afraid, happy, glad, willing, ready等之后。
The boy wanted to ride his bicycle in the street, but his mother told him ________.
A. not to B. not to do C. not do it D. do not to 答案: A
注意:如果承前省略的不定式内容有be或作助动词的have时,不定式符号to后要保留be或have。
-Are you a farmer? -No, but I used to be.
七。替代省略
用it, one, that替代句子中重复出现的名词、代词或句子;用so, neither / nor引起的分句,表示前面的情况也适用于后者。
1. --- You haven’t lost the ticket, have you ?
--- ______. I know it’s not easy to get another one at the moment. (2004江苏高考)
A. I hope notB. Yes, I have C. I hope soD. Yes, I’m afraid so
2. --- The boys are not doing a good job at all, are they ?
--- ________. (2003北京春)
A. I guess not so B. I don’t guess C. I don’t guess soD. I guess not
3.--- I believe we’ve met somewhere before .
--- No, ________. (2000北京春)
A. it isn’t the same B. it can’t be trueC. I don’t think so D. I’d rather not
Key:1.A 2.D 3.C
简析 替代词so / not用于避免重复前面所说过的内容，代替肯定的名词性从句。可与动词believe , do, expect, fear, guess, hope, say, speak, suppose, think 等及 I’m afraid连用。肯定时上列动词都可与so 搭配，否定时hope与guess 只用I hope not 和I guess not 形式，而think ,believe , suppose 等词可有两种否定形式 ，即：I think not 或I don’t think so.
例 --- Is he going to study abroad?
--- I believe so. ( so = he is going to study abroad )
We needed a new cupboard for the kitchen. So Peter made ________ from some wood we had.
A. it B. one C. himself D. another
-I would never come to this restaurant again. The food is terrible! -________.
A. Nor am I B. Neither would I C. Same with me D. So do I
答案:① B ② B
八。 答语中的省略
1. 有时为了避免重复,可用so或that作替代语,替代前面所说的内容。可用于动词think, believe, hope, suppose, expect, guess, imagine以及be afraid, of course, certainly, perhaps等后面。
-You haven't lost the ticket, have you? -________. I know it's not easy to get another one at the moment.
A. I hope not B. Yes, I have C. I hope so D. Yes, I'm afraid so 答案: A
2. 含有情态动词的答语中可以使用省略回答,只保留情态动词;情态动词后有be或作助动词的have时,保留be或have。
-I don't mind telling you what I know. -You ________. I'm not asking you for it.
A. mustn't B. may not C. can't D. needn't 答案: D
3. 疑问句中的省略回答。
①-Susan, go and join your sister cleaning the yard.
-Why ________? John is sitting there doing nothing.
A. him B. he C. I D. me
②-What do you think made Mary so upset? -________ her bicycle.
A. As she lost B. Lost C. Losing D. Because of losing 答案:① D ② C
4. 祈使句中的省略回答。
-Write to me when you get home. -________.
A. I must B. I should C. I will D. I can 答案: C
九。 会话中的省略
例: 1.--- Guess what ! I came across an old friend at the party last night.
--- ______. I’m sure you had a wonderful time. (2004辽宁)
A. Sounds good! B. Very wellC. How nice !D. All right !
2.--- Let’s go and have a good drink tonight.
--- _____ Have you got the first prize in the competition? (2004重庆)
A. What for ? B. Thanks a lot .C. Yes, I’d like toD. Why not ?
3. ---Brad was Jane’s brother!
--- _____ he reminded me so much of Jane ! (2004浙江)
A. No doubtB. Above all C. No wonderD. Of course
4. If you are planning to spend your money having fun this week, better ____ it -- you’ve got some big bills coming. (2004广东高考)
A. forgetB. forgotC. forgettingD. to forget
Key:1.C 2.A 3.C 4.A
简析省略在会话中广泛应用，解题时应按照问话或答语的具体内容补充完整, 做好该类题型一是要注意上下文语境，二是要注意常见句式的省略。英语中常见句式的省略有：
1.It is … (that…) 强调句式中that 部分省略。2.(It is) No wonder … ( 难怪…)
3.(Is there) Anything else ?
4.(You’d) Better do
5.have some difficulty( in) doing, prevent sb (from) doing sth 等词组中介词在口语中常省略
例:1.--- Where did you see him last night?
--- It was in the hotel ____ he stayed.
A. where B. that C. which D. /
2. You can’t imagine the great difficulty I had _____ your house.
A. finding B. found C. to find D. find key1.A2.A
简析第1题可以补全强调句式that 部分： It was in the hotel where he stayed that I saw him last night. hotel 后为定语从句。
第2题是对have difficulty in doing sth 词组置于定语从句的考查，介词in 的省略加大了该题的难度。
1. You'll attend the meeting and discuss the issue. 你将出席这个会议并讨论这个问题。
1) attend用作及物动词，意为“出席；参加; 上(学, 教堂)；陪伴”，用作不及物动词，构成下列短语：
attend on/upon服侍, 照料; 陪, 随从; attend to倾听, 注意, 留心
attend a meeting /lecture/school 出席会议/听演讲/上学
May good luck attend you! 祝你幸运!
2) n. issue 1)论点, 问题, the issue of something …的问题
raise an issue 提出问题complex issue 复杂问题sensitive issue 敏感问题
2) 出版, 发行, (报刊等)期、号, issue of
the January issue of Newsweek the current/latest issue Have you seen the latest issue?
3) [transitive]官方的发布命令，警告等
Silva issued a statement denying all knowledge of the affair.
attend，join，join in，take part in用法辨析：
(1) attend是正式用语，一般指参加会议、典礼、婚礼、葬礼及去听课、听报告等。
(2) join指加入某党派、某组织或某社会团体，以及参军等，还可表示参与某种活动。如：
(3) join in通常指参加某种活动，尤其指和其他人一起参加某项活动。如：
(4) take part in指参加群众性活动、会议、劳动、游行等，往往指参加者持有积极的态度，起一定作用，有时与join in可互换。如：
Will you take part in the English evening? 同我们一起参加英语晚会好吗？
如：a. I will never forget the day when I _______ the Party.
b. Will you_______ us for dinner? 请你和我们一起吃饭好吗？
c. May I _________ the game? 我可以参加这个游戏吗？
d. I hope you'll all ________ the discussion. 我希望你们大家都参加讨论。
e. Would you ____ (和我一起去散步)?
f. We should ____ (积极参加) school activities.
g. She didn't come to the party because she had to ____ (出席一个会议).
a. joined b. join c. join in/ take part in d. take part in/ join in e. join me in a walk f take an active part in g attend a meeting )
2．Summarize v.概述, 总结 The authors summarize their views in the introduction.
3. content: 1). n. 内容，目录 (常作 ~ s ) ; 容量，容积
the contents of a book a table of contents Look up the contents at the beginning of the book.
a bucket of more than usual content
2). Adj. 满足的，满意的
be content to do sth be content with sth content oneself with sth
He is quite content to watch TV for hours. I’m very content with my life at present.
As there’s no butter we must content ourselves with dry bread.
4．representative cn. 1）代表
a union representative 协会代表 representative of …的代表 an elected representative of the people
2） typical of a particular group or thing 典型的；有代表性的
representative of The latest incident is representative of a wider trend
a representative collection of ancient Greek art 古希腊艺术代表作品集
5．have access to access用作名词，意为“通路；访问；接近；入门”，常与to连用。
1）have access to a car/a computer etc 有可供使用的车，电脑等
2） gain/get access (to something) t能够得以见到某人/某物或进入某地
The police managed to gain access through an upstairs window.
6．Violence 暴力
physical violence 身体暴力 domestic violence 家庭暴力 racial/ethnic violence 种族暴力 use/resort to violence 使用暴力
7．All too 意为“实在太… ” “太过… ” 后常接形容词或副词，主要用来表达遗憾之意。
Eg. It was all too early when we reached the top of the hill. The sun hasn’t risen yet.
Only too + adj./adv. 也含有此意。表示“极为”“非常”“遗憾地”
eg. I’d be only too pleased to help, but I’m busy now
8．Stress vt. 1)着重，强调 也可说为lay/place/put stress on sth 2) 重读
The report stressed that student math skills need to improve.
Crawford stressed the need for more housing downtown.
She stressed the importance of a balanced diet.
The word 'machine' is stressed on the second syllable.
9．equality [uncountable] 同等，平等
equality of 。。。的平等，均等 All people have the right to equality of opportunity.
equality with 与…平等 Women have yet to achieve full equality with men in the workplace.
equality between 在… 之间的平等 equality between men and women
racial/sexual equality 种族/性别平等 The government must promote racial equality.
10．responsibility （plural responsibilities）1）un. 责任，责任感
Kelly's promotion means more money and more responsibility.
responsibility for (doing) something
The Minister will have responsibility for coordinating（调整）childcare policy.
with responsibility for something 具有，带有对… 的责任
a manager with responsibility for over 100 staff
it is somebody's responsibility to do something 做某事是某人的责任。
It's your responsibility to inform us of any changes.
take responsibility for (doing) something 负责某事
Who do you trust to take responsibility for Britain's defence?
Be careful you don't take on too much responsibility
claim responsibility (for something) 声称对… 负责
No one has yet claimed responsibility for yesterday's bombing.
11．take action 1) 采取行动 2）开始生效
The government must take action now to stop the rise in violent crime
They took action to stop him.
The police took action to deal with this thing immediately.
The medicine will not take action for several hours.
使用take 的其他短语
take notes: 作笔记，记录
Eg: Do you takes notes of the lectures?
He sat quietly in the corner taking notes carefully.
takes effect 开始起作用，见效，生效
The pill takes effect as soon as you swallow it.
take turns 轮流 take measures/steps 采取措施
take place 发生 take care 照顾
take medicine 吃药 take time从容进行 take cold感冒， 受凉， 伤风
take notice 注意 take sides 偏袒
12．willing to do something
How much are they willing to pay?
13. put an end to 结束，毁掉
Eg: Winning the competition put an end to his financial problems.
The discussion was put an end to by his sudden arrival.
The wind put an end to the pier.
Sth come to an end 结束了 make an end of终止, 结束, 除掉
bring sth to an end 结束, 完成, 终止
on end 1）直立，竖立 2）连续地 They argued for two hours on end
His hair stands on end.
14．harmony （plural harmonies）
in harmony with意为“与……和谐相处”、“与……协调”。如：
My cat and dog live in perfect harmony. 我的猫和狗相处得十分和睦。
We must ensure that tourism develops in harmony with the environment.
我们必须确保旅游的发展与环境相协调。
be out of harmony with与。。。 不相和谐
15. put an end to意为“结束”、“终结”。如：
How can we put an end to the fighting? 我们如何才能结束这场战斗呢？
16．wipe out phrasal verb 彻底的除掉，除去，抹去
Whole villages were wiped out by the floods.
Nothing could wipe out his bitter memories of the past.
2）wipe somebody out 使某人感觉非常的疲劳 The heat had wiped us out.
17．alternative 1） [only before noun]选择性的, 二中择一的
alternative ways/approach/methods etc alternative approaches to learning
Have you any alternative suggestions?
2）Alternative cn. 可供选择的办法，事物。常指在两者之间做出选择。 choice 常指一般意义上的选择
alternative to Is there a viable alternative to the present system?
have no alternative but 除...外别无选择; 只有; 只好
I had no alternative but to report him to the police.
18．defend vt./vi. 保护，防卫
a struggle to defend our homeland
defend something against/from something 使某物免受侵害
the need to defend democracy against fascism（法西斯主义）
defend yourself (against/from somebody/something) 是某人免受侵害
advice on how women can defend themselves from sex attackers
defend against 抵抗，防卫 We need to defend against military aggression.
2）vt. 辩护 She was always defending her husband in front of their daughter.
Students should be ready to explain and defend their views.
19．Affect vt. 1)影响 2）感动
the areas affected by the hurricane a disease that affects the central nervous system
decisions which affect our lives We were all deeply affected by her death.
20．advise somebody to do something 建议某人做某事 advise doing ;
Evans advised him to leave London.
You are strongly advised to take out medical insurance when visiting China.
advise somebody against (doing) something 建议某人不做某事
I'd advise you against saying anything to the press.
advise that 接虚拟语气
Experts advise that sunscreen be reapplied every one to two hours.
warming up
1.aid n (1)帮助；援助 first aid 急救
(2)帮助者；有帮助的事物
An English-Chinese Dictionary is an important aid in learning the English. 一本英汉词典是学习英语的重要工具。
习惯用语 do/ give/ offer first aid to sb.对某人进行急救 go to sb’s aid援救某人
在某人的帮助下 with the aid of sb== with sb’s aid in aid of 支持，援助 raising fund in aid of the sick 募捐帮助病人 what's it all in aid of? 这是为了什么目的？
aid vt 帮助；援助 I aided him with money. 我资助了他。
help, assist, aid的区别
help, assist, aid这组动词同义词的相应名词分别为 help (helper)，assistance(assistant), aid, 它们都有“帮助”的意思。
（1）help和另外两个词的差别在于，help 含有比较强的“目的”意义。如果你失眠，服安眠药则有助于你入睡，这里包含着目的
A short while ago, my sister helped me to carry one of my old bookcases up the stairs.
片刻之前，我妹妹帮我把我的一只旧书橱抬上了楼。
May I help you to some more meat? 让我再给你一些肉好吗？
…but he was too busy helping himself to diamonds to notice any pain.……
但是他光忙着捞金刚石，顾不上感到疼痛了。
（2）assist从词源学角度讲，是“站在旁边”的意思，它清楚地包含着这种帮助只起着次要的作用
He assisted the professor in compiling the dictionary. 他帮助那位教授编了那本词典。
The assistant who served her did not like the way she was dressed.
接待她的那个店员不喜欢她的打扮。
（3）aid含有接受帮助者因为弱小而需要帮助的意思。
The Red Cross often aids flood victims. 红十字会常常帮助受水灾的难民。
2.drown vt. , vi (1)把...淹死 (2)使湿透; 淹没; 浸湿 (3)消除(忧愁等); 解(闷) (4)使沉溺于; 使迷恋(in) (5)搀淡; 冲淡(饮料等); (加水)化开(生石灰); 往...里加太多的水
be [get] drowned淹死, 溺死; drown oneself投水(自杀); eyes drowned in tears泪汪汪的眼晴
drown one's cares in wine以酒解忧; be drowned in fishing对钓鱼入迷了
The cheers of the audience drowned the professor's voice. 听众的欢呼声淹没了这位教授的声音。
Don't drown my whisky. 不要在我的威士忌酒里加太多的水。
3.accident/ incident/ event
1). accident 指意外或偶然发生的事故，特别是不幸的，有损害性的事故。
e.g. He was killed in a traffic accident.
注：accident为可数名词，前面可加不定冠词an,表示“一个”“一次”，习惯用语by accident为“偶然”，相当于by chance.
e.g. I met her in the street by accident, yet she had a bad accident three days ago.
我在大街上偶尔碰见过她，然而三天前她却遭遇了一场严重的事故。
2). incident 泛指不重要的事件，还可以指政治上有影响的重大事件。
e.g. I remember an incident that took place in Mr. Li’s class.我记得发生在李先生课上的一件事。
The Lugouqiao Incident broke out in July 7th, 1937. 1937年7月7日爆发了卢沟桥事变。
3). event 指重要事件，特别是有历史意义的重大事件
How to develop the western part of China well is an important event.如何开发好中国的西部是一项重要的活动。
4.choke vi, vt choked, choking (1)使窒息；闷死；使不能呼吸
The smoke from the stove almost choked me.炉子里发出的烟呛得我几乎透不过气来。
The madman choked his own child to death.疯子把他自己的孩子掐死了。
(2)塞住；堵塞；阻塞 The pipe was choked by cotton. 管子被棉花堵住了。
(3)（常与back连用）抑制，忍住（怒气、眼泪等）
5.catch fire: begin to burn be on fire: be burning
e.g. The house caught fire last night. The house is on fire.
注：catch fire 强调着火的动作，为瞬间动词词组，不可和表示一段时间的时间状语连用，无被动形式；be on fire 表静态，作表语或定语，可与表示一段时间的时间状语连用。
Ex: The forest caught fire last week. It is still on fire.
复习：1). set fire to sth./ set sth. on fire e.g. The robbers set fire to the bank after robbing.
2). play with fire 3). go through fire and water (for) 为…赴汤蹈火 4). be on fire for 对…充满热情
5). fire n. v. 着火，开枪，开除 (dismiss )
firework 烟火，烟火晚会 fireplace 火炉 fireman/fire fighter 消防员 fire escape 太平梯
6.container n. 容器 contain vt.包含，容纳 containment n. 包含
contain / include
e.g. The book contains 10 units. The book doesn’t include Unit 11.
Six were killed, including the boy. (连那小孩在内六人丧生。)
7.electrical adj. 电的，与电有关的 (of/ concerned with electricity)
electricity n.电流 electric adj. 发电的，使用电的 （using electrical power） electronic adj. 电子的
I want to buy an electric fan. （可不讲） This machine has an electrical fault. 这台机器有电器故障。
Reading
1.upside n.上边，上部 downside right side left side
upside-down adj/adv 1). 上下翻转过来 e.g. hold a book upside-down 倒拿着书
2). <口>乱七八糟的，毫无条理的 e.g. He has an upside-down way of doing things. 他做事毫无条理。
Burglars had turned the house upside-down.. 窃贼把房子翻得乱七八糟。
2.as if/ though
1)引导的从句如果是事实过可能性大，多用陈述语气。常于look, seem, taste, smell, sound,ect.搭配
e.g. It looks as if it is going to rain. It seems as if the boy has lost his way.
2)从句如果是主观想象或夸大比喻，与事实不合，常用虚拟语气。
e.g. He looks as if he were ill.（其实没病） He walks as if he were drunk. 他走路的样子象喝醉了。
He is a happy-go-luck(无忧无虑的) man as if he has no worries and cares in the world.
The young man with long hair looks as if he were a woman.
3.witness n. (1)(=eyewitness)目击者; (在法庭上经过宣誓的)证人 (2)[主要用于give witness, bear witness]证据, 证明; 证词 (3)[常省略定冠词]【律】连署人, 证人
a witness of the accident 事件的目击者;
These facts are a witness to his carelessness.这些事实证明了他的粗心。
She gave witness on behalf of the accused person.她替被告作证。
Witness vt. (1)亲眼看见, 目睹 (2)连署, 签名作证 (3)表明, 显示 (4)证明 (5)经历
She witnessed the accident.她亲眼看见该事故。 They witnessed the will.他们在遗嘱上连署。
Her blush witnessed her agitation.她脸红表示了她的激动。
None could witness that he was present.没有人能证明他在场。
He has witnessed many battles.他经历过多次战争。
4. count （count for）重要，(count sb/sth as) 认为，看作，被视作
Every point in this game counts. 这场比赛每一场比赛都很重要。
The fact that she had apologized counted for nothing with him. 她已经道歉，但他认为这是没有用的。
For tax purposes that money counts / is counted as income. 那笔钱算作收入，需要纳税。
[vn] I count him among my closest friends. 我把他看作一个最亲密的朋友。
[vn-adj] I count myself lucky to have known him. 我觉得很幸运。
[vn-n] She counts herself one of the lucky ones. 她认为自己是一个幸运者。
5.keep in mind
keep/ bear/ have sth in mind: remember sth She doesn’t seem to keep the matter in mind.
相关短语： change one’s mind e.g. Nothing will make me change my mind.
make up one’s mind e.g. I’ve made up my mind to be a doctor.
keep in touch with e.g. I keep in touch with my friend by internet.
keep in with 和…保持友谊 e.g. She still keeps in with her former husband.
5.calm vt. 使镇定, 使平静 The mother calmed her child. 母亲使孩子安静下来。
Calm vi. 镇定下来,平静下来The crying child soon calmed down.哭闹的小孩不多一会就安静下来。
Calm adj平静的
The sea was calm after the storm. 经过这场风暴后，大海平静下来了。
After the storm it became calm again.暴风雨过后,天气又恢复平静无风。
The sea was calm at the beginning of our voyage.我们出海时,海上风平浪静。
He was calm when I told him the bad news. 当我告诉他这个坏消息时，他很平静。
n. the calm before the storm
同义词 calm ，silent， quiet， still 都含 “平静的”意思。
calm主要用于气候、海洋“ 风平浪静的”, 也可指人表示“安静的”、“镇静的”, 如:
The sky is blue, and the sea is calm.天空碧兰, 海上风平浪静。
Although she was frightened, she answered with a calm voice. 虽然她害怕, 但还是用平静的声音回答。
quiet 指“没有吵闹声的”、“ 没有噪音的”,它强调“声音很低、很少”或“全然无声”, 如:
He had a quiet life.他过着宁静的生活。
still 指“没声音的”、“没动静的”, 常与躺（lie）、坐(sit)、站(stand)、保持(keep/remain)等静态动词连用, 如: the still hours before dawn 黎明前的寂静时刻。
The students sat still, listening to the teacher. 学生们一动不动地坐着听老师讲课。
silent 主要用于人，指人不说话、不作声、沉默不语。
Do you know when to keep silent? 你知道何时保持沉默吗？
考题 1. We must be __________ before danger. (A)
A. calm B. quiet C. still D. silent
2. The library permits________ talking. (B)
A. calm B. quiet C. still D. silent
6.panic n. 恐慌, 惊慌; 经济上的大恐慌
be in a panic在惊慌中; be seized with a panic惊慌失措; get up a panic 引起惊慌
cause a panic 引起恐慌
vi. 惊慌, 害怕 (panicked, panicked) panic over sth. 对某事感到惊慌
The crowd panicked at the sound of the guns. 人们听到枪声感到惊慌。
7. respond vi. (respond to sb/sth with sth )(formal)
I asked his name, but he didn’t respond.我问他叫什么名字，他没回答。
She never responded to my letter. 她从来没给过我回信。
When asked about the company’s future, the director responded that the remained optimistic. 问到公司的未来的时候，经理回答说他依然乐观。
How did they respond to the news?他们对这则消息有什么反应？
The car responds very well to the controls. 这辆汽车操纵自如。
response n. She made no response. 她没有回答。
Her cries for help met with no/some/little… response. 她那求救的呼声没有激起任何/激起一些/没有激起什么…反映。
answer/ reply/ respond
answer 指以口头，书面或其他方式回答或反应
reply 正式用词，多表示经过考虑，一一答复所提的问题或论点
respond 正式用词，表示“回答”用得较少，多指对外界刺激迅速而自然地作出反应
8.conscious adj (1)有意识的；神志清醒的 (2)了解的；察觉的
consciously adv. consciousness n. 知觉
He is hurt but still conscious. 他受了伤，不过神志还清醒。
She was not conscious of his presence in the room. 她不晓得他在这房间里。(be conscious of sth./ that…) 察觉的 I was conscious of her presence.我知道她在场。
unconscious adj (1)失去知觉的 After she hit her head she was unconscious for several minutes.
她把头碰了一下后昏迷了几分钟。
(2)无意的；不自觉的 I was unconscious of her presence.我不知道她在场。
9.on the way& in the way
in the way 障碍（阻止你到想去的地方的人或物）；on the way 在途中
e.g. Please don't stand in the kitchen door-you’re in the way. 你挡了我的路。
Let’s not stop too often on the way. 咱们别老在途中停留了。
其他词组：by the way顺便提一下；on the (one’s) way to 去…的路上；in this (that) way这样（那样）；by way of 途径；in a (one) way在某种程度上
10.tip vt, vi -pp-
I tipped the bottle over and it broke. 我把瓶子弄翻了，瓶子摔破了。(常与over, up连用;打翻，使弄翻)
I tipped the table and the glasses fell off it. 我把桌子弄歪了，玻璃杯掉了下来。(使倾斜；弄歪)
(3)丢弃；倒掉 (4)（与into连用）把…倒入容器
tip n. 尖端，小部分，小物件 v. 给某物装上尖头，置于某物顶端
(have sth.) on the tip of one’s tongue
the tip of the iceberg 重要情况，重大问题等显露出的小部分
e.g. His name is on t he tip of my tongue, but I just can’t think of.
The legs of the table were tipped with rubber. 桌子腿装上了橡皮头。
Tip: 轻拍/打/敲; 给…小费; 可能成功; 事先给某人警告或暗示
She just tipped the ball over the net. He tip the driver 5 Yuan.
She’s been tipped for promotion. 有人认为她最可能得到提升。
Someone tipped off the police about the robbery.
tip n.小费; 有用的小建议;
He left a tip under his plate.
The teacher gives students some tips about how to study English.
11. slightly adv. 略微，稍微
a slightly different version 略有不同的说法。 We took a slightly more direct route. 我们选择了一条略近的路。
I knew her slightly. 我对她略知一二。 ‘Are you worried?’ ‘Only slightly.’ 你担心吗？稍微有点。
slight adj. 轻微的, 微小的, 少量的;纤细的, 瘦小的
slight difficulty 小困难; a slight possibility of success很小的成功可能性
a slight girl苗条的女孩; a slight difference微小的区别
12.circulate vi, vt -lated, -lating (1)使循环；环流
The blood circulates round the body. 血液在体内循环。
(2)散布；流传；扩散 Rumors circulated rapidly. 谣言迅速散布开来。
People who circulate false news are to be blamed.散布流言者该受遣责。
(3)随意地到处走动
The prince circulated from group to group at the party. 王子在宴会中穿梭于人群之间。
“The politician circulated at the dance party, talking to lots of people.” “那个政治家在跳舞晚会上到处走动,同许多人交谈。”
circulation n. 流传，传播（不可数）；发行额，销售量（可数）；血液循环（可数或不可数） e.g. have (a) good/ bad circulation
13.revive vt, vi revived, reviving (1)复活；复苏；再生
The fresh air soon revived him. 新鲜空气很快就使他苏醒过来了。
(2)再兴；再用 to revive an old custom 恢复旧习俗
Our hopes revived.我们又有希望了。
These flowers will revive in water.这些花在水中会再活。
14.recovery recover 恢复+ -y名词后缀 n -ies
(1) 收回；取回 (2)恢复；复原 (3)（经济）复苏
She made a quick recovery after her illness. 她病后恢复得很快。
15.roll over 不及物动词词组
e.g. The car was out of control and rolled over down to the river.
The years roll on.岁月流逝。 Roll the ball to me.把球滚给我。
其他词组：get…rolling…使…取得进展；keep the ball to rolling 使保持活跃；
roll in 大量涌来；start the ball rolling 使活跃起来
Grammar
1.sudden adj. suddenly adv.
They heard a sudden cry and wondered what was the matter. 他们听到突如其来的叫喊声，不知道出了什么事。
all of a sudden 突然，冷不防 sudden death 暴死
2.in honour of (= in sb’s /sth’s honor) adv.为纪念, 为庆祝
I have cooked a special meal in honor of our visitors. 我做了一道特殊的菜向我们的来客表示敬意。
in…of: in praise of赞美；in need of需要；in place of 代替；in case of 万一；in front of在…(内部)前面；in the front of在…(外部)前面；in favor of 支持
honor n (1)尊敬；敬重
(2)荣誉，名誉；信用 to win honor for one's motherland 为祖国争光
(3)被引以为荣的人物 He's an honor to his parents. 他的父母以他为荣。
(4)（对法官等的尊称）阁下，先生 Your Honor 阁下，先生
(5)（用于客套语中）荣幸
We request the honor of your company at dinner. 谨备便酌，敬请光临（请柬用语）
考题 1.Miss Smith thought it a great _______ to be invited to speak to all of us. (D)
A. pleasure B. success C. happiness D. honor
2.Washington, a state in the United States was named ________ one of the greatest American presidents. (C) A. in honor of B. instead of C. in favor of D. by means of
Integrating skills
1.deal with
You dealt with that situation very cleverly. 你很巧妙地处理了那个艰难的局面。（处理，料理；attend to, manage sth.）
The next chapter deals with verbs.下一章讨论动词。（讨论,涉及到；take or have sth. as a subject, discuss sth.）
I hate dealing with large impersonal companies.我讨厌和那些没有人情味的大公司打交道。（与…打交道，与做生意；have social, business etc. relations with…）
另：deal with ab.: behave towards ab. 对付，对待
e.g. They try to deal politely with angry customers. 他们尽量对发怒的顾客彬彬有礼。
注：do with/ deal with/ get rid of
get rid of 表示“处理”，侧重“消灭”“摆脱或清除”；deal with和do with 侧重“处理”的手段，方法或方式。do后可接宾语，deal后不接宾语；do with常与what连用；deal with常与how连用。
e.g. If they are not coming, we can get rid of the tickets.如果他们不来了，我们可以把票处理掉。
How do you deal with matters of this sort？你是怎么处理这类事情的？
What did you do with the broken car? 你怎么处理那辆坏了的车的？
2.could have done
e.g. We could have helped that boy, even we were busy. 那天，即使我们很忙，我们本来也可以帮助那个男孩的。（本可以做，但事实没有做）
He could have told his girl friend the secret. But I’m not very sure. 他或许已经把这个秘密告诉他的女朋友了，不过我也并不确定。（或许已经做过，表示对过去某事的推测）
2). must have done 一定已经做过(表示对过去某事较有把握的推测)
e.g. They must have stayed up late night-all of them looks sleepy.
他们昨天晚上肯定熬得很晚了，他们看起来全都非常疲倦。
3). should have done/ ought to have done 本应该做(却没做，表达一种强烈的遗憾，责备之意)
e.g. They should have handed in their homework yesterday.
昨天他们本该把家庭作业交上去的。
4). needn’t have done 本不应该（但事实上已经做了）
e.g. You needn’t have copied the exercise book. I have one more and I can give it to you.
你其实不必抄那本练习册，我还有一本可以给你。
3.bite vt, vi bit, bitten, biting (1)咬 My monkey doesn't bite. 我的猴子不咬人。
The boy bit into the apple. 那个男孩子咬了一口苹果。
(2)咬成（某种状态）
The dog has bitten a hole in my trousers. 狗把我的裤子咬了一个洞。
(3)（虫）叮 The mosquitoes are biting me. 蚊子叮我。
(4)（鱼）咬饵 (5)抓紧；卡紧
The car's tires would not bite on the snow. 汽车轮胎在雪地里会打滑。
bite n (1)咬; (2)咬下的一块 (3)食物 (4)咬伤
She was covered in insect bites. 她浑身是虫子叮的伤。
This apple's good, do you want a bite? 这苹果很好，你想来一口吗？
He took a bite out of the pear.他咬了一口梨。
He hasn't had a bite (to eat) all day. 他整天都没吃东西。
The children haven't had a bite to eat all day.孩子们一整天什么也没吃过。
4.loose adj (1)没加束缚的；自由的 (2)散装的
“I bought these chocolates loose, not in a box.”“我买的这些巧克力是散装的,不是盒装的。”
(3)不坚固的，不牢的 (4)宽大的，肥大的（衣服） (5)疏松的
The ringleader of the gang had one hand loose but the other was tied to another robber's.
“匪首的一只手是松开的,但另一只手和另一个强盗的手捆缚在一起。”
(6)不精确的 (7)放荡的 a loose woman 一个放荡的女人
(8)无拘束的 a loose tongue 藏不住话的嘴（舌头）
(9)随便的；不严格的 a loose translation 不拘泥原文的翻译
Loose play lost them the match. 不经心的比赛使他们输了。
loose vt loosed, loosing (1)放松；释放
He loosened his collar of his overcoat.他解开了大衣领口。
(2)射（箭） (3)开，放（枪、炮） (4)使不受约束
Wine loosed his tongue. 酒后他说话随便起来。
5.see a doctor看医生see sb off 为某人送行see into调查,领会
see to sth处理某事 see to it that务必
6.call for需要,要求,邀请,去请
call on sb拜访某人 call at place去某地造访 call sb up给某人打电话
call in a doctor请医生=send for a doctor call on sb to do sth号召某人干call for sb to do sth请求某人干
call out for help大声呼救make a phone call打电话
7.in case of 如果；万一 In case of rain they can't go. 万一下雨，他们就不能去了。
in case以防；可能；倘若 Take a hat with you in case the sun is very hot. 倘若太阳很利害，你就把帽子戴上。
in the case of 就…而言
e.g. It’s the kind of story we think of as myth. But in the case of him, the story is true.
我们把这类故事视为神话，但就他来说，这故事却是真实的。
注：in case of/ in the case of + n./ pron. 不接从句
in case + 从句 He left early in case he should miss the train. In case of danger, you must be calm.
in any case无论如何, 总之; in good case健康, 生活富裕; in no case决不
in that case如果是那样的话; in the case of 就...来说, 关于; in this case假如这样的话
It /This/ That is not the case.情况不是这样; 并非事实。
Step Ⅱ Grammar
虚拟语气用法补充：
1. would rather 的虚拟用法：
Marry would rather (not) have a fresh-tasting toothpaste.
The mayor (市长) would rather have handled that press conference last week.
The kids would rather play outdoors than indoors.
The aged man would rather have participated in social service than amused himself by watching TV at home several years ago.
I’d rather you didn’t make any comment in the issue for the time being. (暂时)
e.g. David would rather that Jim had called at Chinese Economic and Trade Exhibitions yesterday.
2. would as soon, would sooner, would prefer 表“希望或婉转的责备”要求用虚拟语气，谓语动词为过去式表示现在或将来情况，谓语动词为过去完成时表示过去情况
I would just prefer you had returned the book to him yesterday.
3. otherwise, if only, suppose/ supposing 引导含蓄条件句表愿望，建议用虚拟语气
e.g. If only I knew how to operate the internet phone. 要是我知道怎么打网络电话就好了。
4. It is (high/ right/ about/ good) time + 从句用虚拟语气（是…的时候）
It’s high time you stopped idling about and started looking for a job. 闲逛
5. but for…（要不是…）& without … 用在句首，引导虚拟条件句，时态随句意改变
But for/ Without his uncle, the kid would have been drowned in the pool.
6. If it were not for… (要不是…) 与现在相反
If it were not for the fact that his father is on the board directors, he would never have a job.
If it had not been for your advice, I would have made a serious mistake.
7). but that + 从句（用虚拟语气）
e.g. I would go by steamer but that I’m a poor sailor. 要不是因为晕船，我就坐船去了。
8). as it is & as it were
as it is 用在句首“事实上，实际上，就目前的情况而言”
as it were 用在句尾“照现状，照原样”
Cao Yu is a sort of Chinese Shakespeare as it were.
Unit8 first aid
warming up
1.aid n (1)帮助；援助 first aid___________ (2)帮助者；有帮助的事物
An English-Chinese Dictionary is an important aid in learning the English.
习惯用语 do/ give/ offer first aid to sb.____ go to sb’s aid___ with the aid of sb== with sb’s aid_____
in aid of _____________ raising fund in aid of the sick what's it all in aid of? 这是为了什么目的？
aid vt 帮助；援助 I aided him with money. 我资助了他。
help,assist,aid的区别
（1）help和另外两个词的差别在于，help 含有比较强的“目的”意义。如果你失眠，服安眠药则有助于你入睡，这里包含着目的
A short while ago, my sister helped me to carry one of my old bookcases up the stairs.
May I help you to some more meat?…but he was too busy helping himself to diamonds to notice any pain.……
（2）assist从词源学角度讲，是“站在旁边”的意思，它清楚地包含着这种帮助只起着次要的作用
He assisted the professor in compiling the dictionary.
The assistant who served her did not like the way she was dressed.
（3）aid含有接受帮助者因为弱小而需要帮助的意思。The Red Cross often aids flood victims.
2.drown vt. , vi (1)_________ (2)____________ (3)消除(忧愁等); 解(闷) (4)使沉溺于; 使迷恋(in) (5)搀淡; 冲淡(饮料等); (加水)化开(生石灰); 往...里加太多的水
be [get] drowned____________ drown oneself___________eyes drowned in tears__________
drown one's cares in wine_______________ be drowned in fishing____________-
The cheers of the audience drowned the professor's voice. Don't drown my whisky.
3.accident/ incident/ event 的区别
4. count （count for）______，(count sb/sth as) _____________
Every point in this game counts. The fact that she had apologized counted for nothing with him. For tax purposes that money counts / is counted as income. [vn] I count him among my closest friends. [vn-adj] I count myself lucky to have known him. [vn-n] She counts herself one of the lucky ones.
4.choke vi, vt choked, choking (1)_________________
The smoke from the stove almost choked me The madman choked his own child to death.
(2)_______________ The pipe was choked by cotton.
(3)（常与back连用）抑制，忍住（怒气、眼泪等）
5.catch fire: _______________ be on fire:__________________
The forest caught fire last week. It is still on fire.
复习：1). set fire to sth./ set sth. on fire _________________2). play with fire ____________
3). go through fire and water (for)_________________4). be on fire for ______________
5). fire v. 着火，开枪，开除 (dismiss )
firework 烟火，烟火晚会 fireplace 火炉 fireman/fire fighter 消防员 fire escape 太平梯
6.container n. 容器 contain vt.包含，容纳 containment n. 包含
contain / include The book ___________10 units. The book doesn’t ____________Unit 11.
Six were killed, ___________the boy. (连那小孩在内六人丧生。)
7.electrical adj. 电的，与电有关的 (of/ concerned with electricity)
_________ n.电流 __________adj. 发电的，使用电的 （using electrical power）_________ adj. 电子的
Reading
1.upside n.上边，上部 upside-down adj/adv
1). ________hold a book upside-down 2). _______ He has an upside-down way of doing things.
Burglars had turned the house upside-down..
2.as if/ though 引导的从句什么时候用陈述语气，什么时候又用虚拟语气？
3.witness n. (1)(=eyewitness)______ (2)[主要用于give witness, bear witness]证据, 证明; 证词 (3)[常省略定冠词]【律】连署人, 证人
a witness of the accident These facts are a witness to his carelessness.
She gave witness on behalf of the accused person.
Witness vt. (1)______________ (2)连署, 签名作证 (3)表明, 显示 (4)证明 (5)经历
She witnessed the accident. They witnessed the will. Her blush witnessed her agitation.
None could witness that he was present. He has witnessed many battles.
4.keep in mind keep/ bear/ have sth in mind: remember sth She doesn’t seem to keep the matter in mind.
相关短语： change one’s mind ________make up one’s mind__________keep in touch with _________keep in with _________________
5.calm vt. _____________ The mother calmed her child.
Calm vi.___________The crying child soon calmed down.
Calm adj The sea was calm after the storm.。 After the storm it became calm again.
The sea was calm at the beginning of our voyage. He was calm when I told him the bad news.
n. e.g. the calm before the storm
同义词 calm ，silent， quiet， still 的区别
考题 1. We must be __________ before danger. A. calm B. quiet C. still D. silent
2. The library permits________ talking. A. calm B. quiet C. still D. silent
6.panic n. 恐慌, 惊慌; 经济上的大恐慌
be in a panic____________; be seized with a panic_______________; cause a panic __________
vi. 惊慌, 害怕 (panicked, panicked) panic over sth. ___________
The crowd panicked at the sound of the guns.
7. (respond to sb/sth with sth )(formal) _____________
I asked his name, but he didn’t respond. She never responded to my letter.
When asked about the company’s future, the director responded that the remained optimistic.
How did they respond to the news? The car responds very well to the controls.
response n. ________ She made no response.
Her cries for help met with no/some/little… response.
Her cries for help met with no/some/little… response.
answer/ reply/ respond 的区别
8.conscious adj (1)_______________(2)_________________
consciously adv. consciousness n. 知觉
He is hurt but still conscious.
She was not conscious of his presence in the room. (be conscious of sth./ that…)
I was conscious of her presence.
unconscious adj (1)__________ After she hit her head she was unconscious for several minutes.
(2)_____________ I was unconscious of her presence.
9.on the way& in the way
in the way, on the way 的含义分别是什么？
e.g. Please don't stand in the kitchen door-you’re in the way.
Let’s not stop too often on the way.
其他词组：by the way_____on the (one’s) way to _____；in this (that) way___by way of ____
in a (one) way__________
10.tip
I tipped the bottle over and it broke. (常与over, up连用;打翻，使弄翻)
I tipped the table and the glasses fell off it. (使倾斜；弄歪)
(3)丢弃；倒掉 (4)（与into连用）把…倒入容器
(have sth.) on the tip of one’s tongue
the tip of the iceberg 重要情况，重大问题等显露出的小部分
The legs of the table were tipped with rubber. She just tipped the ball over the net.
He tip the driver 5 Yuan. She’s been tipped for promotion. Someone tipped off the police about the robbery.
He left a tip under his plate. The teacher gives students some tips about how to study English.
11. adv. __________
a slightly different version We took a slightly more direct route. I knew her slightly.
‘Are you worried?’ ‘Only slightly.’
slight adj._______________ slight difficulty ________ a slight possibility of success_______
a slight girl___________; a slight difference________________
12.circulate vi, vt -lated, -lating (1)_________ The blood circulates round the body.
(2)_________________ Rumors circulated rapidly. People who circulate false news are to be blamed.
(3)____________ The prince circulated from group to group at the party.
“The politician circulated at the dance party, talking to lots of people.”
circulation n. 流传，传播（不可数）；发行额，销售量（可数）；血液循环（可数或不可数） e.g. have (a) good/ bad circulation
13.revive vt, vi revived, reviving (1)____________The fresh air soon revived him.
(2)__________ to revive an old custom Our hopes revived.These flowers will revive in water.
14.recovery recover 恢复+ -y名词后缀 n -ies
She made a quick recovery after her illness.
15.roll over 不及物动词词组
The car was out of control and rolled over down to the river.
The years roll on.岁月流逝。 Roll the ball to me.把球滚给我。
其他词组：get…rolling…_____keep the ball to rolling ____roll in _____start the ball rolling _____
Grammar
1.sudden adj. suddenly adv.
They heard a sudden cry and wondered what was the matter.
all of a sudden _____________
2.in honour of (= in sb’s /sth’s honor) _____________________
I have cooked a special meal in honor of our visitors.
in…of: in praise of____in need of_____in place of ____；in case of ____；in favor of ________
honor n (1)尊敬；敬重 (2)荣誉，名誉；信用 to win honor for one's motherland 为祖国争光
(3)被引以为荣的人物He's an honor to his parents.
(4)（对法官等的尊称）阁下，先生 Your Honor 阁下，先生 (5)（用于客套语中）荣幸
We request the honor of your company at dinner. 谨备便酌，敬请光临（请柬用语）
考题 1.Miss Smith thought it a great _______ to be invited to speak to all of us.
A. pleasure B. success C. happiness D. honor
2.Washington, a state in the United States was named ________ one of the greatest American presidents. A. in honor of B. instead of C. in favor of D. by means of
Integrating skills
1.deal with 含义？与do with 区别是什么？
2.could have done，must have done, should/ought to have done, needn’t have done 的区别是什么？
3.bite vt, vi bit, bitten, biting (1)________ My monkey doesn't bite. The boy bit into the apple.
(2)_________________The dog has bitten a hole in my trousers.
(3)_______The mosquitoes are biting me.
(4)（鱼）咬饵 (5)抓紧；卡紧 The car's tires would not bite on the snow.
bite n She was covered in insect bites. This apple's good, do you want a bite?
He took a bite out of the pear. He hasn't had a bite (to eat) all day.
The children haven't had a bite to eat all day
5.see a doctor______see sb off __________see into ________see to sth________see to it that______
6.call for________call on sb___________ call at place_____________call sb up____________call in a doctor__________=_____________call on sb to do sth____________call for sb to do sth___________call out for help_____________make a phone call___________
7.in case of _______ In case of rain they can't go.
in case_____________ Take a hat with you in case the sun is very hot.
in the case of ________e.g. It’s the kind of story we think of as myth. But in the case of him, the story is true.
in any case________________ in good case_____________in no case__________
in that case_______________ in the case of_____________ in this case___________-
It /This/ That is not the case.___________________
Warming up
1.board n&vt.木板，甲板,膳食费用（blackboard黑板）；上船；坐船，搭乘（公共交通工具）；供膳宿（boarding school 寄宿）
aboard adv.&prep.在船上，在公共交通工具内
2．But whether buses or trains，or boarding aeroplanes，there wasn't a door she'd get through．(P.25)
译文：但无论是汽车还是火车，还是天上的飞机，都没有她能进的门。
“whether...or...”用来引导让步状语，意为“无论／不管……还……”，此外，还可说成：“no matter whether...or...”。or后可接not或与前面意义相反的词。另外有些省略了whether...or...结构，已经成为习语，如：sink or swim，rain or sunshine等。
Whether you go or not，I will go．不管你去还是不去，我都去。
I am going whether it is raining or not．无论下不下雨，我都要去。
Whether you like or not，you'll have to do it．
无论你喜欢还是不喜欢，你非做不可。
Whether or not it rains，I'm giving a party tomorrow?不管是否下雨，明天我都要举办一个晚会。
I'll go，whether you come with me or stay at home． 无论你跟我来还是留在家里，我都要走。
Sink or swim，I shall do it．无论成败，我都要承担此事。
The football match will be held，rain or sunshine． 足球赛定期举行，风雨无阻。
Reading
3.Poetry also calls up all the colours，feelings，experiences and curious images of a dream world．(P.27)诗歌还能汇集梦中世界的一切色彩，感情，经历和各种奇妙的意向。
call up ①ring up；telephone打电话 ②征召……入伍 ③(使)回想起；把召唤回来
I'll call you up this evening．=I'll telephone you this evening．=I'll ring you up this evening．=I'll give you a call this evening．今晚我给你打电话。
He was called up in ．他于入伍。
This song calls up memory of my childhood．=This song reminds me of my childhood．这首歌使我回想起我的童年。
call短语还有：call for(demand，need要求、需要；来找某人)，call out(呼喊)，call in(叫……进来；招来)，call on sb.／call at a place(短暂拜访……)，call back(回电话)。
4. Poems by Du Fu，Li Bai and Wang Wei among others stand out in the halls of Glory．(P.27) 杜甫、李白、王维以及其他诗人的诗歌兀立在荣光宝殿之上。
stand out[站立→鹤立鸡群]v.①突出；引人注目；②杰出；出色。同源词outstanding形容词，意为突出的，杰出的，显著的。
The new road sign is easy to read；the words stand out．新路标易辨认，上面的字很醒目。
Among writers in China，LuXun stands out as a real master．在中国作家中，鲁迅最为杰出，是一位真正的大师。
an outstanding young musician一位优秀的年轻的音乐家
5. Modern English started around the time of Shakespeare，towards the end of the 16th century．(P.28) 现代英语诗歌开始于莎士比亚时代，即十六世纪末。
time名词，意为①时间②(常用复数)时代。此外还有“次、回、倍”等意思。
What time is it by your watch？你的表几点了？
Take the medicine three times a day．服此药一天三次。
The bag is 3 times the size of that one．这个包大小是那个包的三倍。
Mao Zedong's time(s)毛泽东时代
6．Shakespeare is most famous for his plays．(P.25)
译文：莎士比亚以他的戏剧最为著名。
[讲解]the most放在多音节形容词前，意为“最”，是最高级的表达形式。但most前不加the，意为：“非常”，等于“very”。
This is the most difficult book I've ever read． 这是我读过的最难的一本书。
This is a most difficult book． 这是一本很难的书。(This is a very difficult book．)
7. His sonnets，however，belong to the best English poetry．(P.28)
然而他的十四行诗是英国诗歌中的至尊瑰宝。
belong to意为“属于,不用于被动语态-to be a member of...；to be connected with...”
The book belongs to me．=I own／have／possess the book． 这本书是我的。
That lid belongs to the jar．那个盖子是配这个坛子的。
What party do you belong to？你属于哪个团体？
8。Chinese readers admire their works because of their use of surprising images that reminds them of the works of poets such as Su Dongpo．(P.28)
中国读者赞美他们，是因为他们作品中所用的令人惊奇的想像使他们想到像苏东坡那样的诗人的作品。
admire动词“钦佩、赞美、羡慕”-to think of or look at...with pleasure and respect”。
He is always looking in the mirror，admiring himself． 他常常对着镜子自我欣赏。
They admired our garden．他们称赞我们的花园。
I admired him for his success in business．我佩服他事业有成。
9. Once published，his work became famous for the absence of rhyme at the end of each line．(P.28) 发行后，他的诗作因为行尾不押韵而大获其名。
absent形容词①[表语]缺席、不在②[定语]心不在焉的
be absent from + 地点表示“不在某地” be absent in + 地点表示“外出去某地”
be absent from the meeting“缺席”
be absent in...当主语是无生命的名词时，意为“没有……”
an absent look on his face心不在焉的表情
He is absent in Europe．他现在外出在欧洲。
He is absent from Europe．他现在外出不在欧洲。
He is absent from the meeting．他开会缺席了。
He was absent from his work．他擅离职守。
Snow is absent in some countries．有些国家终年无雪。
absence名词，意为“不在、缺席”。
His absence from school is worrying．他一再缺课真令人担心。
It happened during his absence．事情发生在他不在时。
In the absence of the manager，I shall be in charge． 经理不在时，由我负责。
The visitors to Venice notice at once the absence of noise．
去威尼斯的游客马上会发现那里没有噪音。
10. Usually remembered for other work than their poetry are eighteenth century poets such as Pope and Johnson．(P.28)
Greatly loved in China，are the English Romantic poets．(P.28)
不是因为诗，而是因为其他杰作让人不能忘怀的还有的18世纪的蒲伯和约翰逊等。
英国浪漫主义诗人深受中国人的喜爱。
在英语中，有时为了强调句子某个成分而进行倒装，有的把谓语动词提前，有的把过去分词提前，有的把现在分词提前。
① 过去分词置于句首。如：
Also discussed was a proposal to reduce the sales tax...也讨论了减少销售税的建议……(这里倒装是由于句子主语较长)
Also said to be under consideration is a performance in Beijing．据说也考虑在北京举行。(这里过去分词与also连用，全句强调主语performance，倒装也与上下文衔接有关)
② 现在分词置于句首。如：
Covering much of the earth's surface is a blanket of water．
地球表面上许多地方都布满水。
Attending the party were 700 students from 15 universities and colleges．
参加晚会的有来自15所大专院校的700名学生。
11. The style and atmosphere in their poems have often led to comparisons with poets such as Du Fu and Li Bai．(P.28)
他们诗文中的风格和气氛经常使人们把他们的诗作与像杜甫、李白那些诗人的诗歌相比较。
1)atmosphere名词，常用单数，意为“大气层；某一地方的空气；气氛、情绪”。
a smoky atmosphere烟雾腾腾
The talk went on in a friendly atmosphere． 会谈在友好的气氛中进行。
There is always an unpleasant atmosphere in the office． 办公室里总有一种令人不悦的气氛。
2) comparison名词意为：相比、对比、对照。常用短语和句型有：by／in comparison with...(与……相比；相比之下)；There is no comparison(between...)(没有什么可比性)；bear／stand comparison with sb.／sth.(比得上某人／某事)。
It's useful to make a comparison between two things． 把两件事情相比是有益的。
By／In comparison with him，you are cleverer．与他相比，你更聪明。
My garden doesn't stand／bear comparison with his． 我的花园比不过他的。
-Is he as good as her at English？ -There is no comparison(between them)．
--在英语上，他俩谁更好？ --他俩根本无可比性。
12. More and more people are interested to read modern poetry in English．(P.28)
越来越多的人们对读英国的现代诗歌感兴趣。
be interested in doing sth.表示感兴趣的事情不太具体，是抽象概念；be interested to do sth.表示感兴趣的事情很具体。
Are you interested in playing football？你对足球感兴趣吗？
I'd be interested to hear your opinion about this．我到想听听你对这个事情的看法。
13．Reading poetry in English also opens the door to finding new ways of expressing yourself in Chinese．(P.28)
译文：读英文诗歌还能使你开启一扇大门，在那儿，你可以找到更新的用汉语表达思想的方法。
[讲解]注意本句中to为介词，介词to后表示有动作的意味时，该词用其动名词形式。类似的结构还有：be used to doing sth.习惯于做某事；devote...to doing sth把……贡献给……；contribute...to doing sth把……贡献给……；look forward to doing sth.盼望做某事。
He is used to getting up early．他已习惯早起床了。
He has contributed himself to serving the people． 他把自己的一切都献给了为人民服务上。
He is looking forward to seeing you soon．他正盼望早些见到你。
Post reading
14. Modern English came into being from about the middle of 16th century．(P.28)
come into being(existence)形成、开始存在。为不及物动词短语，所以不可用被动；bring...into being(existence)使……形成、存在。
When did the universe first come into being？ 宇宙是什么时候开始形成的？
Who brought the new regulation into being？这新规定是谁制定的？
15．I started with small poems，but now I most like long poems．(P.31)
开始时，我读一些小诗，现在我更愿意读长诗。
start with意为：“以……开始”；start as意为“作为……开始、开始时是……”
We started our English learning with ABC． 我们是以学ABC开始我们的英语学习的。
As a VIP，he started as only a clerk． 作为一名大人物，他开始只是一名小职员。
16。Ask your teacher to recommend poems to you．(P.32) 请你的老师为你推荐一些诗歌。
recommend动词，意为“推荐、介绍、建议”，常用句型为：①recommend sth.／sb.推荐某物／人；②recommend sb. sth.／sb.=recommend sth/sb. to sb.把……推荐／介绍给……；③recommend sb. to do sth.建议某人做某事；④recommend + that从句(that从句谓语动词用should + 动词原形，should可省略，“建议某人做某事”；⑤recommend sb.／sth. + as／for + 名词，推荐／介绍……当……
Can you recommend a novel？你能推荐一本小说吗？
The professor recommended me warmly．那位教授热忱地推荐了我。
The teacher recommended us to read novels in origin． 老师建议我们读原版小说。
They recommended that the match be held in China． 他们建议比赛在中国举办。
He recommended Lao Li as an experienced technician．他推荐说老李是一个有经验的技术员。
She recommended me for the Party membership．她介绍我入党。
My uncle recommended me to the manager．我叔叔把我介绍给经理。
I have been recommended that medicine。有人向我介绍那种药。
17。Collect your favorite poems in a notebook and ask your friends to contribute to it．(P.32)
把你最喜欢的诗歌收集在你的笔记本中，让你的朋友们也往里面增添些新诗歌。
contribute动词，意为“贡献、捐(款)、投(稿)、出(力)、起(作用)、分享(=have a share in)”。常用句型有：①contribute sth.②contribute + to-infinitive③contribute sth. to(towards)sth.④contribute to sth.。
Everybody is called to contribute ideas． 要求人人都想办法出主意。
Low wages and high prices contributed to increase the discontent of the people of that country．低工资、物价高增加了那个国家人们的不满。
He contributed all his time and energy to his work． 他把所有时间和精力都献给了工作。
Laziness contributed greatly to his failure． 懒惰是他失败的最重要的原因。
The fine weather contributed to the success of the expeditions． 好天气是这次远征的原因。
用作状语的过去分词
无论过去分词作状语还是现在分词作状语，分词的逻辑主语都要和主句的主语一致。过去分词与主句的主语应是被动关系。过去分词作状语，表示时间、原因、让步或伴随等，这种过去分词通常相当于状语从句。
1)表时间
(When the metal is)Heated，the metal expands．加热后，这种金属会膨胀。(The couple took good care of the baby while(the couple was)occupied by their work．这对夫妇一边工作，一边很好地照顾这个婴儿。
像第二句那样当强调实践概念时，过去分词之前可用连词when，while。
2)表原因
(As he was)Greatly surprised，he couldn't say a word．
他大吃一惊，一时说不出话来。
(Because she was)Scolded by the teacher，the girl felt unfair．
那姑娘因受老师责备，而愤愤不平。
3)表让步
Even if(I were)invited，I wouldn't go．即使受邀请，我也不愿去。
Though(they were)defeated again and again，they went on fighting．尽管一再遭受挫败，他们仍然继续战斗。
4)表伴随
He stared at me(he was)astonished．他两眼瞪着我，惊恐万状。
Einstein walked along the street，(he was)lost in thought．爱因斯坦漫步街头，沉浸在思索中。
Warming up
1. infect verb [vn] ~ sb/sth (with sth) 感染, 沾染上
It is not possible to infect another person through kissing. 接吻不可能把这种疾病传染给其他人。 people infected with HIV 感染爱滋病毒的人
Mary's high spirits infected all the girls in the class. 玛丽振奋的精神感染了班上所有的女孩子。
All the tomato plants are infected with a virus. 所有的西红柿植物都感染上了一种病毒。
Infected 感染病毒的， infection n. 传染，感染； infectious adj. 传染性的，感染的
an infected water supply 受污染的水系统；to be exposed to infection 暴露于易受感染的环境 an ear / throat, etc. infection 耳部/喉部感染
2. by swimming 通过游泳
相关词组：by accident=by chance 偶然地；by means of 借助，靠；by turns 轮流；by mistake 由于疏忽；by no means 决不
3. Live with 和。。。住在一起；忍受
As a boy, he lived with his parents but now he has his own house. 小时侯，他与父母一起住，现在有了自己的家了。
I can’t change the situation so I’m going to have to learn to live with it. 我无法改变形式，因此我不得不学着去忍受。
相关词组：live by 以…为生 ；live on 以…为主食
4. get tested for HIV进行艾滋病毒检测
get/be lost 迷路； get/be married 结婚； get/be separated 分离； get/be injured 受伤
5. via a 经由，经过（through a place） We flew home via Dubai. 我们乘飞机经迪拜回国。
b 通过，凭借（ by means of a particular person, system, etc）
I heard about the sale via Jane. 我从简那里知道了大减价。
The news program came to us via satellite. 新闻节目是通过卫星传送到这里来的。
Listening Part 2
6. take/make notes of 记下，记录
take note of注意到；将。。。铭记在心 take note of what he says. 牢记他说的话。
take no notice of没注意到
Reading
7. be born dying 天生快要死去
be born+adj/n be born a musician/a poet=a born musician/poet天生的音乐家/诗人
Para 2
8．AIDS is a disease that breaks down the body’s immune system and leaves a person defenseless against infections and illnesses. 艾滋病是一种破坏人的免疫系统，使人体对感染疾病没有抵抗能力的疾病。
break down意为： 打倒；破坏； 把。。。分类，划分； 使分解为。。。。。出故障；崩溃；如：
Chemicals in the body break our food down into useful substances. 人体中的化学元素把食物分解成有用的物质。
The robbers broke the door down.强盗把门砸开了。
The peace talks are said to have broken down.据说和谈破裂了。
The car broke down halfway to the camp.车子在去营地的半路上抛锚了。
break的相关短语：
break the law 犯法 break out (战争、灾害)突然爆发
break into 破门而入 break up 打碎；拆散；(物理)分解
break the silence 打破沉寂 break in 打断(谈话)；突然闯入
break through 突破
break away from 摆脱(束缚)；克服(习惯)；脱离(政府)
break up 粉碎，破碎，结束，散开，解散，break sth up 拆开，打散，结束（关系等）关闭，
这里leave是使役动词，意为“留下/使……处于某种状态”，后接形容词、副词、分词作宾语补足语。如：
The window was left open. 窗子开着。
They went back home, leaving the work unfinished. 他们撂下未完成的工作回家了。
9. help (to)keep
相关词组：can’t help doing 忍不住干…can’t help to do sth不能帮忙做某事can’t help but do不得不干help sb with sth帮某人干help oneself to sth随便，自取…with the help of sb 在某人的帮助下
10. living, alive, live, lively用法辨析：
①living表示“活着的；逼真的”，指人或物，在句中作表语或前置定语。如：
A living language should be learned orally. 一种活的语言应该通过口语来学习。
Shelly was still living when Keats died. 济慈死时，雪莱还活着。
He's the living image of his father. 他跟他父亲长得一模一样。
②alive多用作表语后置定语或宾语补足语，多用于人，表示“活着的；活的”。如：
Is she still alive? 她还活着吗？
They are the happiest children alive. 他们是当代最幸福的孩子。
An enemy officer was caught alive. 一名敌军官被活捉了。
③live作形容词时读作[laiv], 只用于物，作定语，表示“活的；活着的”、“现场直播的”。如：
This is a live fish. 这是一条活鱼。
It was a live broadcast, not a recording. 那是实况广播，不是录音广播。
alive亦可表示“（传统，习俗，机构）仍然存在着”的意思。如：
It was your way of keeping your marriage alive. 这是你保持婚姻不崩溃的办法。
(7)Ancient traditions are still very much alive in rural areas. 传统的习俗在农村地区仍很流行。
④lively读作[laivli]，在句中作表语或定语，表示“有生气的”、“活泼的”、“生动的”。如：
He has lively imagination. 他有丰富的想象力。
What lively colours! 多么鲜明的色彩。
He gave a lively description of the football game. 他对这场足球赛进行了生动的描述。
11. survive vi. 存活，生存 vt. 幸存，挺过 比。。。活得长
Para 3
12. People get AIDS after having been infected with HIV. 感染了HIV之后就会得爱滋病。
这里having been done 是动名词被动式的完成式。表示的动作发生在谓语动词所表示的动作之前。如：I'm sorry to have kept you waiting.
We are too young to have seen the old society.
I apologize for having made such a terrible mistake. I regret not having told her the truth.
The man in the corner confessed to ____a lie to the manager of the company.
A have told B be told C being told D having told
13. 动词contract的用法
▲动词contract在本课中作“染有（坏习惯等）”“染上（疾病）”“负债”解释。如：
He contracted an awful stomach complaint while he was traveling. 他旅游时患了严重的胃病。
He contracted huge debts by buying luxuries he could not afford. 他因购买买不起的奢侈品而债台高筑。
▲contract可作“订合同”“订契约”解释
The city council has contracted with White Company for the new library. 市政会已与怀特公司立约，由其承建这座新图书馆。
The builders have contracted for three new bridges this year. 建设者立约承建三座新桥。
▲contract的原意是“收缩”“缩小”。如：
Iron contracts as it gets cooler. 铁冷却时收缩。
Our business has contracted a lot recently. 我们的买卖最近萎缩了不少。
14. wish 引导的从句中的虚拟语气
一、在动词wish后的宾语从句中的虚拟语气
一）、对现在情况的虚拟（与现在的事实相反）：
I wish I knew the answer to the question.我希望知道这个答案。
I wish it were spring in my hometown all the year around.但愿我的家乡四季如春。
I wish I were a bird但愿我是只小鸟。
二）、对过去情况的虚拟（和过去的事实相反）：
用wish表示对过去事情的遗憾。
1. I wish I hadn't wasted so much time.我后悔不该浪费这么多时间。
2. He wishes he hadn't lost the chance.他真希望没有失去机会。
例题分析：I wish I ______ longer this morning, but I had to get up and come to class.
A. could have slept B. slept C. might have slept D. have slept
动词wish后面接从句，表达不可能实现或与事实相反的情况时，谓语动词要用虚拟语气，即用过去式（表示现在发生的动作）或过去完成式（表示过去发生的动作）。本题后半句谓语动词have用的是过去时had to get up and come, 所以前面要用过去完成时表示过去发生的动作。所以, 选项A)could have slept是答案
三）、对将来情况的虚拟(表示将来的主观愿望)：
从句动词“would/should/could/might + 动词原形”(时间上较后)。 用wish表示对将来事情的愿望。例：
1. I wish it would stop raining.我希望雨能停止。
2. I wish you would be quiet.我希望你安静一些。
3. You wished she would arrive the next day你希望她第二天会到。
4. I wish she would change her mind.我希望她会改变主意。
四）、注意：如果that 从句中用would , 一般表示对现状不满或希望未来有所改变或请求
I wish he would answer my letter. I wish prices would come down.
I wish you would help me. I wish you would stop asking silly questions.
15. lack一词的用法
lack在本课中作名词用，为不可数名词，后面常跟介词of。如：
Lack of rest made him tired. 缺乏休息使他疲劳。
I’ve got dark rings under my eyes from lack of sleep. 我睡眠不足，眼眶都发黑了。
Lack也可以作动词用，意为“缺乏”“缺少”“没有”，
I lack words with which to express my thanks. 我找不到话来表达我的谢意。
What you lack is perseverance. 他所缺少的是毅力。
They lacked a clear understanding of the problems. 他们对这问题缺乏清楚的认识。
16. as with 就象如同...的情况一样,如同...一样
As with the other production areas in the plant, safety and ecology are very important.
As with credit cards there is usually a 1.5% fee for obtaining cash, but no fee is added for purchases.
As with hiking, you should always think about your safety and wear good clothes. 正如远足一样，你应该总是想到安全，穿好合适的衣服。
17. available可用到的”、“可利用的”、“有用的”、“接受探访的”，常与介词for连用。如：
Is the manager available? 经理在不在？
These tickets are available for one month. 这些票有效期一个月。
I'm sorry, those overcoats are not available in your color and size. 对不起,这种外套没有你要的颜色和尺码。
Attention, please. These tickets are available on the day of issue only. 请注意，这种车票仅仅在发售当天有效。
Nowadays there is a lot of information available on the internet. 如今，可到因特网上获取大量的信息。
18. persuade vt. 说服；劝服；使某人相信(（常与into, to或out of连用）。 （常与convince 换用， 不过persuade 的主要意思为“说服，劝说”； convince 主要意思是“使确信，信服”） 例如：Try to persuade him to let us go with him.试着说服他让我们跟他一起去。（persuade sb. to do sth.）
I allowed myself to be persuaded into entering the competition. 我搁不住人家的劝说，就参加了比赛。 （persuade sb into (doing ) sth）
It will be difficult to persuade them than there’s no other choice. 很难让他们相信别无选择。 （persuade sb that ）
Persuasion(n. ) , persuasive (adj. 有说服力的，令人信服的)
19. as if或as though引导的状语从句
as if或as though引导方式状语从句，意为“好像”，在这种状语从句中，常用虚拟语气，具体用法是：当从句所述的情况与现在事实相反时，动词用过去式，与过去事实相反时，用过去完成时。如：
(1)He looks as if he were a football player. 他看上去好像是足球运动员。
(2)He talked about Paris as if he had been there. 他谈起巴黎来好像他去过那里。
(3)The room looks as if it had been empty for years. 这房间看上去好几年没人住了。
(4)It seem as if it were spring already. 现在仿佛已经是春天了。
(5)I remember the whole thing as if it happened yesterday. 这一切我记忆犹新，就像是昨天发生的事似的。
(6)He spoke to me as if he were an expert. 他对我讲起话来好像是专家似的。
【注】as if(though)从句的动作发生在主句动作之后时，用would+动词原形。如：
(7)It seems as if it would rain. 天似乎要下雨了。
Para 7
20. 注意这段中存在由that 引导的同位语从句和why 引导的定语从句
Integrating skills
21. Two weeks ago, Dr Richards had asked me a great many questions and taken samples of my blood. 两周前，Richards 医生问我许多问题并抽取我的血样。
a great(good) many相当于many，修饰名词复数形式，意为“许多；大量”。如：
I have a great many things to do today. 我今天有许多事情要做。
After a great many loud explosions, the race began. 在一连串喧闹的爆炸声之后,比赛开始了。
区别：(1) a great deal用作代词或副词，在句中作主语或状语。如：
A great deal has been said on this point. 关于这一点已经说很多了。
They still need a great deal more money to finish the project. 他们还需要一大笔钱来完成这个工程。
(2) a good deal of修饰不可数名词，意为“许多；大量”。如：
She spends a good deal of her time in Glasgow. 她的大部分时间是在格拉斯哥度过的。
Para 4
22. On the contrary, I now feel as if that was when my life really began. 相反，我现在觉得好像那才是我的生命真正开始之时。
on the contrary意为“与此相反”、“不是……而是”、“反之”。如：
- You must be tired. 你一定很累了。
- On the contrary, I feel wide awake. 相反, 我感觉很清醒。
(1) contrary 用作形容词，意为“相反的”、“相对的”、“格格不入的”。如：
Contrary to all advice he gave up his job and left for the south. 他不听任何劝告,放弃工作,去了南方。
Hot and cold are contrary terms. 热与冷是相反的词语。
Our sailing boat was delayed by contrary winds. 我们的帆船因逆风耽搁了。
(2) contrary用作名词，意为“反面”、“反义词”、“相反的事物”。如：
Cruelty is the contrary of kindness. 残忍是仁慈的反面。
He is neither tall nor the contrary. 他不高也不矮。
23. The cancer in my body has been defeated for the moment, but I know that I will never be completely free from it. 我体内的癌症暂时被打败了，但是我知道我永远不会彻底摆脱它。
for the moment意为“暂时, 目前”，在句中作状语。如：
Let's carry on with what we agreed for the moment. 咱们继续执行目前达成一致的部分吧。
有关moment短语：
in a moment 立刻，立即; for a moment 一会儿；at any moment 随时；在任何时候；at the last moment 在最后关头；at the moment 此刻； (正当)那时；the moment 一……就
for the moment, for a moment, at the moment和in a moment
▲for the moment作“暂时”“目前”解释。如：
Stop discussing for the moment, please. 请暂停讨论。
We have to stay in the inn for the moment as the hotels around are full. 由于周围的旅馆都已满了，我们暂时只能待在小客栈里。
▲for a moment意为“片刻”“一会儿”。如：
For a moment I thought of playing truant. 我一时起了逃学的念头。
I had to think for a moment before I remembered his name. 我想了一会儿才记起他的名字。
▲at the moment,用于现在时中，意为“此刻”；用于过去时中，意为“那时”。如：
I’m busy at the moment. 我此刻很忙。
Our manager is having an interview with a newspaper reporter at the moment. 我们经理此刻正在接受记者来访。
▲in a moment意为“立即”“立刻”。如：
You go first. I’ll come in a moment. 你先走，我马上就来。
It was done in a moment. 一会儿就完成了。
Don’t go away, the bus will start in a moment. 别走开，汽车马上就要开了。
▲of the moment （人，工作，议题等）红极一时，盛行一时
She is the fashion designer of the moment. 她是目前最红的设计师。
be free from 意为“解除；没有……的”。如：
The old lady is never free from pain. 老妇人一直在受苦。
The secretary was free from all blame for the errors. 这些失误完全不能怪秘书。
Free 意思很多，请看以下例句：
Please feel free to interrupt me if you don’t understand anything. (无限制的，无约束的)
He gave me free access to his library. (无限制的，无约束的)
The prisoner wished to be free again. (自由的)
All the books were given away free. (免费的)
Free of charge 免费
The doctor will be free in 20 minutes, can you wait that long?(空闲的)
He’s free with his money. (慷慨的，大方的)
用适当的介词填空：
①Can you wait ____ a moment? ②I'm afraid she's not here ____ the moment.
③This organization is free ____ tax worldwide.
24. Living with cancer has made me realize how precious life is and how important it is for us to take every chance to live life to the fullest. 癌症使我认识到了生命的可贵，认识到了抓紧时间充实生活的重要性。
（1）Living with cancer是动名词短语作主语
（2）感叹句本来应用陈述语序，在宾语从句中仍然用陈述语序。如：
What strange clothes he was wearing. 他穿的衣服多么怪异呀！
She said how nice it was of us to meet her at the airport. 她说我们到机场去接她真好。
（3）take chance意为“利用机会”、“碰碰运气”、“冒险”。如：
We will take the chances. 我们要冒这个险。
He is taking a chance by driving his car so fast. 他把车开得这么快是在冒险。
There is a chance that... 有……的可能; by chance 偶然地；chance of a lifetime 千载难逢的良机；by some chance 不知为啥；leave things to chance 听天由命, 听其自然
（4）to the full意为“充分地”、“十足地”。如：
She certainly lives life to the full. 当然她的日子过得很充实。
25. 语法
虚拟语气的三种句型是什么？
表示与现在事实相反的假设时,条件状语从句中的谓语动词用“过去式(be的过去式用were)”,而主句中的谓语动词用“would(should, could, might)+动词原形.”例如:
If I were you, I should study English. If he had time, he would attend the meeting.
表示与过去的事实相反的假设时,条件状语从句的谓语动词用“had +过去分词”,主句中的谓语动词用“would(should, could, might)+have +过去分词”.例如:
If you had taken my advice, you wouldn't have failed in the examination.
表示与将来事实相反的假设时,条件从句和主句所用的谓语动词怀“表示与现在事实相反的假设”的谓语动词相同,或者条件从句中用“were to(should)+动词原形”.例如:
If you come tomorrow, we would have the meeting. If it were to rain tomorrow, the meeting would be put off.
当条件状语从句表示的行为和主句表示的行为所发生的时间不一致时,动词的形式要根据它所表示的时间来调整.例如:
If you had worked hard, you would be very tired. (从句说的是过去,主句指的是现在.)
一、虚拟语气在简单句中的应用
1.情态动词的过去式用于现在进行时，表示说话人谦虚，客气，有礼貌或语气委婉，常出现在日常生活中。如：
Would you be kind enough to open the door? 请您把门打开，好吗？
2.用于一些习惯表达法中。如：
Would you like a cup of tea? 你想喝杯茶吗？I would rather not tell you. 我倒宁愿不告诉你。
3.用“may+动词原形”表示“祝愿”，may 必须置于句首。如：
May you be happy! 祝你幸福！ May you succeed! 祝你成功！
二、虚拟语气用于主语从句
在It is necessary (important, natural, strange, etc) that...和It is desired (suggested, decided, ordered, requested, proposed, etc.)句型中，谓语动词的虚拟语气结构用“should+动词原形”的结构，表示惊奇，不相信，惋惜，理应如此等。如：
It is necessary that we should clean the room every day. 我们每天打扫房间是有必要的。
It will be suggested that she should finish her homework this afternoon. 建议她今天下午完成她的作业。
三、虚拟语气用于宾语从句
1.“I wish+宾语从句”表示不能实现的愿望。如:
I wish you could go with us. 我倒希望你们和我们一起走。
We wish we had arrived there two hours earlier. 我们倒希望早两小时到那里。
2.动词command, demand, insist, order, request, require, suggest等后面的宾语从句中用“(should)+动词原形”。如：
I suggest that we (should) have a meeting. 我建议我们开个会。
We insist that they (should) go with us. 我们坚持要他们和我们一起走。
注意：只有当insist作“坚持(认为)”，“坚持(应该)”，suggest作“建议”解时，从句的动作发生在谓语之后，宾语从句才用虚拟语气。当insist作“坚持”，suggest 作“暗示，表明”解时，宾语从句通常不用虚拟语气。如：
Mike insisted that he had never stolen anything. 迈克坚持说他没有偷任何东西。
The expression on his face suggested that he was very angry. 他脸上的表情说明他很生气。
四、虚拟语气用于表语从句、同位语从句
advice, idea, order, demand, plan, proposal, suggestion, request等名词与表语从句和同位语从句连用，其谓语动词一般要用虚拟语气的结构“(should)+动词原形”。例如：
We agreed to his suggestion that we (should) go to Beijing for sightseeing. 我们同意他的建议，去北京观光旅游。
My idea is that we (should) do exercises first. 我的看法是我们先做练习。
五、虚拟语气用于定语从句
在It is (high) time (that)...句型中，定语从句的谓语动词用过去式，或should+动词原形(should不能省略，be 用were)来表示，意为“早该”。例如：
It is (high) time we left (should leave). 我们该离开了。
It is high time we went to bed. 我们该睡觉了。
六、虚拟语气用于if only 引导的感叹句中
If only I had taken his advice. 我要是听他的话就好了。
If only I were a bird. 我如果是一只鸟就好了。
Unit 7 Living with disease 知识清单
Warming up
1. infect verb [vn] ~ sb/sth (______ sth) ______
It is not possible to infect another person through kissing. people infected with HIV
Mary's high spirits infected all the girls in the class.
All the tomato plants are infected with a virus.
Infected ______， infection n. ______； infectious adj. ______
an infected water supply______；to be exposed to infection ______ an ear / throat, etc. infection ______
2. by swimming _______________
相关词组：by accident=by chance ______；by means of ______；by turns ______；by mistake ______；by no means ______
3. Live with ______；______
As a boy, he lived with his parents but now he has his own house.
I can’t change the situation so I’m going to have to learn to live with it.
相关词组：live by ______ ；live on ______
4. get tested for HIV进行艾滋病毒检测
get/be lost； get/be married； get/be separated； get/be injured
5. via a ______（through a place） We flew home via Dubai.
b ______（ by means of a particular person, system, etc）
I heard about the sale via Jane.
The news program came to us via satellite.
Reading
6. be born dying 天生快要死去
be born+adj/n be born a musician/a poet=a born musician/poet
Para 2
7．AIDS is a disease that breaks down the body’s immune system and leaves a person defenseless against infections and illnesses. 艾滋病是一种破坏人的免疫系统，使人体对感染疾病没有抵抗能力的疾病。
break down意为： a ______；b ______； c ______ d______；如：
Chemicals in the body break our food down into useful substances.
The robbers broke the door down.
The peace talks are said to have broken down.
The car broke down halfway to the camp.
break的相关短语：
break the law ______ break out ______break into ______ break up ______
break the silence ______ break in ______break through______break away from ______
break up ______，break sth up ______
这里leave是使役动词，意为“______”，后接______, ______, ______作宾语补足语。如： The window was left open. They went back home, leaving the work unfinished.
8. help (to)keep _________
相关词组：can’t help doing _________…can’t help to do sth_________can’t help but do不_________; help sb with sth_________help oneself to sth_________…with the help of sb _________
9. living, alive, live, lively用法辨析：
①living表示“______”，指人或物，在句中作表语或______定语。如：
A living language should be learned orally. Shelly was still living when Keats died.
He's the living image of his father.
②alive多用作表语, ______定语或宾语补足语，多用于______，表示“______”。如：
Is she still alive?
They are the happiest children alive.
An enemy officer was caught alive.。
③live作形容词时读作[laiv], 只用于______，作______语，表示“______”、“______”。如： This is a live fish. It was a live broadcast, not a recording.
alive亦可表示“（传统，习俗，机构）______”的意思。如：
It was your way of keeping your marriage alive.
(7)Ancient traditions are still very much alive in rural areas.
④lively读作[laivli]，在句中作表语或定语，表示“______”。如：
He has lively imagination.
What lively colours!
He gave a lively description of the football game.
10. survive vi. ______ vt. ______
Para 3
11. People get AIDS after having been infected with HIV. 感染了HIV之后就会得爱滋病。
这里having been done 是动名词被动式的完成式。表示的动作发生在谓语动词所表示的动作______。如：I'm sorry to have kept you waiting.
We are too young to have seen the old society.
I apologize for having made such a terrible mistake. I regret not having told her the truth.
The man in the corner confessed to ____a lie to the manager of the company.
A have told B be told C being told D having told
12. 动词contract的用法
▲动词contract在本课中作“______”“ ______”“ ______”解释。如：
He contracted an awful stomach complaint while he was traveling.
He contracted huge debts by buying luxuries he could not afford.
▲contract可作“______”解释
The city council has contracted with White Company for the new library.
The builders have contracted for three new bridges this year.
▲contract的原意是“______”。如：
Iron contracts as it gets cooler. Our business has contracted a lot recently.
13. wish 引导的从句中的虚拟语气
一、在动词wish后的宾语从句中的虚拟语气
一）、对现在情况的虚拟（与现在的事实相反）：
I wish I ______(know) the answer to the question.
I wish it ______(be ) spring in my hometown all the year around.
二）、对过去情况的虚拟（和过去的事实相反）：
用wish表示对过去事情的遗憾。
1. I wish I ______ so much time.我后悔不该浪费这么多时间。
2. He wishes he ______ the chance.他真希望没有失去机会。
三）、对将来情况的虚拟(表示将来的主观愿望)：
从句动词“would/should/could/might + 动词原形”(时间上较后)(请注意：主句和从句的主语不相同)。用wish表示对将来事情的愿望。例：
1. I wish it would stop raining. 2. I wish you would be quiet.我希望你安静一些。
3. You wished she would arrive the next day 4. I wish she would change her mind.
四）、注意：如果that 从句中用would , 一般表示对现状不满或希望未来有所改变或请求
I wish he would answer my letter.
I wish prices would come down.
I wish you would help me.
I wish you would stop asking silly questions.
Para 4
14. lack一词的用法
lack在本课中作名词用，为________名词，后面常跟介词________。如：
Lack of rest made him tired. I’ve got dark rings under my eyes from lack of sleep.
Lack也可以作动词用，意为“________”，
I lack words with which to express my thanks. What you lack is perseverance.
They lacked a clear understanding of the problems.
15. as with ________
As with the other production areas in the plant, safety and ecology are very important.
As with credit cards there is usually a 1.5% fee for obtaining cash, but no fee is added for purchases.
As with hiking, you should always think about your safety and wear good clothes.
Para 5
16. available可用到的”“可利用的”、“有用的”、“接受探访的”如：
Is the manager available? These tickets are available for one month.
I'm sorry, those overcoats are not available in your color and size.
Attention, please. These tickets are available on the day of issue only.
Nowadays there is a lot of information available on the internet.
Para 6
17. persuade vt. ________ （常与convince 换用， 不过persuade 的主要意思为“说服，劝说”； convince 主要意思是“使确信，信服”） 例如：
Try to persuade him to let us go with him.（persuade sb. to do sth.）
I allowed myself to be persuaded into entering the competition. （persuade sb into (doing ) sth）
It will be difficult to persuade them than there’s no other choice.（persuade sb that ）
Persuasion(n. ) , persuasive (adj. ________)
18. as if或as though引导的状语从句
as if或as though引导方式状语从句，意为“好像”，在这种状语从句中，常用虚拟语气，具体用法是：当从句所述的情况与现在事实相反时，动词用________，与过去事实相反时，用________。如： (1)He looks as if he were a football player. (2)He talked about Paris as if he had been there.
(3)The room looks as if it had been empty for years. (4)It seem as if it were spring already.
(5)I remember the whole thing as if it happened yesterday. (6)He spoke to me as if he were an expert.
【注】as if(though)从句的动作发生在主句动作之后时，用would+动词原形。如：
(7)It seems as if it would rain. 天似乎要下雨了。
Para 7
19. 注意这段中存在由that 引导的同位语从句和why 引导的定语从句
Integrating skills
Para 1
20. Two weeks ago, Dr Richards had asked me a great many questions and taken samples of my blood. 两周前，Richards 医生问我许多问题并抽取我的血样。
a great(good) many相当于many，修饰名词________数形式，意为“________”。如：
I have a great many things to do today.
After a great many loud explosions, the race began.
区别：(1) a great deal用作代词或副词，在句中作________语或________语。如：
A great deal has been said on this point.
They still need a great deal more money to finish the project.
(2) a good deal of修饰不可数名词，意为“________”。如：
She spends a good deal of her time in Glasgow.
Para 4
21. On the contrary, I now feel as if that was when my life really began. 相反，我现在觉得好像那才是我的生命真正开始之时。
on the contrary意为“________”、“不是……而是”、“反之”。如：
- You must be tired. - On the contrary, I feel wide awake.
(1) contrary 用作形容词，意为“________”、“________”、“格格不入的”。如：
Contrary to all advice he gave up his job and left for the south. Hot and cold are contrary terms.
Our sailing boat was delayed by contrary winds.
(2) contrary用作名词，意为“________”、“反义词”、“相反的事物”。如：
Cruelty is the contrary of kindness. He is neither tall nor the contrary.
22. The cancer in my body has been defeated for the moment, but I know that I will never be completely free from it. 我体内的癌症暂时被打败了，但是我知道我永远不会彻底摆脱它。
for the moment意为“________”，在句中作状语。如：
Let's carry on with what we agreed for the moment.
有关moment短语：
in a moment ________; for a moment________；at any moment________；at the last moment ________；at the moment ________；the moment ________
for the moment, for a moment, at the moment和in a moment 辨析
▲for the moment作“________”解释。如：
Stop discussing for the moment, please.
We have to stay in the inn for the moment as the hotels around are full.
▲for a moment意为“________”。如：
For a moment I thought of playing truant. I had to think for a moment before I remembered his name.
▲at the moment,用于现在时中，意为“________”；用于过去时中，意为“________”。如：
I’m busy at the moment.
Our manager is having an interview with a newspaper reporter at the moment.
▲in a moment意为“________”。如：
You go first. I’ll come in a moment. It was done in a moment.
Don’t go away, the bus will start in a moment.
▲of the moment （人，工作，议题等）________
She is the fashion designer of the moment.
be free from 意为“________”。如：
The old lady is never free from pain. The secretary was free from all blame for the errors.
Free 意思很多，请看以下例句：
Please feel free to interrupt me if you don’t understand anything. (____________)
He gave me free access to his library. (____________)
The prisoner wished to be free again. (____________)
All the books were given away free. (____________)
Free of charge ____________
The doctor will be free in 20 minutes, can you wait that long?( ____________)
He’s free with his money. (____________)
用适当的介词填空：
①Can you wait ____ a moment? ②I'm afraid she's not here ____ the moment.
③This organization is free ____ tax worldwide.
23. Living with cancer has made me realize how precious life is and how important it is for us to take every chance to live life to the fullest. 癌症使我认识到了生命的可贵，认识到了抓紧时间充实生活的重要性。
（1）Living with cancer是动名词短语作________
（2）感叹句本来应用陈述语序，在宾语从句中仍然用陈述语序。 如：
What strange clothes he was wearing. 他穿的衣服多么怪异呀！
She said how nice it was of us to meet her at the airport. 她说我们到机场去接她真好。
（3）take chance意为“________”。如：
We will take the chances. He is taking a chance by driving his car so fast.
There is a chance that... ________; by chance ________；chance of a lifetime ________；by some chance ________；leave things to chance ________
（4）to the full意为“________”。如：
She certainly lives life to the full.
24. 语法
虚拟语气的三种句型是什么？
1. 表示与现在事实相反的假设时,条件状语从句中的谓语动词用“________”,而主句中的谓语动词用________“例如:
If I were you, I should study English. If he had time, he would attend the meeting.
表示与过去的事实相反的假设时,条件状语从句的谓语动词用”________“,主句中的谓语动词用”________“.例如:
If you had taken my advice, you wouldn't have failed in the examination.
表示与将来事实相反的假设时,条件从句和主句所用的谓语动词怀”表示与现在事实相反的假设“的谓语动词相同,或者条件从句中用”________“.例如:
If you come tomorrow, we would have the meeting.
If it were to rain tomorrow, the meeting would be put off.
当条件状语从句表示的行为和主句表示的行为所发生的时间不一致时,动词的形式要根据它所表示的时间来调整.例如:
If you had worked hard, you would be very tired. (从句说的是过去,主句指的是现在.)
一、虚拟语气在简单句中的应用
1.情态动词的过去式用于现在进行时，表示说话人谦虚，客气，有礼貌或语气委婉，常出现在日常生活中。如：
Would you be kind enough to open the door? 请您把门打开，好吗？
2.用于一些习惯表达法中。如：
Would you like a cup of tea? 你想喝杯茶吗？ I would rather not tell you. 我倒宁愿不告诉你。
3.用“may+动词原形”表示“祝愿”，may 必须置于句首。如：
May you be happy! 祝你幸福！ May you succeed! 祝你成功！
二、虚拟语气用于主语从句
在It is necessary (important, natural, strange, etc) that...和It is desired (suggested, decided, ordered, requested, proposed, etc.)句型中，谓语动词的虚拟语气结构用“should+动词原形”的结构，表示惊奇，不相信，惋惜，理应如此等。如：
It is necessary that we should clean the room every day.
It will be suggested that she should finish her homework this afternoon.
三、虚拟语气用于宾语从句
1.“I wish+宾语从句”表示不能实现的愿望。如:
I wish you could go with us. We wish we had arrived there two hours earlier.
2.动词command, demand, insist, order, request, require, suggest等后面的宾语从句中用“(should)+动词原形”。如：
I suggest that we (should) have a meeting. We insist that they (should) go with us.
注意：只有当insist作“坚持(认为)”，“坚持(应该)”，suggest作“________”解时，从句的动作发生在谓语之后，宾语从句才用虚拟语气。当insist作“________”，suggest 作“________”解时，宾语从句通常不用虚拟语气。如：
Mike insisted that he had never stolen anything. The expression on his face suggested that he was very angry.
四、虚拟语气用于表语从句、同位语从句
advice, idea, order, demand, plan, proposal, suggestion, request等名词与表语从句和同位语从句连用，其谓语动词一般要用虚拟语气的结构“________”。例如：
We agreed to his suggestion that we (should) go to Beijing for sightseeing. 我们同意他的建议，去北京观光旅游。
My idea is that we (should) do exercises first. 我的看法是我们先做练习。
五、虚拟语气用于定语从句
在It is (high) time (that)...句型中，定语从句的谓语动词用过去式，或should+动词原形(should不能省略，be 用were)来表示，意为“早该”。例如：
It is (high) time we left (should leave). It is high time we went to bed.
六、虚拟语气用于if only 引导的感叹句中
If only I had taken his advice. If only I were a bird.
Warming up, listening and speaking
1. Which of the news media above is the most reliable? 以上的新闻媒体中哪一种最可靠？
reliable adj. 可信赖的; 可依靠的； 确定的
They are reliable friends. 他们是可信赖的朋友。
Is the source of the information reliable? 那个消息的来源可靠吗？
[链接] reliably adv. 可靠地；确实地 reliability n. 可靠性；可信赖性
rely on / upon = depend on 依赖，依靠
2. The man was fired. 那个人被解雇了。
fire的动词用法
(1) 解雇，开除
The company fired him for not coming to work on time. 那个公司因他不按时上班解雇了他。
(2) 发射 He fired his gun at the big snake. 他开枪打那条大蛇。
(3) 激发（人、感情等），使充满热情
The story fired his imagination. 这个故事激发了他的想象力。
3. The man faced difficulties.
(1) face v.t. 面临（困难等），应付， 面对；（危险、困难等）迫近
e.g. We must face our trouble and bear it. 我们必须正视我们的困难并勇于承受。
[短语] be faced with 面临，面对 face up to面对；承担
face the music接受（不愉快的后果或情况）
e.g. I was faced with a new problem.
She couldn’t face up to the fact that she was no longer young. 她无法面对自己不再年轻的现实。
The boy was caught cheating in the examination and had to face the music. 那个男孩被发现考试作弊，不得不接受惩罚。
(2) difficulty表示“难，困难”时用作不可数名词，表示“难题，难事”时用作可数名词。
e.g. She learned to speak English without difficulty. 她毫无困难地学会了讲英语。
We will face many difficulties in the future. 将来我们要面临许多难题。
4. The man was generous.
generous adj. 慷慨的；大方的；宽容的；豁达的；丰富的，丰盛的
e.g. He is generous with his money. 他出手大方。
He gave me a generous lunch. 他请我吃了一顿丰盛的午餐。
[链接] generous adv. 慷慨地 generosity n. 慷慨大方
5. Below is a list of ten things that happened today. 以下列出了今天发生的十件事。
本句为倒装句，正常语序应为：A list of ten things that happened today is below.
below看作副词，表示方位，当表示方位的状语或表语位于句首时，句子采用全部倒装的结构，即把谓语动词的所有组成部分都移到主语之前。这类作状语或表语的词常见的有：away, down, in, off, out, over, up, above, below, here, there及介词短语与分词。
Here is a seat for you.这儿有你的一个座位。
There goes the bell!铃响了。
Written on the blackboard are the names of those who were late yesterday.黑板上写着昨天迟到的人的名字。
6. France elected a new president.
elect v.t. 选举，推选
e.g. They elected a president. / They elected him as President. 他们选举了总统。/ 他们选举他为总统。
注意：若选举某人担任某职位，且该职位只有一个时，通常不用冠词。
e.g. Our classmates elected him as/to be our monitor.
They elected the old man to be chairman of the club.他们推选那位老人为俱乐部主席。
[辨析] elect, pick out, choose
elect是指通过正式手续的选举。
e.g. Roosevelt was elected four times to the presidency of the U.S.A.罗斯福四次当选为美国总统。
choose通常指在所提供的对象中，凭个人的判断力进行选择。
e.g. We had to choose between leaving early and paying for a taxi.我们不得不在早点动身和雇计程车中间作出选择。
There are ten to choose from.
pick out比较通俗，指按个人喜好或希望进行挑选，多用于有行的东西。
e.g. She picked out a scarf to wear with the dress.她挑选了一条围巾以配上她穿的衣服。
7. rob rob sb. / a place of sth. 抢劫某人（某地方）的东西
① steal sth. from sb. / a place 偷某人或某地的东西
② pick one’s pocket 扒窃
pick pocket 扒手
8. Food prices are going up. 食品价格在上涨。
go up上升，增长，提高
e.g. The temperature has gone up.
The lift went up to the fourth floor. 电梯升到了四楼。
反义词组：go down
9. A house in your city burnt down. Nobody was injured.你们镇上一座房子被烧毁。无人员伤亡。
(1) burn down 烧毁；使烧毁【强调破坏性】；（由于燃料烧尽）火力减弱
These houses were burnt down to the ground. 这些房子被烧毁。
The fire is burning down, get some more coal please.
[比较] burn up烧尽，烧光【强调动作的结果】；（火，炉等）烧起来，旺起来
e.g. Put some wood on the fire and make it burn up.
(2) injure vt. 使受伤；损害，伤害（感情）
e.g. The boy injured his leg.
In the accident his back was seriously injured.
I hope I didn’t injure her feeling.
[辨析] injure, wound, hurt, harm的区别：
injure伤害，损害（感情），损害（名誉）。普通用词，常指各种性质的身体上或精神上的伤害。多指事故中人或物的损伤，包括容貌、生理、身体等。
e.g. In the traffic accident, two were killed and three get injured.在交通事故中，两人遇难，三人受伤。
He was so injured in his pride that he stayed at home all day without meeting anyone.他的自尊受到了如此的伤害以至于他成天待在家里，不见外人。
wound使受伤，伤害，损害，主要指外界暴力或用武器造成身体上较重的伤害，像刀伤、枪伤、刺伤等。多指战场上受伤，还可以指精神上的创伤。
e.g. The soldier was badly wounded in the head.这个士兵头部受了重伤。
The bullet wounded his arm.子弹打伤了他的胳膊。
hurt伤害（感情）。普通用词，没有injure正式，常用于口语。多用于有生命的东西，常指肉体上的伤害，也可以指精神上的痛苦或感情上的伤害。作不及物动词，表“疼痛”。
e.g. Luckily no one was seriously hurt in the car accident.
The girl fell off her bike, and one of her legs hurt.
harm常用于口语，表示肉体或精神上的伤害均可以，有时可引起不安，不便。
e.g. There was a fire in our street, but no one was harmed.
Getting up early won’t harm you! 早起对你没有害处。
Reading:
10. Newspapers and other media do more than simply record what happens.报纸和其他媒介并不仅仅记录已发生的事情。
more than不仅仅；极为，非常；多于；难以；不能
① He is more intelligent than his brother. 他比他哥哥更聪明。(用于比较级)
② I like football more than swimming. 我喜爱足球胜过游泳。
③ I'm afraid I've eaten more than enough. 我怕我是吃得过多了。
④ The boy more than smiled but laughed. 这男孩不仅是微笑，而是放声大笑了。
⑤ That is more than I can tell. 那是怎么回事我实在难说。
⑥ Newspapers and other media do more than simply record what happens. 报纸和其它传媒不仅仅是记录发生的事。
⑦ More than 100 people attended the dinner party.
⑧ The beauty of Hangzhou is more than words can describe. 杭州景色之美，是语言所不能描述的。
⑨ He is more than selfish. =very selfish.
① more than + 数词，表示“以上，多于”
② more than + 名词，表示“不只，不仅仅，不同于”
③ more than + 动词，表示“十分，极大地，远远地”
④ more than + 形容词或副词，意为“非常，更加”
⑤ more than … can / could 意为“不能”
11. Experienced editors and reporters make informed decisions about what events to report and how to report them.经验丰富的编辑和记者对于该报道什么事件以及如何报道作出明智的决定。
(1) 句中的experienced(富有经验的)和informed(见识广的，有知识的) 都是动词的过去分词作定词，修饰动词。单个的过去分词作定语时，通常放在它所修饰的名词前面。
e.g. a fallen tree一棵倒下的树 a broken chair一把破椅子 stolen cultural relics被盗的文物
(2) informed adj. 明智的，有知识的，了解情况的
e.g. He is a well-informed man.他是个消息灵通的人。
inform的用法:
① inform sb of/about sth. 告知某人某事
② inform sb. that…/wh-…告知某人
③ inform sb.+疑问词+ to do sth.
④ Informed adj. 见多识广的
⑤ Keep sb informed of/about sth
Information u
e.g. The singer informed us of their arrival.歌手们把他们到来的消息告诉了我们。
The nurse informed me that visiting hours were over.护士告诉我探病时间已经结束了。
Who informed you when to start? 是谁告诉你们出发时间的？
12. They also make sure that readers can relate to the stories.他们还要确保报道的内容与读者的生活密切相关。
relate v.i. & v.t （和～）相关；涉及；把～与～关联起来
① relate vt.把…联系起来
② relate … with / to.. 把…联系起来
③ relate to 与…有关, 涉及
be related to sb. 有亲威关系
e.g. It is difficult to relate the two cases. 很难把两个案子联系起来。
We should learn to relate the results to the causes.我们应该学会把结果与原因联系起来看问题。
Light industry is closely related to the people’s life.轻工业与人们的生活有密切的关系。
13.The two reporters agreed to switch roles for once and be the interviewees rather than the interviewers in order to let us know about their work and how the news we read in made.两位记者同意交换角色，作一次受访者而不是采访者，让我们了解他们的工作，了解我们读到的新闻是怎样制作和编写出来的。
(1) switch v. 转换，改变
e.g. He is always switching jobs. 他总变换工作。
He switched the recorder to the “off” position.他将录音机拧到“关”的位置。
(2) for once 就这（那）一次
e.g. For once they broke the rule.这一次，他们违规了。
For once our manager came late. 我们的经理这次来晚了。
He beat me for once.他只有一次赢了我。
Once: (conj) 一……就;一旦.兼有as soon as 和if 的双重含义，从句中常用一般现在时代替将来时，主句常用将来时．
Eg: Once he arrives, we can start the meeting. 他一到我们就开会．
Once seen, it will never be forgotten. 一旦看到，它就不会忘记．
Once:做副词时表示一次，从前等意思.
Eg: I’ve only met him once. 我只见过他一次．
(2) rather than的特点是连接前后两个平行结构，即要求前后成分要一致。
e.g. He decided to write to rather than (to) phone.他决定写信而不打电话了。
I’d like to go there in autumn rather than in summer.我愿意秋天去那里而不愿意夏天去。
He was engaging in writing a letter rather than reading a newspaper.他正忙着写信而不是看报纸。
14. After the interview, the reporter must present the material in an organized way and make sure that the article reflects events and opinions truthfully.采访后，记者一定要提交出组织严密的材料，并确保文章的真实反映事实和舆论。
(1) present（1） vt. 提出；呈现；送给；递交
present sth to sb 把某物赠送或呈现给某人
present sb to sb （向地位较高的人）介绍（引见）某人
Eg: He presented his views and sat down.他陈述了自己的观点后坐下了．
（2） adj. 在场的，现在的
Eg: Every member of the class was present.班里每个学生都到了．
（3） n.现在；礼物
e.g. When will you present your report?你什么时候提出报告？
The government presented cars to the hospitals. 政府向医院赠送了一些车。
Allow me to present Mr. Brown to you. 请允许我把布朗先生介绍给你。
I live in the present, not the past.我活在现在，不是过去.
(3) reflect vt. 反映；表现；反射；映出
e.g. This letter is sure to reflect our real opinion.这封信会反映出我们的真实意见。
Her face was reflected in the mirror.她的脸映现在镜子里。
Mirrors reflect light.镜子能反射光线。
15. My favourite article is the one I wrote about the efforts to bring stolen cultural relics back to China.我最喜欢的文章是我写的一篇关于如何努力把被盗的文物带回中国。
(1) 本句中的one是代词，用来指代article。one常用来代替前文提到的一种可数的事物。
e.g. I haven’t a pen. Can you lend me one?
指代可数名词复数用ones。
e.g. On the desk there is a red pencil and two black ones.
(2)effort n. [U,C]努力；艰难的尝试；努力的结果
e.g. He did it without effort.他毫不费力地完成那件事
[短语] make an effort努力，尽力 spare no effort不遗余力
16. I want to write about people you seldom read about, for example people who have AIDS or who are addicted to drugs.我想报道那些你们很少能了解的人，如艾滋病患者或者是染上毒瘾的人。
(1) seldom adv. 很少；不常；难得
[扩展] 表示否定意义的状语位于句首时，句子通常采用倒装句。
e.g. Seldom does he quarrel with others.
Never did I dream of seeing him in America.
Never before have so many people come to see him.
Not a single word did she say.
(2)be / get / become addicted to sth. / doing sth.对~成瘾/成癖
e.g. It doesn’t take long to become addicted to these drugs.服用这些毒品不要多长时间就会上瘾。
It’s a pity that her child has got addicted to smoking.真可怜，她的孩子抽烟上瘾了。
Some children are addicted to computer games / TV.(喻)一些孩子玩电脑游戏/看电视上了瘾。
He is addicted to practicing Chinese Gongfu.他醉心于练习中国功夫。
17. We shouldn’t ignore what happens even if it is difficult for people to accept some stories.即使人们对一些现象很难接受，我们也不应该无视眼前发生的事情。
(1) ignore vt. 不理睬；忽视
e.g. You shouldn’t ignore your father’s advice.你不该无视父亲的忠告。
I tried to tell her but she ignored me.我打算告诉她，可是她不理睬我。
Ignorance n. ignorant adj be ignorant of sth=don’t know about sth
(2) even if / even though即使，尽管
e.g. The young man didn’t lose heart even if he had failed many times in finding a job.这个年轻人没有放弃，尽管他多次未能找到工作。
18. The media can often help solve problems and draw attentions to situations where help is needed.媒介常可帮助解决难题，使人们关注需要得到帮助的情况。
draw attention to关注某事 draw / attract one’s attention引起某人的注意
e.g. This article will draw attention to farmers and agriculture.这篇文章奖让人关注农民和农业问题。
The fallen leaves drew /attracted the worker’s attention.这些落叶引起了那个工人的注意。
He drew my attention to a mistake in my homework.他要我注意作业中的一处错误。
focus one’s attention on 把注意力集中在……
(注)attention 是不可数名词,常被much, little, no等词修饰.
attentive (adj) attentively(adv)
Eg: The teacher was pleased to have such attentive students.
老师很高兴有这么认真的学生.
19. The result is a better understanding of the world on all sides, leading to a future world where people from all countries are respected and different views and opinions are tolerated.结果会使人们更好地了解世界地各个方面，给人们带来一个人人受到尊重，不同观念得到包容地未来世界。
(1) on all sides(=on every side) 在各方面，四面八方
e.g. They were trapped with enemies on all sides.他们四面楚歌。
The enemy were attacking on all sides.敌人从四面八方发起进攻。
side by side并肩，并排，紧贴
take sides (with somebody)支持某方
(4) tolerate v.t. 容忍，忍受，允许
e.g. I can’s tolerate that loud music / that kind of behavior.我无法忍受那么响的音乐/那种行径。
Cheating on exams cant’ be tolerated. 考试作弊是不能容忍的。
tolerance n 容忍，宽容 tolerant adj. 容忍的，宽容的
20. I would not believe it, but I might check other sources and maybe change my mind.
change one’s mind改变主意
e.g. Since getting to know him better, I have changed my mind about him.更深入地了解以后，我改变了我对他地看法。
[相关短语] bear / keep in mind 记住 call/bring to mind 使人想起 out of one’s mind 精神错乱，发狂 never mind 不要紧，没关系 have sth. in mind 记得某事，想起某事
21.Famous people are often asked for their opinions on current affairs.名人经常接受采访、被问及对时事地看法
current affairs 当前的事件；时事
affairs复数形式表示“重要事件，事务”（常用复数形式，且一般不与定冠词连用）
e.g. The minister deals with important affairs of State.这位大臣处理重要的国务。
current adj. 此刻的，现时的，当前的
e.g. current fashions时装 current events时事
22.be concerned with/about sth 关于，有关
be concerned about/ for sth 担心某事
as/so far as somebody/something is concerned 就某人/某事而言
be concerned that…(=be worried/ anxious….) 担心
concerning( prep. =about) 关于
23． Nine out of ten women who were interviewed about the product said they liked it.
nine out of ten(=nine in ten)十之八九，百分之九十
e.g. Nine out of ten people will not agree with you. 也可以说
Four out of the ten children there can go to school.在那里十个孩子中只有四个可以上学。
24. And I like the way the fans look up to them.
look up to尊敬，敬仰（反义：look down on轻视，看不起）
e.g. The young should look up to the old.年轻人应该尊敬老人。
25. Americans will fall in love with this game too.
fall in love with爱上（表示动作，不延续）
e.g. I fell in love with her at first sight.我对她一见钟情。
She fell in love with the house as soon as she saw it.
[比较] be in love (with) 相爱，喜欢（表示延续状态）
e.g. If you’re really in love with art, you don’t mind hard work.
Homework: Do exercises on page 13 / 91
Integrating Skills
26. Brave and strong, the activists talked to workers outside the factory…
brave and strong是形容词作状语，形容词或形容词短语作状语，通常说明主语行为的原因、方式、伴随状况等。
e.g. Cold and hungry, he decided to stop and have a rest. （表原因）又冷又饿，他决定停下来休息一会儿。
Ripe, the oranges taste sweet.（表方式）这些橘子熟了，味道甜美。
27. The peaceful meeting ended when the company sent out a group of angry men armed with sticks to fight with the citizens.
arm v.t. 武装，用武器装备
e.g. The robber was armed.那个强盗有武器。
The soldiers were armed to teeth.士兵们武装到牙齿
28 I’m sure they won’t feel disappointed.
disappoint v.t. 使失望 disappointing adj. 令人失望的 disappointed adj. 失望的
e.g. The book disappointed me.这本书令我失望。
The news was really disappointing.那个消息真令人感到失望。
Are you very disappointed about losing the game?你是不是因为比赛输了而感到很失望?
Grammar语法详释
The Past Participle used as Attribute and Predicative过去分词作定语和表语
过去分词在句中可承担形容词和副词在句中的作用，充当定语和表语。
1．过去分词作定语
(1) 在句中的位置
单个的过去分词作定语时，位于它所修饰的名词或代词前面；过去分词短语作定语时，位于它所修饰的名词或代词后面。
a broken heart一颗破碎的心 a lost dog丧家之犬 a risen sun已升起的太阳
an organized trip有组织的旅行 a broken glass被打破的玻璃杯
a trip organized by the league由共青团组织的旅行
a glass broken by the boy被这个男孩打破的玻璃杯
The excited people rushed out of the building.
They found a damaged car at the gate of the park.
(2) 所表示的时间
过去分词作定语时，所表示的动作或者在谓语所表示的动作之前发生，或者没有一定的时间性。
The letter posted yesterday will soon reach him.他很快就能收到昨天寄出的信了。
Have you read the books written by the young writer？你读过那位年轻作家写的小说吗？
(3) 语法功能
过去分词或过去分词短语作定语时，其功能相当于一个定语从句。
The stolen bike belongs to Jack.被偷的自行车是杰克的。
The bike which had been stolen belongs to Jack.
The lecture given by Professor Zhang is about environment protection.张教授所做的报告是关于环境保护的。
The lecture which was given by Professor Zhang is about the environment protection.
2. 过去分词作表语
(1) 过去分词作表语时，多表示主语所处的状态。
The door remained locked.门仍然锁着。
She looked disappointed.她看上去挺失望。
He seemed quite delighted at the good news.听到这个好消息，他似乎很开心。
(2) 常见作表语的过去分词有：upset, disappointed, drunk, amused, frightened, married, excited, experienced, interested, confused, pleased, puzzled, satisfied, tired, worried等。
(3) 有些过去分词作表语时，构成的谓语很接近被动结构。
Everything is settled down.一切都解决了。
Thank heavens! The boy is saved.谢天谢地，孩子得救了。
The town is surrounded on three sides by mountains.这座小镇三面环山。
Warming up
1. Make a/no/some difference 有作用，关系，影响
The rain didn’t make much difference to the game. 这场雨对比赛没多大影响。
Your age shouldn’t make any difference to whether you get the job or not. 你能否得到工作与你的年龄无关。
Changing schools made a big difference to my life. 转学对我的一生有重大影响。
I don’t think it makes a lot of difference what color it is. 我认为颜色无关紧要。
2. undertake(undertook，undertaken) vt．承担 ，从事，负责；（允诺，答应 undertake to do ）
例：He undertook the difficult task willingly．他欣然承担那项困难的工作。
1 will undertake the responsibility for you．我会为你负起责任。
He undertook to finish the job by Friday. 他答应星期五或之前完成这项工作。
Speaking
3. There is no doubt that． 毫无疑问 ．．
例：There is no doubt that our team will win．我队获胜是毫无疑问的。
I don't doubt that we will win the game．(否定句用that)我不怀疑我们将会赢得这场比赛。
Do you doubt that he has passed the final examination ? (疑问句用that)你怀疑他已通过期末考试了吗?
I doubt whether he is the best man for the job．(肯定句用whether)我怀疑他是否是担任那项工作的最适当人选。
Reading
4. imagine 用法 (imagine (sb) doing, imagine that …. )
5. promising (形) 有希望的，有前途的，前途光明的
例：a promising actress有前途的女演员
6. give up
7. dream of /about /that
8. hope for / to do /that
9. There didn't seem much point in working on my PhD-I didn't expect to survive that long
取得博士学位对我来说没有什么意义，我没有期望活那么久。
1）PhD(Doctor of Philosophy ) 指“博士学位”
2）There is no point in doing sth．表示“做某事没有作用或没有意义”。
例：There is no point in arguing further． 继续争执下去没有意义了。
There is no point in protesting．It won’t help much．抗议没有什么用处，于事无补。
Expect 预料，预计，期待，盼望；期望 常用搭配：expect (sb) to do, expect that
3）Survive vi. 生存，存活 vt. 幸存，挺过，艰难度过
She was the last surviving member of the family. 她是这家人中仅存的一员。
Of the six people injured in the crash, only two survived. 因车祸受伤的6人中， 只有2人幸存。
The company managed to survive the crisis. 公司设法度过了危机。
Many birds didn’t survive the severe winter. 许多鸟死于这次严冬。
4）that在此处为副词，意为“那么”，可以修饰形容词。
例：I didn't expect he was that rude． 我没料到他会那么粗鲁。
10. In fact，things were going rather well for me and I had gotten engaged to a very nice girl，Jan Wilde．事实上，事情发展得还挺顺利。我和一位非常好的女孩简怀尔得订婚了。
get／be engaged to sb．“与某人订婚”
Did you hear they have got engaged last month? 你有没有听说他们上个月订婚的消息?
Be engaged in(on)+n．／doing sth．从事(工作)的，忙于……的
例：She was engaged in protecting wild birds．她从事保护野生鸟类的工作。
He is now engaged on his second novel. 他正埋头写他的第二部小说。
be engaged (电话等)通话中的，占线中的，相当于美国英语的busy．
例：The line／number is engaged。线路被占用。
engagement n．订婚(to)
例：announce one's engagement to…宣布与…订婚
break off one's engagement解除婚约，解约
engagement ring订婚戒指(戴在左手无名指上)
11. Since then，Hawking has continued to seek answers to questions about the nature of the universe．从那时起，霍金就继续寻求关于宇宙特征的问题的答案。
seek+(for after)+名词 搜寻，寻找；寻求，探求；追求
例：They sought shelter from the rain．他们找寻避雨的地方。
He found it worthless to seek fame．他发现追求名声是不值得的。
We must seek (for) a solution to the problem 我们必须寻求解决问题的方法。
Seek to do 试图，设法
They quickly sought to distance themselves from the protester. 他们迅速设法远离抗议者。
12. Scientists，on the other hand，Hawking writes，know that their job is never finished and that even the best theory can turn out to be wrong．
霍金写到，从另一个方面说，科学家知道他们的工作是永无止境的，即使是最完美的理论，也可能是错误的。
Turn out to be“结果是”“最后的情况是”+副／+形／+to do／+that．．
The weatherman said it was going to rain this afternoon but it turned out to be very lovely．天气预报说今天下午有雨，其实今天天气非常好。
Despite our worries everything turned out well. 尽管我们很担心， 一切都很顺利。
The lecture turned out to be very dull．讲座结果很无聊。
The rumor turned out (to be) true．那谣言后来证明是真的。
It turned out (that) two travelers had been killed 后来证实(查明)有两位旅客丧生。
turn out vt. (可分开用 ) 生产 (产品)，出产
The factory can turn out l000cars a day． 这家工厂一天能生产1000辆汽车。
13. observe vt.观察，看到，注意到
She has observed the stars all her life. 她一生观察星体。
They observed the thief stealing /steal the money. 他们看见这个小偷偷了钱。（observe sb do /doing sth.）
vt. 遵守（规则，法律等）
language study
14. use sth up 用光
Making soup is a good way of using up leftover vegetables. 把剩下的蔬菜全部用来做汤是个好主意。
Integrating skills
15. Everyone has his or her special skills and interests，and only by discovering what we do best can we hope to reach our goals and truly make a difference．
每个人都有自己的专长和兴趣，只有发现自己的专长，我们才能期望达到自己的目标，真正与众不同。
Only修饰介词短语或从句时，要求倒装。
例：Only at that time did I realize its importance． 直到那时我才意识到它的重要性。
Only in this way can you make progress in your English study． 只有这样你才能在英语学习上取得进步。
Only修饰主语时，通常置于主语之前。
例：Only you understand me．只有你了解我。
Only修饰主语以外时，通常置于动词之前(有be动词、助动词时，则置于其后)
例：She only eats vegetables．她只吃蔬菜。
I only lent you the money．那笔钱我只是借给你(不是给你)。
He only works when he’s got homework． 他只在有家庭作业时才做功课。
I’ve only seen him once． 我只见过他一次。
语法：不定式易错点
1） 不定式动词在介词but，except，后面时，如果这些介词之前有行为动词do的各种形式，那么，这些介词后的不定式不带to，否则要带to。
例如： She could do nothing but cry．她只会哭了。
I have no choice but to go．我不得不走。
2）作定语的不定式如果是不及物动词，或者不定式所修饰的名词或代词是不定式动作的地点工具等，不定式后面须有相应的介词。例如：
He is looking for a room to live in ． 他在找一个房间住。
There is nothing to worry about． 无什么可担心的。
Please give me a knife to cut with． 请给我把刀子来切东西。
3）当作定语的不定式所修饰的名词或代词是不定式动作的承受者时，不定式既可以用主动语态，也可用被动语态，但其意义有所不同。试比较：
A)Have you anything to send?你有什么东西要寄吗?(不定式tosend的动作执行者是you)
B)Have you anything to be sent?你有什么要(我或别人)寄的东西吗?(不定式to be sent的动作执行者是已被省略的me或someone else)
4）不定式修饰的名词或代词和不定式逻辑上构成主谓关系时，不定式往往用主动形式。
Have you got a key to unlock the door? 你有开门的钥匙吗?
5）不定式和它前面被修饰的名词或代词构成逻辑上的动宾关系，又和该句主语构成逻辑上的主谓关系时，不定式常用主动形式。
I have got a letter to write． 我有封信要写。
He needs a room to live in． 他需要间屋子住。
6）不定式作表语形容词的状语，和句中的主语构成逻辑上的动宾关系时，不定式多用主动形式，这是因为人们往往认为形容词后省去了for one或for people．例如：
He is hard to talk to．很难跟他交谈。
The book is difficult to understand．这本书很难懂。
但如果强调句中的受事者时，亦可用不定式被动句。例如：
The handwriting is very difficult to be read． 这字太难认读了。
The box is to heavy to be lifted． 这箱子太重举不起来。
7）在there be结构中，当说话人考虑的是必须有人去完成某件事时，不定式用主动形式，如果说话人强调的是事情本身必须完成，则用被动形式。
There is a lot of work to do． (Somebody has to do the work．)
There is a lot of work to be done．(The work has to be done．)
请注意下面两个句子的含义是不同的：
There is nothing to do．意为无事可做，感到十分乏味。
There is nothing to be done．意为某东西坏了，无法使之恢复正常。
Unit 1 知识清单
Warming up
1. Make a/no/some difference 意义是什么？
The rain didn’t make much difference to the game.
Your age shouldn’t make any difference to whether you get the job or not.
Changing schools made a big difference to my life.
I don’t think it makes a lot of difference what color it is.
2. undertake过去式和过去分词形式是什么？两个常用意思是什么？
例：He undertook the difficult task willingly．
1 will undertake the responsibility for you．
He undertook to finish the job by Friday.
3. There is no doubt（毫无疑问 ．．） 后面的同位语从句的连词是什么？．
There is no doubt_______ our team will win．我队获胜是毫无疑问的。
I don't doubt_______we will win the game．(否定句用_______)我不怀疑我们将会赢得这场比赛。
Do you doubt_______ he has passed the final examination ? (疑问句用that)你怀疑他已通过期末考试了吗?
I doubt_______ he is the best man for the job．(肯定句用_______)我怀疑他是否是担任那项工作的最适当人选。
Reading
4. imagine 用法是什么？
5. promising (形) 是什么意思？
例：a promising actress
6. give up是什么意思？
7. dream 常用搭配有哪些？
8. hope for / to do /that 分别是什么意思？
9。 PhD(Doctor of Philosophy ) 指“__________”
10. There is no point in doing sth．表示“__________”。
例：There is no point in arguing further．
There is no point in protesting．It won’t help much．
11. Expect 有哪些意思？ 常用搭配有哪些？
12. Survive vi. ________ vt. _________________
She was the last surviving member of the family.
Of the six people injured in the crash, only two survived.
The company managed to survive the crisis.
Many birds didn’t survive the severe winter.
13. There didn't seem much point in working on my PhD-I didn't expect to survive that long 这里that 用法是什么？
14. get／be engaged to sb．意思是“_____________”； 而 Be engaged in(on)+n．／doing sth．意思是_____________________.
Did you hear they have got engaged last month?
例：She was engaged in protecting wild birds．
He is now engaged on his second novel.
be engaged (电话等________________，相当于美国英语的busy．
engagement n． (to) 是什么意思？
例：announce one's engagement to; break off one's engagement; engagement ring
15. seek+(for after)+名词 意思是什么？
例：They sought shelter from the rain．
He found it worthless to seek fame．
We must seek (for) a solution to the problem
Seek to do 意思是什么？
They quickly sought to distance themselves from the protester. 他们迅速设法远离抗议者。
16. Turn out to be+副／+形／+to do／+that．．是什么意思？
The weatherman said it was going to rain this afternoon but it turned out to be very lovely．
Despite our worries everything turned out well.
The lecture turned out to be very dull．
The rumor turned out (to be) true．
It turned out (that) two travelers had been killed
turn out vt. 还有什么意思？
The factory can turn out l000cars a day． 这家工厂一天能生产1000辆汽车。
17. observe vt. 意思是_____________ 作为感官动词常用的搭配是_________
She has observed the stars all her life.
They observed the thief stealing /steal the money.
vt. ______________ 如：observe the law
18. use sth up 意思是___________
Making soup is a good way of using up leftover vegetables.
19. only 在句子中的位置一般在哪里？另外，只要在句首就倒装吗？
20. 语法：不定式易错点
1） 不定式动词在介词but，except后面时，要注意哪些问题？
例如： She could do nothing but cry．
I have no choice but to go．
2）研究以下例句，说出做定语的不定式需要注意的问题。
He is looking for a room to live in ． 他在找一个房间住。
There is nothing to worry about． 无什么可担心的。
Please give me a knife to cut with． 请给我把刀子来切东西。
3）试比较下面的例句，它们在意义上有什么区别？
A)Have you anything to send?
B)Have you anything to be sent?
4）不定式修饰的名词或代词经常用主动形式还是被动形式？
如：Have you got a key to unlock the door?
I have got a letter to write．
He needs a room to live in．
6）不定式作表语形容词的状语，和句中的主语构成逻辑上的动宾关系时，不定式多用主动形式还是被动形式？
如： He is hard to______．A talk to B be talked with 很难跟他交谈。
The book is difficult to． A understand B be understood 这本书很难懂。
7）在there be结构中，to do 做定语要注意些什么？
There is a lot of work to do． (Somebody has to do the work．)
There is a lot of work to be done．(The work has to be done．)
请注意下面两个句子的含义是不同的：
There is nothing to do．
There is nothing to be done．
Unit 1 Making a difference
Teaching Goals:
1. Talk about science and Scientists
2. Learn more about the Infinitive
3. Practise describing people and debating
Teaching Time: 6 periods
The First Period
Teaching Aims:
1.Learn and master the following words:
Inspiration, perspiration, undertake, analysis, obvious, within, quote
2.Talk about science and scientists.
3.Listen to the description of some scientists.
4.Do some speaking, describing people and debating.
Teaching Important Points:
1.Train the students’ listening ability by listening practice.
2.Train the students’ speaking ability by talking about science and scientists, describing people and debating.
Teaching Difficult Points:
1.How to improve the students’ listening ability.
2.How to help students finish the task of speaking.
Teaching Methods:
1.Warming up to arouse the students’ interest in science.
2.Listening-and-answering activity to help the students go through the listening material.
3.Individual, pair or group work to make every student work in class.
Teaching Aids:1.a multimedia 2.a tape recorder 3.the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step I Warming up
1.T: There are many outstanding scientists in the world, who made great contributions to society and science. Now look at the pictures on page 1, tell me what are these scientists famous for?
(Bb) Scientists Contributions
Maria Curie Radium /Polonium
Albert Einstein The Theory of Relativity
…
2.T: Well done. I think you are all interested in science and scientists. What do you think makes a successful scientist? Have a discussion in pairs or groups of four. Then report the results of your discussion.
(It is the way he uses his tools that makes a successful scientist.
A successful scientist must have much imagination and intelligence and he must be creative and hard-working.
Asuccessful scientist must be confident, curious and careful. But what I like to know is what made him/her interested in science…)
T: Now look at the quotes on page 1.do you know what they mean? And do you agree?
天才就是百分之九十九的汗水加上百分之一的灵感。
想象力比知识更重要。
生活中没有什么可怕的东西，只有需要理解的东西。
分析明显存在的事物需要非凡的头脑。
你不可能把一切教给一个人，你只能帮助他在他自己的认知范围内去发现和了解事物。
T: Do you know any other quotes about science and thinking?
Wisdom is only found in truth. -- Johann Wolfgang von Goethe.
Knowledge is power. –Francis Bacon.
Step II Listening
T: OK. Now lets do some listening practice on P2. We are going to listen to the descriptions of some famous scientists. Read the requirements by yourselves quickly. Listen to the tape for the first time to get a general idea, and then try to finish the exx.
Step III Speaking
T: Now let’s look at the speaking part on P2. Work in groups of five. Each group member represents a branch of science, eg biology, maths, chemistry, physics, computer science. You are going to debate each other to see which branch of science is the most important and useful for society. First you should decide who will represent each branch and then prepare your role card to debate. You can use the expressions.
Step IV Language points (computer)
1．It takes a very unusual mind to undertake the analysis of the obvious．
分析明显存在的事物需要非凡的头脑。
(1)undertake(undertook，undertaken)
vt．承担(工作，责任等)，承办+名词
例：He undertook the difficult task willingly．
他欣然承担那项困难的工作。
1 will undertake the responsibility for you．
我会为你负起责任。
vt.着手，进行，企图+名词
例：He undertook a new experiment．
他着手一项新的实验。
(2)analysis复数形式andyses．analyse vt．
A chemical analysis化学分析
We made a careful analysis of the problem．
我们仔细分析了那个问题。
(3)obvious adj. (more obvious，most obvious)
明显的，明白的，显而易见的
obviously adv．
例：He told her an obvious lie．
他对她扯了一个明显的谎言。
It is obvious that…．…是显然的。
例：It is quite obvious that he didn't do it himself．
显然他没有亲自去做。
It seemed obvious that he suffered from a bad cold．
显然他得了重感冒。
2．There is no doubt that． 毫无疑问 ．．
例：There is no doubt that our team will win．
我队获胜是毫无疑问的。
I don't doubt that we will win the game．(否定句用that)
我不怀疑我们将会赢得这场比赛。
Do you doubt that he has passed the final examination ? (疑问句用that)
你怀疑他已通过期末考试了吗?
I doubt whether he is the best man for the job．(肯定句用whether)
我怀疑他是否是担任那项工作的最适当人选。
Homework
Preview the reading material.
Review the words and expressions in this period.
Step V The Design of the Writing on the Bb
Unit 1 Making a difference
The First Period
Scientists Contributions
Madame Curie Radium/Polonium
Edison The light bulb
Einstein The Theory of Relativity
…
Record after teaching:
The Second &Third Period
Teaching Aims:
1.Learn and master the useful words and phrases.
2.Train the students’ reading ability.
3.Let the students learn from Stephen Hawking.
Teaching Important Points:
1.Master the following phrases and sentence pattern:
work on, go by, be engaged to, go on with sth, dream of, turn out
There is no point (in) doing sth.
2.Enable the students to understand the text better.
3.Improve the students’ reading ability.
Teaching Difficult Points:
1.How to make the students understand the reading text better.
2.How to make the students understand the following sentence.
There didn’t seem much point in working on the PhD.
Teaching Methods:
1.Scanning the text to get some information about Hawking.
2.Careful reading to answer some detailed questions.
3.Discussion after reading the passage to make the students learn how to use the scientific method to solve the problem.
4.Individural, pair or group work to make every student work in class.
Teaching Aids:1.a computer 2.a tape recorder 3.the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step I Lead-in and Pre-reading
T: Yesterday we learnt some quotes from some scientists. Now look at the picture on the screen. Do you know who the person is?
( Stephen Hawking, one of the greatest physicists of our time, A Brief History of Time )Today we are going to learn a passage about Stephen Hawking. It will tell us Hawking’s determination, thoughts and some theories. First let’s learn some new words and phrases. Then turn to P3. Look at the questions in Pre-reading quickly and then scan the text as quickly as possible and find the answers to them.
Answers:1 Because he wanted a job.
2 Hawking became famous in the early 1970s, when he and American Roger Penrose made new discoveries about the Big Bang and black holes.
3 In , Hawking visited China and spoke to university students in Hangzhou and Beijing.
Step II Reading
T: Well done. Now read the passage once as carefully as possible. Then answer some detailed questions on the screen. You may discuss them in pairs if necessary.
What did Stephen Hawking do when he was told that he had an incurable disease?
1. How would most people feel when they were told that they had incurable disease?
2. What did Hawking write in 1988?
3. What did Hawking explain in the book ?
4. According to Hawking, how do people misunderstand science?
5. What are the basic steps of the scientific method?
6. What is it that Hawking doesn’t like about his speech computer?
Step III language points
There didn't seem much point in working on my PhD-I didn't expec to survive that long
取得博士学位对我来说没有什么意义，我没有期望活那么久。
PhD(Doctor of Philosophy ) 指“博士学位”
There is no point in doing sth．表示“做某事没有作用或没有意义”。
例：There is no point in arguing further．
继续争执下去没有意义了。
There is no point in protesting．It won’t help much．
抗议没有什么用处，于事无补。
that在此处为副词，意为“那么”，可以修饰形容词。this也有此用法。
例：I didn't expect he was that rude．
我没料到他会那么粗鲁。
I have never been out this late before．
我从未在外面呆到这么晚过。
Please cut my hair about this much．
请把我的头发剪掉这么长。
4．Yet two years had gone by and I was not that much worse．
但两年过去了，我的情况却没那么糟糕。
Go by意思是“(时间)过去”。
例：Time went by so quickly．We are already at the end of our summer holiday．
时间过得真快，转眼我们已经要结束暑假了。
Thirty years went by and her hair was beginning to turn gray．
三十年过去了，她的头发开始变白了。
5．In fact，things were going rather well for me and I had gotten engaged to a very nice girl，Jan Wilde．
事实上，事情发展得还挺顺利。我和一位非常好的女孩简怀尔得订婚了。
get／be engaged to sb．“与某人订婚”
例：Did you hear they have got engaged last month?
你有没有听说他们上个月订婚的消息?
Tom got engaged to Mary，whom he had met on the train．
汤姆和玛丽订婚了，他们在火车上认识的。
Be engaged in(on)+n．／doing sth．从事(工作)的，忙于……的
例：She was engaged in protecting wild birds．
她从事保护野生鸟类的工作。
Right now I’m engaged．
我现在正忙着。
be engaged (电话等)通话中的，占线中的，相当于美国英语的busy．
例：The line／number is engaged。线路被占用。
engagement n．订婚(to)
例：announce one's engagement to…宣布与…订婚
break off one's engagement解除婚约，解约
engagement ring订婚戒指(戴在左手无名指上)
6．Scientists，on the other hand，Hawking writes，know that their job is never finished and that even the best theory can turn out to be wrong．
霍金写到，从另一个方面说，科学家知道他们的工作是永无止境的，即使是最完美的理论，也可能是错误的。
Turn out to be“结果是”“最后的情况是”+副／+形／+to do／+that．．
例：The weatherman said it was going to rain this afternoon but it turned out to be very lovely．
天气预报说今天下午有雨，其实今天天气非常好。
The lecture turned out to be very dull．
讲座结果很无聊。
Everything turned out well．一切顺遂。
The rumor turned out (to be) true．那谣言后来证明是真的。
It turned out (that) two travelers had been killed
后来证实(查明)有两位旅客丧生。
turn out vi. (为集会等)外出，去。
turn out vt.．(可分开用) 关 (熄灭) (煤气，电灯油灯等)
turn out vt. (可分开用 ) 生产 (产品)，出产
例：The factory can turn out l000cars a day．
这家工厂一天能生产1000辆汽车。
7．Everyone has his or her special skills and interests，and only by discovering what we do best can we hope to reach our goals and truly make a difference．
每个人都有自己的专长和兴趣，只有发现自己的专长，我们才能期望达到自己的目标，真正与众不同。
only修饰介词短语或从句时，要求倒装。
例：Only at that time did I realize its importance．
直到那时我才意识到它的重要性。
Only in this way can you make progress in your English study．
只有这样你才能在英语学习上取得进步。
Only when you finish your homework can you go out to play football．
只有当你完成作业你才能出去踢球。
only修饰主语时，通常置于主语之前。
例：Only you understand me．只有你了解我。
only修饰主语以外时，通常置于动词之前(有be动词、助动词时，则置于其后)
例：She only eats vegetables．她只吃蔬菜。
I only lent you the money．那笔钱我只是借给你(不是给你)。
He only works when he's got homework．
他只在有家庭作业时才做功课。
I've only seen him once．
我只见过他一次。
8．Imagine this：you are twenty-one years old and a promising graduate student at one of the top universities in the world．
想象一下这种情况：你二十一岁是世界最有名大学里的一个有希望的毕业生。
imagine+名词
例：Can you imagine life with out electricity?
你能想像没有电的生活吗?
The gir1 tried to imagine the gentleman as her father．
这女孩试着把这位绅土想像成自己的父亲。
imagine+doing想像做”
例：I didn't imagine becoming a writer in my childhood．
在孩提时代，我并未想像成为一名作家。
imagine+名(人)+doing想像(某人)做…
例：I can't imagine her marrying him．
我无法想像她和他结婚。
imagine+(that)…／wh-想像…；想…，推测 (不可用进行时)
例：Imagine you are a bird．
想像你是一只鸟。
Can you imagine how much 1 was surprised to see it ?
你能想像我看见它后感到多么惊讶吗?
Iimagine (that) I have met you somewhere before．
我想以前曾在哪里见过你。
Can you imagine what he is doing?
你能猜测他在做什么吗?
(Just) imagine (it) ! 想想看!
Imagination (名) imaginative (形)
promising (形) 有希望的，有前途的，前途光明的
例：a promising actress有前途的女演员
9．Since then，Hawking has continued to seek answers to questions about the nature of the universe．
从那时起，霍金就继续寻求关于宇宙特征的问题的答案。
seek+(for after)+名词 搜寻，寻找；寻求，探求；追求
例：They sought shelter from the rain．
他们找寻避雨的地方。
He found it worthless to seek fame．
他发现追求名声是不值得的。
We must seek (for) a solution to the problem
我们必须寻求解决问题的方法。
seek+名 征求，请求 ，
He sought his doctor's advice．
他向医生请教(征求医生的意见)。
Step IV Listening and Consolidation
T: Now I’ll play the tape. You can follow it in a low voice. Pay attention to your pronunciation and intonation. Then do exx in Post-reading.
Homework
T: Learn the words and phrases by heart and try to use them freely and correctly. Read the text fluently and recite some important sentences.
The Design of the Writing on the Bb
Unit 1 Making a difference
The Second Period
Useful expressions:
work on +n./pron. /doing,
go by: pass,
be/get engaged (to sb.): be bound by a promise to marry,
go on with sth: continue with sth,
dream of: imagine,
turn out: prove(to be),
Sentence pattern:
There is no point (in) doing sth.=There is no good reason for doing sth.
Record after teaching:
The Fourth Period
Teaching Aims:
Review the words learnt in the last two periods.
Learn how to explain the words in English.
Learn and master the usages of the Infinitive.
Teaching Important Points:
Master the usages of the Infinitive.
Teaching Difficult Points:
1.How to help the students learn to explain words in English.
2.How to help the students master the usages of the Infinitive.
Teaching Methods:
1.Review method to help the students remember what they have learnt beore.
2.Explanation and inductive methods to make the students master the usages of the Infinitive.
3.Individual work or pair work to make every student work in class.
Teaching Aids:the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step I Revision
Have a dictation of some words and expressions..
Step II Word Study
T: Now let’s do an ex to see how to explain some words in English, according to the meanings of the sentences. Please turn to P5. Let’s do the ex in Word Study. Choose the closest meaning to the underlined word in each sentence. First we’ll learn a new phrase: use up. Do it by yourself and you can discuss in pairs.
Step III Grammar（详解见后）
Bb:1. He hoped to visit China again .
2. It took a lot of time to finish the report .
3. Please give the boy sth to play with .
4. He went home to see his sick mother .
5. Her wish is to become a pop singer .
T: Tell me the function of the underlined part in each sentence.
S: No.1 is used as the object.
S: No.2 is used as the subject. It is more usual to use formal subject “it” and the infinitive phrase is usually placed at the end of the sentence, that is “it is…to do sth.”.
S: No.3 is used as the attribute.
S: No.4 is used as the adverbial for purpose.
S: No.5 is used as the predicative.
T: Now let’s do an ex on the screen. Group the infinitives according to how they are used.
1.Some things need (1) to be believed (2) to be seen .
2.The doctor told him that he may not have more than twelve months (3) to live .
3.(4) In order to get married ,I needed a job, and (5) in order to get a job , I needed a PhD.
4.Readers were pleased and surprised (6) to find that a scientist could write about his work in a way that ordinary people could understand .
5.He traveled around the world (7) to give lectures .
6.What does it mean (8) to be a scientist?
7.People who listen to Hawking’s lectures sometimes find it difficult (9) to understand him .
8.(10) To explain what they have seen , they build a theory about how things happen and the causes and effects.
S: Subject:(8)
Attribute(2)(3)
Object(1)(9)
Adverbial(4)(5)(6)(7)(10)
Step IV Practice
T: Now let’s do some exercises on P6, Ex2 and Ex3.Rewrite the sentences with “to be done” or “to have been done”.
He wanted the nurses to take care of the patient.
-He wanted the patient to be taken care of.
Because “the patient” is the logical object of “take care of”, the passive infinitive should be used in the second sentence.
The car was reported to have been stolen.
But when the action expressed by the Infinitive happens before the predicate, the perfect infinitive should be used.
Homework
TFinish all the exx in Grammar. Preview the content in Integrating skills.
The Design of the Writing on the Bb
Unit 1 Making a difference
The Third Period
Phrase: use up
Grammar: the Infinitive
1. He hoped to visit China again .
2. It took a lot of time to finish the report .
3. Please give the boy sth to play with .
4. He went home to see his sick mother .
5. Her wish is to become a pop singer.
6. He wanted the nurses to take care of the patient.
7. He wanted the patient to be taken care of.
Record after teaching:
The Fifth Period
Teaching Aims:
1.Revise the language points and grammar-the Infinitive.
2.Learn and master the following phrases:
take a look at, what if, the other way around
3.Do some reading and writing practice to improve the students’ integrating skills.
4.Learn how to write a descriptive paragraph.
Teaching Important Points:
1.Improve the students’ integrating skills.
2.Help the students write a descriptive paragraph.
Teaching Difficult Points:
1.How to help the students understand the passage better.
2.How to help the students learn to write a descriptive paragraph.
Teaching Methods:
1.Doing exx to revise what we’ve learnt before.
2.Asking-and-answering activity to go through the reading material.
3.Discussion to help the students understand the passage better.
4.Individual, pair or group work to make every student work.
Teaching Aids:1.a computer 2.a tape recorder 3.the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step I Revision
T: We know that the infinitive can be used as the subject, object, adverbial and so on. Now let’s do some exx to see if you have mastered them well enough. Look at the screen.
1.(1)To learn about the universe , you need (2)to have a telescope (3)to observe the stars with .
2.It takes time (4)to know a man .
3.Please remember (5)to bring me a book.
4.I’ve got a lot of work (6)to do .
5.(7)In order to catch the first bus ,she got up early.
6.It is important for us (8)to learn English .
Subject:(4)(8)
Object:(2)(5)
Attribute:(3)(6)
Adverbial:(1)(7)
T: Let’s do another ex. Fill in the blanks, using the Infinitive.
1.The goal of Stephen Hawking’s research is to and to is his biggest dream.
2.The doctor thought he only had three more years to , which turned out .
3.We took a taxi to .We hurried there, only to . We were unhappy to .
4.He studied hard to .
5.Lunch is ready. Let’s stop to .
T: Now let’s revise the useful expressions. Do an ex to see whether you have mastered them well.
1.He one day becoming a famous violinist.
2.Tom Ann.
3.Two weeks slowly .
4.His suggestion to be a good one.
5.He his ink.
6.If we don’t finish painting the room today, we can it tomorrow.
7.He a novel.
Step II Reading
T: There were many scientists in the world in the past, whose discoveries and inventions can help us understand the world better. Can you say out the names of some scientists and their discoveries?
……
T: Do you know why and how they made these important discoveries or inventions? The passage tells us what makes the scientists made their discoveries. Turn to P7. Read the passage quickly and then answer some questions on the screen.
1.What’s the characteristic of Galileo Galilei?
2.Why could Stephen Hawking make contributions to science work?
3.What can be described as the ability to use knowledge?
4.What’s the most important thing if we want to make a difference?
5.How can we hope to reach our goals and truly make a difference?
T: I’ll explain some expressions and sentence structures.
1. take a look at
2. what if
3. the other way round
4. …it was only later that the world recognized his greatness.
5. …only by discovering what we do best can we hope to reach our goals and truly make a difference.
Step III Listening and Discussion
T: Listen to the tape twice. Then discuss the questions in pairs or groups.
1. Of all the characteristics mentioned in the passage, which do you think is the most important? Why?
2. What do great scientists like Stephen Hawking , Galileo Galilei and Zhang Heng have in common? Find out more about them and how they work and think: What is the scientific spirit? How do scientists solve problems? How do scientists make a difference? What can we learn from great scientists?
Use the questions below to get started.
What is the scientific spirit?
How do scientists solve problems?
How do scientists make a difference?
What can we learn from great scientists?
Step IV Writing
T: Who is your favourite scientists? Write a paragraph. Before writing, think about what you want to write and what the readers need to know. How can you best describe him or her? What is the most important or interesting fact about the scientist? Why do you like him or her? List an outline of the passage. Then write some useful sentences to help them.
Step V Homework
Go over all the important points learnt in this unit and finish your writing.
Step VI The Design of the Writing on the Bb
Unit 1 Making a difference
The Fifth Period
A good scientists must be curious and careful .
Great scientists use their creativity and imagination to come up with new ideas.
Scientists must also be intelligent and patient .
The experiment proved that her theory was correct.
Other scientists were surprised by her discovery and called it a success .
She used a model to solve the problem .
Record after teaching:
Unit 2 News media （新闻媒体）
Teaching Goals:
1. Talk about news and the media
2. Practise expressing opinions
3. Learn about the Past Participle (1): used as Attribute and Predicative
Teaching Time: 7 periods
Period 1 Warming up & Listening
Teaching Aims:
1. Talk about news and the media
2.Train the students' listening ability by listening and answering some relative questions.
3. master the following words: reliable, elct, go up, burn down, injure…
Teaching Important Points:
1. Master the useful words and expressions in this period
2. Training the Ss’listening and speaking ability
Teaching Difficult Points:
How to help Ss understand the listening material exactly
How to help improve their speaking ability
Teaching Methods:
Listening-and answering activity to help the Ss qo through the listening material
Individual, pair or group work to make the Ss finish the speaking task
Teaching Aids:a computer, a recorder, the Bb
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1: Greet and Lead-in
Greet the whole class.
Lead in the new unit by asking:the Olympic Games are going on, how can we know the details of the games? For example, how many golden medals have we got? (By reading newspapers and magazines,watching TV, listening to the radio, also by a website.) In Nglish we call it news media.
Step 2: Warming up
Please open the book at page 9. Look at the pictures and discuss the following questions in pairs:
1. Which of the news media above is the most reliable? Why?
2. How are the media above different from each other?
3. How do you know whether what you hear, see and read is true?
4. Do you know how a newspaper is made?
(Background information:
新闻媒介的基本类型和特点各是什么？
六种主要的大众传媒：口语、书籍、报纸、广播、电视、互联网。
1.报纸。便于保存和检索；新闻性较强；读者可以反复阅读，认真思考。但是，它受读者文化程度的限制，发行需要一定的时间。
2.新闻杂志，是以传播和解释国内外重大新闻为主要内容的一种杂志，由于出版周期不同，分为周刊、半月刊和月刊等。周刊因为比较符合人们的工作节奏和生活习性，时效性较半月刊和月刊强，所以在世界新闻杂志中占据绝大多数，我国也一样。相对于报纸等其他新闻媒介而言，新闻杂志表现新闻的方式更多的是提供新闻的背景资料（有时提供背景材料比新闻事件本身更重要），并且以此说明新闻的发生对现在以及将来的影响。也就是说，它不是像其他新闻媒介那样着重报道动态新闻，而是对新闻事件进行有纵深、有广度、有背景、有分析、有评论的深层报道。从事新闻杂志工作的业内人士也常说：新闻杂志与报纸相比的一个优势是”后发制人“，这种后发制人意味着它的大量的报道必须具有深刻性或者深入性，如同当各种媒介以它们各自的特点关注着露出海面的冰山一角时，新闻杂志则把目光更多地投入到了海面以下那巨大的山体。
3.广播。比报纸具有感染力；不受文化程度限制；传播迅速。但是，其保留性差；无法对文字进行深度开掘。
4.电视。有感染力和说服力；不受文化程度限制；传播迅速。但是，其保留性差。
5.网络“第四大众传媒”
公认的大众传媒主要包括报纸、广播、杂志、书籍和电影等六大媒介。随着数字化技术的发展，电脑硬件的更新换代，互联网技术迅速普及和网站的大量建立，互联网正成为一种新的媒体广泛进入人们的生活。如今，国际上已把互联网纳入六大媒介中，并将其称为继报纸、广播、电视之后的“第四大众传媒”。这说明，人们已经认同了互联网的作用，能够同报纸、广播、电视等新闻媒介一样，广泛地传递新闻信息。
依托于互联网进行的新闻传播活动，具备了其许多的优势，这主要表现在：
（1）．包容了传统传播媒介的所有信息形式，整合了文字、声音、图象等多种传播的方式，实现了真正意义上的“多媒体”。
（2）．传播质量得以提升，受干扰程度降低，接收效果的物质实体有了保证。
（3）．能够以不同的方式和手段，灵活的报道同一事件，不致使人产生疲劳感和厌烦。
此外，就网络新闻本身而言，除了具备了网络所共有的优势之外，它还具有时效性强、容量大、速度快、超地域、超链接、可检索等特点，这些都猛烈的冲击着传统的新闻出版方式乃至整个新闻出版产业。)
Step 2: Listening(SB page 10)
T: Now let’s come to the listening. We are going to listen to two parts of conversations.The first part is an interview; the second part is a dialogue. Listen carefully to what is said in each part. I’ll play the tape twice. (after listening) Please work in pairs to talk about the questions in Exercises 2, 3,4.
(Check the answer with the whole class)
Step 3 Key Words
1. Which of the news media above is the most reliable? 以上的新闻媒体中哪一种最可靠？
reliable adj. 可信赖的; 可依靠的； 确定的
They are reliable friends. 他们是可信赖的朋友。
Is the source of the information reliable? 那个消息的来源可靠吗？
[链接] reliably adv. 可靠地；确实地 reliability n. 可靠性；可信赖性
2. The man was fired. 那个人被解雇了。
fire的动词用法
(1) 解雇，开除
The company fired him for not coming to work on time. 那个公司因他不按时上班解雇了他。
(2) 发射
He fired his gun at the big snake. 他开枪打那条大蛇。
(3) 激发（人、感情等），使充满热情
The story fired his imagination. 这个故事激发了他的想象力。
3. The man faced difficulties.
(1) face v.t. 面临（困难等），应付， 面对；（危险、困难等）迫近
e.g. We must face our trouble and bear it. 我们必须正视我们的困难并勇于承受。
[短语]
be faced with 面临，面对
face up to面对；承担
face the music接受（不愉快的后果或情况）
e.g. I was faced with a new problem.
She couldn’t face up to the fact that she was no longer young.
她无法面对自己不再年轻的现实。
The boy was caught cheating in the examination and had to face the music.
那个男孩被发现考试作弊，不得不接受惩罚。
(2) difficulty表示“难，困难”时用作不可数名词，表示“难题，难事”时用作可数名词。
e.g. She learned to speak English without difficulty. 她毫无困难地学会了讲英语。
We will face many difficulties in the future. 将来我们要面临许多难题。
4. The man was generous.
generous adj. 慷慨的；大方的；宽容的；豁达的；丰富的，丰盛的
e.g. He is generous with his money. 他出手大方。
He gave me a generous lunch. 他请我吃了一顿丰盛的午餐。
[链接] generous adv. 慷慨地 generosity n. 慷慨大方
The design of the writing on the Bb:
Unit 2 New Media
Five news media: website, radio, Tv, magazine, newspaper
Useful words and expressions: (step 3)
Homework:
1. Read the new words.
2. Keep the Language Points in mind.
3. Get reading for Speaking
Record after teaching:
Period 2 Listening(WB page 88) & Speaking(SB page 10)
Teaching Aims:
1. Train the students’ listening ability.
2. Train the students’ speaking ability.
Teaching Important Points:
1. Master the useful words and expressions in this period
2. Training the Ss’listening and speaking ability
Teaching Difficult Points:
How to help improve their listening ability
How to help improve their speaking ability
Teaching Methods:
Listening-and answering activity to help the Ss qo through the listening material
Group work to make the Ss finish the speaking task
Teaching Aids: a computer, a recorder, the Bb
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Greet the whole class.
Step 2 Listening(WB page 88)
Now let’s come to the listening. The chief editor of a daily newspaper is having a meeting with the journalists. She is telling them what she wants them to do today. Listen carefully to what is said in the text. I’ll play the tape twice. (Check the answer with the whole class)
Step 3 Speaking(SB page 10)
Now it’s time for us to be a editor of a newspaper. Here is a list of ten things that happened today( on the screen)You only need to report five of them. Work in groups to diacuss. And then I’ll ask you t act out your dialogue. You can use the useful expressions in your book.. (walk around and give them help if necessary).
Step 4 Key Words and Expressions:
1. Below is a list of ten things that happened today. 以下列出了今天发生的十件事。
本句为倒装句，正常语序应为：A list of ten things that happened today is below.
below看作副词，表示方位，当表示方位的状语或表语位于句首时，句子采用全部倒装的结构，即把谓语动词的所有组成部分都移到主语之前。这类作状语或表语的词常见的有：away, down, in, off, out, over, up, above, below, here, there及介词短语与分词。
Here is a seat for you.这儿有你的一个座位。
There goes the bell!铃响了。
Written on the blackboard are the names of those who were late yesterday.黑板上写着昨天迟到的人的名字。
2. France elected a new president.
elect v.t. 选举，推选
e.g. They elected a president. / They elected him as President. 他们选举了总统。/ 他们选举他为总统。
注意：若选举某人担任某职位，且该职位只有一个时，通常不用冠词。
e.g. Our classmates elected him as/to be/our/as our monitor.
They elected the old man to be chairman of the club.他们推选那位老人为俱乐部主席。
[辨析] elect, pick out, choose
elect是指通过正式手续的选举。
e.g. Roosevelt was elected four times to the presidency of the U.S.A.罗斯福四次当选为美国总统。
choose通常指在所提供的对象中，凭个人的判断力进行选择。
e.g. We had to choose between leaving early and paying for a taxi.我们不得不在早点动身和雇计程车中间作出选择。
There are ten to choose from.
pick out比较通俗，指按个人喜好或希望进行挑选，多用于有行的东西。
e.g. She picked out a scarf to wear with the dress.她挑选了一条围巾以配上她穿的衣服。
3. Food prices are going up. 食品价格在上涨。
go up上升，增长，提高
e.g. The temperature has gone up.
The lift went up to the fourth floor. 电梯升到了四楼。
4. A house in your city burnt down. Nobody was injured.你们镇上一座房子被烧毁。无人员伤亡。
(1) burn down 烧毁；使烧毁【强调破坏性】；（由于燃料烧尽）火力减弱
These houses were burnt down to the ground. 这些房子被烧毁。
The fire is burning down, get some more coal please.
[比较] burn up烧尽，烧光【强调动作的结果】；（火，炉等）烧起来，旺起来
e.g. Put some wood on the fire and make it burn up.
(2) injure v.t. 使受伤；损害，伤害（感情）
e.g. The boy injured his leg.
In the accident his back was seriously injured.
I hope I didn’t injure her feeling.
[辨析] injure, wound, hurt, harm的区别：
injure伤害，损害（感情），损害（名誉）。普通用词，常指各种性质的身体上或精神上的伤害。多指事故中人或物的损伤，包括容貌、生理、身体等。
e.g. In the traffic accident, two were killed and three get injured.在交通事故中，两人遇难，三人受伤。
He was so injured in his pride that he stayed at home all day without meeting anyone.他的自尊受到了如此的伤害以至于他成天待在家里，不见外人。
wound使受伤，伤害，损害，主要指外界暴力或用武器造成身体上较重的伤害，像刀伤、枪伤、刺伤等。多指战场上受伤，还可以指精神上的创伤。
e.g. The soldier was badly wounded in the head.这个士兵头部受了重伤。
The bullet wounded his arm.子弹打伤了他的胳膊。
hurt伤害（感情）。普通用词，没有injure正式，常用于口语。多用于有生命的东西，常指肉体上的伤害，也可以指精神上的痛苦或感情上的伤害。作不及物动词，表“疼痛”。
e.g. Luckily no one was seriously hurt in the car accident.
The girl fell off her bike, and one of her legs hurt.
harm常用于口语，表示肉体或精神上的伤害均可以，有时可引起不安，不便。
e.g. There was a fire in our street, but no one was harmed.
Getting up early won’t harm you! 早起对你没有害处。
Homework:
1. Read the new words.
2. Keep the language points above in mind
3. Get ready for reading.
The design of the writing on the Bb:
Unit 2 news media
Key words and expressions(step4)
Record after teaching:
Period 3-4 Pre-reading/Reading/Post-reading
Teaching Aims:
1. Train the students' reading ability,especially the skills of summarizing and scanning.
2. Study and have a good grasp of some key words and phrases.
Teaching Important Points:
1. words and phrases:more than, relate to, for once, be addicated to, on all sides, inform, experienced, switch,etc.
2. Understand the passage excatly.
Teaching Difficult Points:
How to help the Ss learn more about reporters and newspapers.
Teaching Methods:
1.Fast reading to get the general idea of the text.
2.Careful reading to further understand the text.
3.Individual, pair or group work to make every student take an active part in the activities in class.
Teaching Aids: a computer, a recorder, the Bb
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Greet the whole class as usual.
Step 2 Reading
We have talked a lot about news media. Today we are going to read a passage about reporters and newspapers. Scan the text , try to get the general idea of the text. and finish pre-reading.(1 and 6)
Now please read the text again carefully, and find the answers to the questions on the screen.
1.Do newspapers and other media simply record what happens?
2.Who were asked to be interviewed? And why?
3. Whom does a reporter have to discuss with before he/she decides what to write? Why?
4. And what is the person’s job?
5. Is interviewing someone easy? What must a reporter know?
6. When an interview is finished,what should the reporter do?
7. Which of the articles that they have written do they like best? Why?
8. What could they write about if they could write any article? Why?
9. What is the basic task for a reporter?
10.What result can TV programmes and printed articles bring to us?
(check the answers)
Step 3 Language Points:
1. Newspapers and other media do more than simply record what happens.报纸和其他媒介并不仅仅记录已发生的事情。
(1) 该句中的do是助动词，起强调作用，用以加强说话者的语气。
e.g. Do remember to remind me to return the book I borrowed from you.
(2) more than不仅仅；极为，非常；多于；难以；不能
e.g. She’s more than a teacher to us.
The boy more than smiled but laughed. 这男孩不仅是微笑，而是放声大笑了。
We are more than pleased with the results. 我们对结果极为满意。
He has more than 300 pictures.
This room is three time larger than that one.这个房间比那个房间大两倍。
The old man is two times older than I am. 这个老人的年龄比我大一倍。
That is more than I can tell. 那是怎么回事我实在难说。
2. Experienced editors and reporters make informed decisions about what events to report and how to report them.经验丰富的编辑和记者对于该报道什么事件以及如何报道作出明智的决定。
(1) 句中的experienced(富有经验的)和informed(见识广的，有知识的) 都是动词的过去分词作定词，修饰动词。单个的过去分词作定语时，通常放在它所修饰的名词前面。
e.g. a fallen tree一棵倒下的树 a broken chair一把破椅子 stolen cultural relics被盗的文物
(2) informed adj. 明智的，有知识的，了解情况的
e.g. He is a well-informed man.他是个消息灵通的人。
inform的用法:
inform sb. of sth.告知某人某事 inform sb. that/wh-…告知某人 inform sb.＋疑问词＋不定式
e.g. The singer informed us of their arrival.歌手们把他们到来的消息告诉了我们。
The nurse informed me that visiting hours were over.护士告诉我探病时间已经结束了。
Who informed you when to start? 是谁告诉你们出发时间的？
3. They also make sure that readers can relate to the stories.他们还要确保报道的内容与读者的生活密切相关。
relate v.i. & v.t （和～）相关；涉及；把～与～关联起来
e.g. It is difficult to relate the two cases. 很难把两个案子联系起来。
We should learn to relate the results to the causes.我们应该学会把结果与原因联系起来看问题。
Light industry is closely related to the people’s life.轻工业与人们的生活有密切的关系。
4. The two reporters agreed to switch roles for once and be the interviewees rather than the interviewers in order to let us know about their work and how the news we read in made.两位记者同意交换角色，作一次受访者而不是采访者，让我们了解他们的工作，了解我们读到的新闻是怎样制作和编写出来的。
(1) switch v. 转换，改变
e.g. He is always switching jobs. 他总变换工作。
He switched the recorder to the “off” position.他将录音机拧到“关”的位置。
(2) for once 就这（那）一次
e.g. For once they broke the rule.这一次，他们违规了。
For once our manager came late. 我们的经理这次来晚了。
He beat me for once.他只有一次赢了我。
(2) rather than的特点是连接前后两个平行结构，即要求前后成分要一致。
e.g. He decided to write to rather than (to) phone.他决定写信而不打电话了。
I’d like to go there in autumn rather than in summer.我愿意秋天去那里而不愿意夏天去。
He was engaging in writing a letter rather than reading a newspaper.他正忙着写信而不是看报纸。
5. After the interview, the reporter must present the material in an organized way and make sure that the article reflects events and opinions truthfully.采访后，记者一定要提交出组织严密的材料，并确保文章的真实反映事实和舆论。
(1) present vt.呈现；描述；介绍；赠送
e.g. When will you present your report?你什么时候提出报告？
The government presented cars to the hospitals. 政府向医院赠送了一些车。
Allow me to present Mr. Brown to you. 请允许我把布朗先生介绍给你。
(3) reflect vt. 反映；表现；反射；映出
e.g. This letter is sure to reflect our real opinion.这封信会反映出我们的真实意见。
Her face was reflected in the mirror.她的脸映现在镜子里。
Mirrors reflect light.镜子能反射光线。
6. My favourite article is the one I wrote about the efforts to bring stolen cultural relics back to China.我最喜欢的文章是我写的一篇关于如何努力把被盗的文物带回中国。
(1) 本句中的one是代词，用来指代article。one常用来代替前文提到的一种可数的事物。
e.g. I haven’t a pen. Can you lend me one?
指代可数名词复数用ones。
e.g. On the desk there is a red pencil and two black ones.
(2)effort n. [U,C]努力；艰难的尝试；努力的结果
e.g. He did it without effort.他毫不费力地完成那件事
[短语] make an effort努力，尽力 spare no effort不遗余力
7. I want to write about people you seldom read about, for example people who have AIDS or who are addicted to drugs.我想报道那些你们很少能了解的人，如艾滋病患者或者是染上毒瘾的人。
(1) seldom adv. 很少；不常；难得
[扩展] 表示否定意义的状语位于句首时，句子通常采用倒装句。
e.g. Seldom does he quarrel with others.
Never did I dream of seeing him in America.
Never before have so many people come to see him.
Not a single word did she say.
(2)be / get / become addicted to sth. / doing sth.对~成瘾/成癖
e.g. It doesn’t take long to become addicted to these drugs.服用这些毒品不要多长时间就会上瘾。
It’s a pity that her child has got addicted to smoking.真可怜，她的孩子抽烟上瘾了。
Some children are addicted to computer games / TV.(喻)一些孩子玩电脑游戏/看电视上了瘾。
He is addicted to practicing Chinese Gongfu.他醉心于练习中国功夫。
8. We shouldn’t ignore what happens even if it is difficult for people to accept some stories.即使人们对一些现象很难接受，我们也不应该无视眼前发生的事情。
(1) ignore v.t. 不理睬；忽视
e.g. You shouldn’t ignore your father’s advice.你不该无视父亲的忠告。
I tried to tell her but she ignored me.我打算告诉她，可是她不理睬我。
(2) even if / even though即使，尽管
e.g. The young man didn’t lose heart even if he had failed many times in finding a job.这个年轻人没有放弃，尽管他多次未能找到工作。
9. The media can often help solve problems and draw attentions to situations where help is needed.媒介常可帮助解决难题，使人们关注需要得到帮助的情况。
draw attention to关注某事 draw / attract one’s attention引起某人的注意
e.g. This article will draw attention to farmers and agriculture.这篇文章奖让人关注农民和农业问题。
The fallen leaves drew /attracted the worker’s attention.这些落叶引起了那个工人的注意。
He drew my attention to a mistake in my homework.他要我注意作业中的一处错误。
10. The result is a better understanding of the world on all sides, leading to a future world where people from all countries are respected and different views and opinions are tolerated.结果会使人们更好地了解世界地各个方面，给人们带来一个人人受到尊重，不同观念得到包容地未来世界。
(1) on all sides(=on every side) 在各方面，四面八方
e.g. They were trapped with enemies on all sides.他们四面楚歌。
The enemy were attacking on all sides.敌人从四面八方发起进攻。
(4) tolerate v.t. 容忍，忍受，允许
e.g. I can’t tolerate that loud music / that kind of behavior.我无法忍受那么响的音乐/那种行径。
Cheating on exams cant’ be tolerated. 考试作弊是不能容忍的。
11. I would not believe it, but I might check other sources and maybe change my mind.
change one’s mind改变主意
e.g. Since getting to know him better, I have changed my mind about him.更深入地了解以后，我改变了我对他地看法。
[相关短语] bear / keep in mind 记住 call/bring to mind 使人想起 out of one’s mind 精神错乱，发狂 never mind 不要紧，没关系 have sth. in mind 记得某事，想起某事
12.Famous people are often asked for their opinions on current affairs.名人经常接受采访、被问及对时事地看法
current affairs 当前的事件；时事
affairs复数形式表示“重要事件，事务”（常用复数形式，且一般不与定冠词连用）
e.g. The minister deals with important affairs of State.这位大臣处理重要的国务。
current adj. 此刻的，现时的，当前的
e.g. current fashions时装 current events时事
Step 4 Discussion
Now you must have known about reporters and newspapers better. So let’s have a discussion. Look at the questios3 and 4 on page12, and work in pairs to talk about them..Then I’ll ask some of you to report. (encourage Ss to express their own opinion)
Homework:
1. Read the text.
2. Try to remember what have been taught above.
3. Work Book p89-90
The design of the writing on the Bb:
Unit 2 New Media
Language points (step3)
Record after teaching:
Period 5 Language Study & Grammar
Teaching Aims:
1. Review the words learned in Reading.
2. Grammar Study: The Past Participle used as Attribute and Predicative
Teaching Important Points:
How to guess the missing verbs and use them correctly according to the given sentences.
Help Ss master the Past Participle as Attribute and Predicative.
Teaching Difficult Points:
How to use the Past Participle correctly.
Teaching Methods:
Practising to finish each task in Word Study and Grammar.
Teaching Aids: a computer, a recorder, the Bb
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Greet the whole class as usual.
Step 2 check homework
Step 3 word study do exercise 1 on page 13
Step 4Grammar语法详释(computer)
The Past Participle used as Attribute and Predicative过去分词作定语和表语
过去分词在句中可承担形容词和副词在句中的作用，充当定语和表语。
1．过去分词作定语
(1) 在句中的位置
单个的过去分词作定语时，位于它所修饰的名词或代词前面；过去分词短语作定语时，位于它所修饰的名词或代词后面。
a broken heart一颗破碎的心 a lost dog丧家之犬 a risen sun已升起的太阳
an organized trip有组织的旅行 a broken glass被打破的玻璃杯
a trip organized by the league由共青团组织的旅行
a glass broken by the boy被这个男孩打破的玻璃杯
The excited people rushed out of the building.
They found a damaged car at the gate of the park.
(2) 所表示的时间
过去分词作定语时，所表示的动作或者在谓语所表示的动作之前发生，或者没有一定的时间性。
The letter posted yesterday will soon reach him.他很快就能收到昨天寄出的信了。
Have you read the books written by the young writer？你读过那位年轻作家写的小说吗？
(3) 语法功能
过去分词或过去分词短语作定语时，其功能相当于一个定语从句。
The stolen bike belongs to Jack.被偷的自行车是杰克的。
The bike which had been stolen belongs to Jack.
The lecture given by Professor Zhang is about environment protection.张教授所做的报告是关于环境保护的。
The lecture which was given by Professor Zhang is about the environment protection.
2. 过去分词作表语
(1) 过去分词作表语时，多表示主语所处的状态。
The door remained locked.门仍然锁着。
She looked disappointed.她看上去挺失望。
He seemed quite delighted at the good news.听到这个好消息，他似乎很开心。
(2) 常见作表语的过去分词有：upset, disappointed, drunk, amused, frightened, married, excited, experienced, interested, confused, pleased, puzzled, satisfied, tired, worried等。
(3) 有些过去分词作表语时，构成的谓语很接近被动结构。
Everything is settled down.一切都解决了。
Thank heavens! The boy is saved.谢天谢地，孩子得救了。
The town is surrounded on three sides by mountains.这座小镇三面环山。
Do exercises 1, 2, 3 on page 14
Step 5 Language Points:
1. Nine out of ten women who were interviewed about the product said they liked it.
nine out of ten(=nine in ten)十之八九，百分之九十
e.g. Nine out of ten people will not agree with you.
也可以说
Four out of the ten children there can go to school.在那里十个孩子中只有四个可以上学。
2. And I like the way the fans look up to them.
look up to尊敬，敬仰（反义：look down on轻视，看不起）
e.g. The young should look up to the old.年轻人应该尊敬老人。
3. Americans will fall in love with this game too.
fall in love with爱上（表示动作，不延续）
e.g. I fell in love with her at first sight.我对她一见钟情。
She fell in love with the house as soon as she saw it.
[比较] be in love (with) 相爱，喜欢（表示延续状态）
e.g. If you’re really in love with art, you don’t mind hard work.
Homework:
Try to remember what have been taught above.
Do exercises 4, 5 on page 13, and exercises 1, 2, 3 on page 91
The design of the writing on the Bb:
Unit 2 New Media
Language points (step 5)
Record after teaching:
Period 6 Integrating Skills
Teaching Aims:
1. Learn and master the following : arm, disappoint, etc
2.Train the students' integrating skills.
3. Learn about the five basic elements in a news report
Teaching Important Points:
Train the students' integrating skills.
Teaching Difficult Points:
How to inprove the students' integrating skills.
Teaching Methods:
Asking-and-answering activity to check Ss’understanding of the two reports.
Teaching Aids: the Bb
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Greet the whole class as usual.
Step 2 check homework
Step 3 Reading and speaking
Now please read the two reports on page 15 carefully and compare them. Then discuss the questions in part 1 and part 2.(give SS enough time to do it, and let them express their ideas freely.)
Five basic elements in a news report: when, where, who, what and why.
Step 4 Language Points:
1. Brave and strong, the activists talked to workers outside the factory…
brave and strong是形容词作状语，形容词或形容词短语作状语，通常说明主语行为的原因、方式、伴随状况等。
e.g. Cold and hungry, he decided to stop and have a rest. （表原因）又冷又饿，他决定停下来休息一会儿。
Ripe, the oranges taste sweet.（表方式）这些橘子熟了，味道甜美。
2. The peaceful meeting ended when the company sent out a group of angry men armed with sticks to fight with the citizens.
arm v.t. 武装，用武器装备
e.g. The robber was armed.那个强盗有武器。
The soldiers were armed to teeth.士兵们武装到牙齿
3. I’m sure they won’t feel disappointed.
disappoint v.t. 使失望 disappointing adj. 令人失望的 disappointed adj. 失望的
e.g. The book disappointed me.这本书令我失望。
The news was really disappointing.那个消息真令人感到失望。
Are you very disappointed about losing the game?你是不是因为比赛输了而感到很失望?
Homework:
Try to remember what have been taughtin this period.
Review this unit.
The design of the writing on the Bb:
Unit 2 New Media
Language points (step4)
Record after teaching:
Unit 3 Art and architecture
Period 1：Warming up & Listening
Teaching Aims:
1 Improve the students’ listening ability.
2.Improve the students’ speaking ability.
3.Learn and master some useful words and expressions.
Important and difficult points:
1. How to help students to improve their listening ability.
2. How to help students to learn to express preferences.
Teaching Methods:
1. Discussion
2. Individual or pair work
Step 1. Greetings and warming-up
Greet the students as usual.
Ask the Ss to talk about their hometown and their houses.
Qs: where are you from, a city or a small town?
Can you describe the buildings in your hometown?
What kind of buildings do you live in, a traditional house or an apartment?
Show students two pictures, a tall building and a traditional yard
T: what can you see in the two pictures?
What is the difference between them?
(When the Ss describe the pictures, remind the students to think about the differences in the two pictures. The students may have different opinions. Encourage them to think out reasons as many as possible. They may have a discussion.)
Suggested answers:
Block of flats Traditional house
Modern.
Convenient.
The rooms are big.
Every flat has a toilet and bathroom.
Not much contact with their neighbors.
People often feel lonely.
Flat roof.
… Old-style.
The rooms are small.
Sometimes no toilet or bathroom.
Life is much more interesting. Neighbors get on well with each other. People can grow flowers in the yard.
The roof is sloping.
…
In which house would you prefer to live? Why?
S: I like living in ….because….
I prefer living…
I’d rather live…
The students should tell others their reasons to support their choices. For example, living in the small house makes me feel warm. I like making friends with my neighbors. It looks like a big family. Encourage them to express their ideas freely.
T: Buildings in the different places are different. So what words and phrases do you think will be useful when you want to talk about art and architecture?
Show the students some different kinds of houses, and ask them to describe them.
Collect their answers.( appearance: high, low, great, The palaces were large and beautiful, and they often looked like something out of a fairy tale.；materials: brick, stone, steel ,glass, wood…)
T: If you were free to design your own dream house, what would that house look like? What materials would you use? Explain why you made certain choices about your dream house?
Architect: one who designs the construction of buildings or other large structures.
Give the students enough time to discuss the question. Collect their answers.
Step 3 :Pre-listening
T: You have already designed your own dream house; it is time to buy some furniture. What kind of furniture will you buy? And why do you prefer them?
Have a short discussion in pairs. You can introduce names of furniture, such as heater, air-conditioner and so on.
Step 4. Listening.
Books open, Page 18, listening part. It is a talk between a young married couple, Danny and Amy and a shop assistant.. They want to buy some furniture for their new house. Ask the students to go though the exercises and make sure what to do.
Play the tape twice for the students to listen and finish the exercises by themselves. They may check the answers in pairs.
Then play it a third time for the students to check their answers. Check them with the whole class in the end.
Step 5.Homework
Find out about the history of art and architecture, names of artists and architects, famous buildings and works of art in the world as much as possible. Share the ideas with others.
Teaching log:
Period 2 Speaking
Teaching aims:
1. To learn how to express one’s preferences.
2. To teach students how to describe a house.
Suggestions for teaching:
1. Important and difficult points:
(1) To find the proper words to describe a house.
(2) To express one’s own preferences in different ways.
2. Suggested teaching methods:
Books open, page 18. Ask the students to listen to the sample dialogue and follow the tape. Study the useful expressions. Remind them to learn the structure how to express their preferences.
Practice. Ask them to look at the pictures and choose the item they prefer. Try to explain the reasons.
Task one and task two: One is to talk about traditional and classical furniture. And the second task is choosing a picture to decorate their room.
T: In your dream houses, are there any chairs?
(Show some chairs) which one do you like? Why?
When they answer the question, encourage them to use expressions in the following table. A moment later, ask them to act out their own dialogue.
Useful expressions:
I’d rather…..
I’m much more interested in…….
In my opinion……
I really prefer……
I wouldn’t feel happy if……
I’m not very excited about ……..
If you ask me, then…..
I prefer something that…….
I like seeing something……
What I like is ……
I can’t stand……
Sample dialogue:
A: which do you like better, classical chairs or modern chairs?
B: I prefer modern chairs.
A: Why?
B: In my opinion, modern chairs are lighter and more colorful. They are comfortable.
A:…
Task three: Discussion (group work)
Here are some things that are important to some people when they choose a place to live. Try to get the students to discuss in groups, which of the following ideas are the most important. Students can add some other elements to the list when they discuss.
(1) close to work
(2) close to public transportation
(3) attractive building
(4) modern kitchen and bathroom
(5) reasonable rent or purchase price
(6) available parking
(7) plenty of space
(8) close to shopping
This discussion is close to students’ daily life, so teacher can make use of it to make them understand architecture better.
Homework:
. Decorate your bedroom and classroom. And talk about your decoration.
Teaching log:
Period 3 Reading
Teaching aims:
1. To learn something about art and architecture.
2. To give students profiles of some famous artists and architecture.
Important and difficult points:
To get students to understand the Past Participle used as Object Complement.
Step I. Lead –in:
Step II. Pre-reading:
Do you think the text will be about the following topics?
1.The text is about classical Chinese architecture. ( )
2.Some modern architecture takes examples from nature. ( )
3.The text is about parks and gardens. ( )
Step III. Reading:Scanning:
Part1( ) A.The differences between traditional.. and modern..,and why ancient architecture had many beautiful buildings
Part2( ) B. Every great culture in the past had its own ideas expressed in art and architecture
Part3( ) C. Examples of famous architects and great buildings that take examples from nature.
Part4( ) D. How and when modernism came into being?Careful reading:
1. Answer the following questions:
1.Why did a group of architects invent modernism?
2.What are the materials of modern architecture? And how about the traditional architecture?
3.What do the modern buildings look like?
4.Who are the two architects mentioned in the text? What inspired them?
5.Where were Antonio Gaodi’s works structured?
6.What is the outstanding feature of Gaodi’s works according to the passage?
Balconies look like _________.
Walls seem to be covered with the _____
of a _____.
The roof looks like the ____ of a _______.
Other parts look like ________.
7.What does the Olympic Stadium in Beijing look like?
2. Multiple-choice:
1.Which of the following belongs to modern architecture?
A.Taihe Dian
B.The Temple of Heaven
C.The Opera House is Sydney
D.The great European Cathedrals
2.From this passage we can infer that _____.
A.The writer prefers ancient buildings to modern ones.
B.The writer prefers traditional materials to modern ones.
C.The writer doesn’t like modern architects at all.
D.The writer prefers buildings that look natural to ones that look unnatural.
3.Which of the following best expresses the main idea of this passage?
A.Ancient architecture is popular.
B.Modern architecture is popular.
C.Ancient buildings look more beautiful than modern ones.
D.Different times, different styles of architecture.
3. True or false:
1.To many people modern architecture equals progress.( )
2.Many people find modern buildings unfriendly and ugly.( )
3.Modern architecture stands closer to nature than ancient architecture.( )
4.Gaudi was a Spanish ancient architect.( )
5.There are a few sharp corners and straight lines in Gaudi’s designs.( )6.Gaudi only used natural materials, such as stone, brick and wood.( )
7.Opera House in Sydney makes many people think of seashells.( )
8.The 2008 Olympic Stadium in Beijing will be made of stones and bricks.( )
4. Compare ancient architecture with modern architecture according to the passage.
Step IV. Post-reading
Discussion:
Suppose our school needs a new teaching building, now give you a chance to be an architect. Try to use your imagination to design it. And you should tell us why you want to do so.
Step V. Homework:
After class you should read the text more to understand it better and try to retell it.
Teaching log:
Period 4 Language points
Teaching aims:
1 To learn the useful words, expressions and sentences in the reading.
2.To enable students to use these language points in both spoken and written English.
Important and difficult points:
词语学习:
1.I'd rather = I would rather我宁愿
I'd rather live in an older building．我宁愿住在一座比较古老的建筑物里。
I'd rather not live in a modern building．我宁愿不住在一座现代的建筑物里。
2.prefer v．更喜欢…..
prefer sth to sth
I much prefer dogs to cats．与猫比起来，我更喜欢狗。
prefer to do sth
Many people living in cities would actually prefer to live in the country．许多住在城市的人实际上更愿意住在乡村。
prefer doing sth ，
Peter prefers traveling by train．彼得更喜欢乘火车旅行。
would prefer to do sth
We would prefer to live in the US，but l can't get a visa．我们宁愿住在美国，但是我不能得到签证。
prefer doing sth to doing sth
I prefer staying home to going out today．我今天宁愿呆在家里，也不愿出去。
3.I wouldn't feel happy if…我不会感到快乐，如果…
(1)与事实情况相反的句子(假设情况与假设结果均在现在)
I would buy a house if I had more money．如果我有更多的钱，我就会买一座房子。(I can't buy a house because I have no money)
(2)与事实情况相反的句子(假设情况与假设结果均在过去)
I would have called Ellen if I had known her phone number．如果我早知道艾伦的电话号码，我就会打电话给她。(1 didn't call Ellen for l didn't know her phone number．)
(3)与事实情况相反的混合时间句(假设情况在过去，假设结果在现在)
If l had been more practical, I would have more money now．如果我那时更实际些，我现在就会有更多的钱。(I wasn't more practical so l have less money.)
If l hadn't moved here，1 would be living in Italy now．如果我那时没有搬到这儿，我现在就会住在意大利了。(I did move here，so I am not living in Italy．)
(4)与事实情况相反的混合时间句(假设情况在现在,假设结果在过去)：
He would have called you if he weren't so shy．如果他不是如此害羞，他那时就会打电话给你的。(He is shy so he didn't call you．)
4.I can't stand我不能忍受…
stand sth．
I don't know if I can stand his words．我不知道我是否能忍受他的话。
stand one's doing sth．
How can you stand Mary coming home late all the time? 你怎么能忍受玛丽总是很晚回家?
5.preference n．偏好
I must admit I have a preference for romantic movies．我必须承认我更喜欢浪漫电影。 ．
I asked her where she wanted to go on vacation，but she didn't express any preference．我问她想到哪儿去度假，但她没表示自己的偏好。
In allocating housing，preference is given to those who have young children．在分配房子时，那些有小孩的人有优先权。
Many people choose the train in preference to driving．许多人宁愿选择火车也不愿选择自己驾车。
6.sale n．销售
--Excuse me, are these for sale? 请问这些卖吗?
--No，the pa
WARMING UP & SPEAKING
1. consider ...( as/to be)... 认为...是
consider sb to have done 认为某人做过某事
consider it +n./adj. for sb to do sth
consider doing sth 考虑要做某事
consider +疑问词 + to do sth 考虑...
consider that从句 认为；考虑
in consideration of 报答；由于
take ...into consideration 顾及，考虑到
under consideration 在考虑中，在研究中
2. means of transportation/transport 交通方式
Every possible means has been tried, but none worked.
All possible means have been tried, ...
by all means 不惜一切 =in all ways
by this means 用这种方法 =in this way
by no means 决不； 一点也不=in no way
by means of 通过， 借助于 = by
3. in time 及时;早晚;总有一天 travel in time 在时空中旅行
on time 准时 in no time 马上；立刻
at that time 那时 at times 有时
for the time being 暂时的
4. prefer sth / to do sth / sb to do sth 更喜欢；较喜欢
prefer doing A to doing B 宁愿做某事
prefer A to B; 喜欢A 胜于B = like A better than B
prefer to do A rather than do B 宁愿做A 而不愿做 B
5. in space 在太空 in outer space 在外部空间
ADVENTURE TRAVEL
6. get away (from) 摆脱； 离开
break away from 脱离 get rid of 去除
7. more and more 越来越…
8. instead of 代替； 而不是 （区分：instead）rather than
9. try doing 试验做 try to do sth 努力去做；试图作
manage to do sth = succeed in doing sth 设法做到了某事
attempt to do sth; make an attempt to do sth 企图做某事
10. get close to 靠近； 接近
11. experience life 体验生活 experience C.n 经历 U.n.经验
12. take exercise 进行锻炼 have sports; do sport
exercise C.n 练习题 (pl) 体操 U.n 锻炼
13. go for a hike = go hiking 去徒步旅行
14. watch out （for...） 留神； 提防
15. protect… from/against … 保护…免受…
16. be careful (not) to do sth 小心(不)做某事
be careful about 注意
be careful with 小心；
17. as with ....也一样 as to / for 至于；关于
18. think about 考虑 think of 想到，想起
think over 仔细考虑 think out 想出
19. go rafting 去漂流
20. unless = if not 除非...否则...
You should not go rafting unless you know how to swim.(条件)
区分：until
You must not get off the bus until it has stopped.(时间)
GRAMMAR
现在进行时表示将来的计划，打算
How are you getting to the airport?
一般现在时表示时刻表的将来
My plane leaves at seven this evening.
21. go on separate holidays 分别去度假
22. in a few days’ time = in a few days =a few days later 几天后
after 和 in 的区分
23. go off to ； be off to 动身去 leave for;
24. see sb off 给某人送行 meet sb 接某人
25. take a taxi to 乘出租车 go to ...by taxi
26. have a nice / pleasant trip/journey 祝旅途愉快
27. say “Hi” to sb. for me 代我向某人问好
give my regards to sb
remember me to sb.
28. The same to you. 我也祝愿你。
对比： It’s the same with... ...也一样
It’s all the same to sb 对某人而言是一样的。
I have the same pencil bag as yours/ you have.
29. in the past 在过去 in the old days
30. at present 目前; at the present time; nowadays
31. in the future 在未来；将来 in future 以后
32. used to do sth 过去常做某事
be used to do sth 被用来做 be used for (doing) sth
be used to sth/doing sth习惯于 get used to doing
INTEGRATING SKILLS
33. combine…with… 把…和…结合起来 (为了共同目的合并)
connect...with/to... 把...和...连接起来 （通过媒介物连接）
link...with/to
join...to... （直接连接）
34. on (the) one hand… , on the other hand …
一方面…, 另一方面..
35. so that = in order that 为了…； 以便…
36. learn about 了解； 学习有关…知识
37. as well as =and 也； 又；以及 as well = too
38. by doing sth... 通过作某事 by means of doing
39. make money 挣钱； 赚钱 earn money
40. the four of you 你们四个人
four of you 你们其中的四个人
41. prepare ( sth) for... 为…做准备... get ready for
prepare sb for sth 使某人为某事做好准备
be well prepared (for); 为...做好了充分的准备=be ready for
make preparations for 为...做准备
42. make notes 做笔记 take notes
WORKBOOK
43. take off （飞机）起飞；脱掉（衣帽鞋）
44. go on holiday 去度假 go to (a place) for a holiday
INTEGRATING SKILLS
45. fill…with… 给…充满… be filled with; be full of 充满了
46. the way (in which/that) + 定语从句
the/a way of doing sth = the/a way to do sth 做某事的方法
47. catch up with 赶上 keep up with 跟上；不落后
48. reach out (for sth) 伸手去（拿，碰）
49. pay attention to 注意
focus one’s attention on
call /draw/attract one’s attention to 吸引某人的注意力于
WRITING
50. give away 赠送， 放弃， 泄漏（机密）
give up 放弃 give in (to sb) 屈服
give out 分发；发出（光，热，气，味等）
give off 发出（光，热，气，味等）
51. come up with 提出；想到（主意）；
Reading:
1. in store（1）in store 就要到来，必将发生
Who knows what the future has in store for us? 谁知道我们将来注定如何？
（2）in store 也有储存着，备用的意思 eg:
The runner kept some energy in store for spurting at the end. 那赛跑的人为最后冲刺贮存精力。
2 probable, maybe, likely, possible, perhaps的区别？
（1）三者均表可能性，但意思有别。possible指客观上有可能性，但往往含有希望很小的意味；probable可能性最大，有“较为可能、大概”，指有实际依据；likely是从外表迹象判断有可能发生的事，比较主观。
It’s possible, though not probable, that he will come tomorrow. 他明天可能来，但也不一定准来。
She is likely to ring me tonight. 今晚她很可能给我来电话。
（2）possible 不能用人作主语。possible 常用于下列句型：
It is possible to do sth. It is possible for sb. to do sth. It is possible that …
eg: Is it possible to say so?可能这样说吗？ It is possible for me to do it. 我可能做那件事。
（3）probable 也不能用人作主语。一般只用于下面句型中：
It is probable that … eg: It is probable that he will come. 他很可能要来。
（4）likely 既可用人作主语，也可用物作主语。通可用于“It is likely that …”句型中。 eg:
He is likely to come. = It is likely that he will come.
他可能要来。但不能说：It is likely for him to come.
（5）impossible, improbable, unlikely 用法与上述类似。
其中maybe perhaps是副词
3 It’s home to ： home: n. “ 所在地,大本营, 根据地, 发源地”.
It is home to… ……之家;……的生息地；……发源地
丛林是老虎的生息地。The jungle is home to tigers.
It’s the home of 也可以
4 grasp: v 1)抓住；紧握
I grasped the cat by the back of its neck.我抓住了猫的后脖颈。grasp sb. by the arm
2)（与at连用）急切地接受
3)领会；明白to grasp sb.'s meaning懂某人的意思
Grasp all, lose all. 谚）样样都要，全数失掉．
n. 1)抓，紧握I kept her hand in my grasp.我紧握她的手。
2)（能力所及的）范围，限度Success is within his grasp.成功垂手可得。
3)（与of连用）控制力；控制to be in the grasp of an enemy在敌人的控制之下
4)了解；明白；掌握to have a thorough grasp of a subject对某一题目有深刻的了解。
5短语：beyond/within a person’s grasp 为某人所不能/能抓到的；为某人所不能/能理解的。
catch, grasp, seize 与snatch
catch是普通用语，用“设法抓住，捉住”的意思； grasp表示牢牢地“抓住”；seize指“突然用力抓住使不逃脱”；snatch 表示迅速的拉扯动作、出其不意地“抓取”。 eg:
The police caught the thief as he ran. 小偷逃跑时被警察抓住了。
He grasped his gun and rushed out. 他抓起枪就冲了出去。
He seized the gun from the enemy soldier. 他从敌人士兵手中夺过了枪。
The thief snatched her handbag and ran off. 小偷抢走了她的手提包就跑了。
5 master: vt. , vi (1) vt. ①become the master of; overcome 成为……的主人；征服；控制
eg: master one’s temper/feelings 控制脾气/感情
It’s difficult to master nature. 征服大自然是困难的。
②gain as a skill 精通；熟练 eg:
master English 精通英语 master foreign affairs 精通外交事务
He never mastered the art of the public speaking. 他从未掌握当众演讲的艺术。
(2)n. ①man who has others working for him 主人，雇主
②male head of a household 家里的男主人
③大师；名家
④male teacher 男教师 eg: the master of the house 一家之长 the maths master 数学教师
5)硕士a master’s degree 硕士学位 a master’s degree 硕士学位 a doctor’s degree 博士学位 a bachelor’s degree 学士学位
又如：Master of Arts 文学硕士 Doctor of Law 法学博士 Bachelor of Science 理学学士
6 arrange:v.
(1)put in order 安排；排列；布置 eg:
She is good at arranging flowers. 她擅长插花。
Before going away, he arranged his business affairs. 他离开之前，他把业务都安排好了。
(2)make plans in advance 预做计划 eg:
The Tourist Bureau arranged everything for our journey to Rome. 旅游局为我们去罗马的旅行准备了一切。
(3)arrange+ n. +for +n. 为……安排…… eg:
Mother arranged an appointment for me with the dentist. 母亲替我向牙医预约挂号。
(4)arrange sb. to do … 安排某人做…… eg:
I have arranged him to met her. 我安排他和她见面。
(5)arrange with sb. to do … 约定与某人做…… eg:
We arranged with his team to play a game of baseball. 我们约好和他们队打一场棒球。
(6)arrange that … 商定，安排。 eg:
He arranged that the meeting (should) be put off for a week. = He arranged for the meeting to be put off for a week. 他安排把会议延后一周召开。
7 set foot in/ on: 进入；踏上She said she wouldn’t set foot in the room until it had been properly cleaned. 她说直到这屋子收拾好了她才住进去。
No man has ever set foot on that deserted island. 没有人曾光顾过那个荒芜的岛。
on (one's) feet:
1)Standing up:站立着：Rise to one’s foot
The crowd was on its feet for the last ten seconds.人群都站立着渡过了最后的十秒钟
2)Fully recovered, as after an illness or convalescence:
康复：疾病或渐愈之后完全康复：
The patient is on her feet again.病人复原了
set up开办建立 /set aside搁置 /set out出门/set off出发/set down放下 /set about着手
8 base sth. in/at 把．．．设在 base sth. on/upon 以．．．为基础
base n.底部, 根据地, 基地, 本部, 基础（物体基础）
That company has offices all over the world, but their base is in Paris.
这个公司的办事处遍布全世界，但本部在巴黎。
那家银行的总部设在伦敦 That bank’s head office is based in London.
vt.：形成…的基础，提供…的基础：
based the new company in Portland.在波特兰设立公司
2）To find a basis for; establish:以…为基础：发现…的基础；建立，创立：（与on, upon连用）根据；基于
One should always base one's opinions on facts. 意见应以事实为根据。
这个故事是以事实为基础的. This story is based on facts.
based her conclusions on the report; a film based on a best-selling novel.
根据报告作为她的结论；一部以畅销小说为题材的影片
Advertisements based on these facts have been printed in newspapers and magazines but have not helped much.根据这些情况拟定的广告词登载在报纸和杂志上,但是效果不大。
Basis:1)基础（非物质方面）；根据What is the basis of your opinion?你的观点的根据是什么？
2)主要部分The basis of this drink is orange juice.这种饮料的主要成分是橘子汁。
A tall building must have a very wide and stable base.
The basis of friendship is mutual trust and respect.
9 effect: n. 1)have a good/positive/negative/immediate effect on sb./sth.
2) in effect (A)实质上；本质上：He is, in effect, my rival.实际上他是我的竞争对手。
(B)正在实行The old system is still in effect.旧制度仍有效。
3)bring sth into effect : bring a new law into effect
4)come into effect : The new law will come into effect.
5)take effect: The medicine quickly took effect. 药很快见效了
6)side effect: Does this drug have any side effects?
Affect: v.
10. rely on／upon sb./ sth.: =depend on 指望或依靠某人/某事物
现今人们越来越依靠计算机协助工作.Nowadays we rely increasingly on computers for help.
rely on one’s doing/rely sb. to do sth. rely on it that…
我指望她来还钱I rely on her paying back the money.(=I rely on her to pay back the money.)
你可以相信他会来看你的You may rely on it that he will come to meet you.
11 As Yufang puts(=say) it: “We are not making that(=so) much money yet, but we are excited about all the new technology and great ideas that are coming to life in Zhongguancun.”
as sb. puts it…正如某人所说．．．put vt. 表达，表述
我想知道这个用法语怎么说. I want to know how to put this in French.
come to life: 苏醒；恢复生气 eg:
We all thought he was drowned, but after an hour’s artificial respiration he came back to life. 我们都以为他淹死了，但经过一小时的人工呼吸后，他又苏醒了。
When I told the students the good news, they all came to life. 当我告诉学生们这个好消息时，他们都活跃起来了。
Integrating skills
1. Since the early 1990s, China has been enjoying a boom in scientific and technological development.
a) boom: (人口,贸易等的)突然增加,繁荣昌盛时期,
石油市场欣欣向荣 The oil market is enjoying a boom.
中国的出口发展迅速.The year is a boom year for China’s exports.
b) boom: V. “处于经济快速发展时期”商业正在迅速发展. Business is booming.
2. In 1995, the Chinese government put forward a plan for “rejuvenating the nation by replying on science and education.
1) rejuvenate: v. “使年轻;使复原; 是恢复精神;使恢复活力”
新的希望又使他充满活力. He is rejuvenated by new hope.
我度假之后感到有了精神. I feel rejuvenated after a holiday.
rejuvenate 一般用于被动语态.
3. put forward 提出主意,计划她提出一个新计划 She put forward a new plan.
4. The CSA, the Chinese Space Agency, has developed the highly successful Long March rocket series.
1) series 一系列的事物
他们决定出版一套新的英语学习读物.
They decided to publish a new series of reading materials for students of English.
2)电视系列节目, 电视连续剧
3) 一套邮票
5. ., Chinese scientists announced that they had completed mapping out their part of the international human genome project, proving that Chinese scientists are among the world’s best.
announce vt.宣布, 通告announcement n.宣告, 发表, 一项公告, 一项私人告示
It has been announce d that Mr. A and Miss B will be married next week.
已正式宣布A先生与B小姐将于下星期结婚。
declare1）正式地公告；布告；宣告；声明
to declare war 宣战
to declare the result of election 公布选举结果
2）申报（例如，可纳税品）Have you anything to declare?你有要申报纳税的物品吗？
proving that Chinese scientists are among the world’s best.: 现在分词作状语, 表示伴随或结果
杰克离开了房间, 把他妻子孤零零留在那里 Jack left the room, leaving his wife there alone.
他没有和她争辩,知道争辩也没用. He didn’t argue wither, knowing it would be useless.
总的来说,现在分词作状语,主要用在书面语中,在口语重视用其他结构更多些.
6.China has long been a leader in the field of genetic research aimed at improving agriculture.
Aim: to intend:
1)aim to do: I aim to be a millionaire by the time I'm 35.
2)We are aiming for (= planning to achieve) a 50% share of the German market.
3)aim at ①瞄准,对准你瞄的不准.
②(向某方面)努力;力争她争取获得奖学金She’s aiming at a scholar ship.
③针对某人我的话并非针对你 My remarks were not aimed at you.
7 deadly: adj.1)致命的
Fog is the sailor's deadly enemy.雾是航海者最致命的敌人。
2)势不两立的， 殊死的
3)极度的，非常的deadly haste至急
4)死一般的a dead paleness如死人般的苍白
Adv.极度地；非常地deadly dull极为枯燥无味
Unit 11知识清单
1. in store _____________;__________
Who knows what the future has in store for us?
The runner kept some energy in store for spurting at the end.
2 probable, maybe, likely, possible, perhaps的区别？
（1）三者均表可能性，但意思有别。possible指客观上有可能性，但往往含有希望很小的意味；另外，不能用人作主语。probable可能性最大，有“较为可能、大概”，指有实际依据；likely是从外表迹象判断有可能发生的事，比较主观。 possible 常见句型：It is possible to do sth. It is possible for sb. to do sth. It is possible that …
eg: Is it possible to say so?可能这样说吗？ It is possible for me to do it. 我可能做那件事。
It’s ________, though not ________, that he will come tomorrow. 他明天可能来，但也不一定准来。
She is _________ to ring me tonight. 今晚她很可能给我来电话。
2）probable 也不能用人作主语。一般只用于下面句型中：
It is probable that … eg: It is probable that he will come. 他很可能要来。
3）likely 既可用人作主语，也可用物作主语。通可用于“It is likely that …”句型中。 eg:
He is likely to come. = It is likely that he will come.
他可能要来。但不能说：It is likely for him to come.
（5）impossible, improbable, unlikely 用法与上述类似。
其中maybe perhaps是副词
3 It’s home to ： home: n. “ _________ _________ ”.
The jungle is home to tigers.（也可以说：It’s the home of）
4 grasp: v 1)___________ grasp sb. by the arm
I grasped the cat by the back of its neck.
2)（与at连用）急切地接受
3)___________ to grasp sb.'s meaning
Grasp all, lose all. 谚）样样都要，全数失掉．
n. 1)抓，紧握I kept her hand in my grasp.
2)（能力所及的）范围，限度Success is within his grasp.
3)（与of连用）控制力；控制to be in the grasp of an enemy
4)了解；明白；掌握to have a thorough grasp of a subject
5短语：beyond/within a person’s grasp
catch, grasp, seize 与snatch
catch是普通用语，用“设法抓住，捉住”的意思； grasp表示牢牢地“抓住”；seize指“突然用力抓住使不逃脱”；snatch 表示迅速的拉扯动作、出其不意地“抓取”。 eg:
The police __________ the thief as he ran. 小偷逃跑时被警察抓住了。
He _________ his gun and rushed out. 他抓起枪就冲了出去。
He __________ the gun from the enemy soldier. 他从敌人士兵手中夺过了枪。
The thief ________ her handbag and ran off. 小偷抢走了她的手提包就跑了。
5 master: vt. , vi master one’s temper/feelings 控制脾气/感情
It’s difficult to master nature. master English ; master foreign affairs ; He never mastered the art of the public speaking.;
n. ① male head of a household 家里的______ ②大师；名家 ③the maths master _______
④ a master’s degree ________ 引申：a doctor’s degree 博士学位 a bachelor’s degree 学士学位
又如：Master of Arts 文学硕士 Doctor of Law 法学博士 Bachelor of Science 理学学士
6 arrange:v. She is good at arranging flowers.
Before going away, he arranged his business affairs.
The Tourist Bureau arranged everything for our journey to Rome.
We arranged with his team to play a game of baseball.
He arranged that the meeting (should) be put off for a week. = He arranged for the meeting to be put off for a week.
7 set foot in/ on: _________
She said she wouldn’t set foot in the room until it had been properly cleaned.
No man has ever set foot on that deserted island.
on (one's) feet:_____：(Rise to one’s foot)
The crowd was on its feet for the last ten seconds.
2)Fully recovered, as after an illness or convalescence:
康复：疾病或渐愈之后完全康复：The patient is on her feet again.病人复原了
set up_______ /set aside_______ /set out_______/set off_______/set down_______ /set about_______
8 base sth. in/at 把．．．设在 base sth. on/upon 以．．．为基础
base n.底部, 根据地, 基地, 本部, 基础（物体基础）
That company has offices all over the world, but their base is in Paris.
That bank’s head office is based in London.
vt.：形成…的基础，以…为基础based the new company in Portland.
One should always base one's opinions on facts.
Basis:1)基础（非物质方面）；根据What is the basis of your opinion?
2)主要部分The basis of this drink is orange juice.
A tall building must have a very wide and stable base.
The basis of friendship is mutual trust and respect.
9 effect: n. 1)have a good/positive/negative/immediate effect on sb./sth.
2) in effect______; ___________
He is, in effect, my rival. The old system is still in effect.
3)bring sth into effect : bring a new law into effect
4)come into effect : The new law will come into effect.
5)take effect: The medicine quickly took effect. 药很快见效了
6)side effect: Does this drug have any side effects?
Affect: vt. _______
10. rely on／upon sb./ sth.: =depend on __________
Nowadays we rely increasingly on computers for help.
I rely on _______________ the money.我指望她来还钱。
You may rely on it that he will come to meet you.
12 As Yufang puts(=say) it: “We are not making that(=so) much money yet, but we are excited about all the new technology and great ideas that are coming to life in Zhongguancun.”
as sb. puts it…正如某人所说．．．put vt. 表达，表述
I want to know how to put this in French.
come to life: ___________
We all thought he was drowned, but after an hour’s artificial respiration he came back to life.
When I told the students the good news, they all came to life.
Integrating skills
1. Since the early 1990s, China has been enjoying a boom in scientific and technological development.
a) boom: _______________
The oil market is enjoying a boom. The year 2003 is a boom year for China’s exports.
b) boom: V. ___________ Business is booming.
2. In 1995, the Chinese government put forward a plan for “rejuvenating the nation by replying on science and education.
1) rejuvenate: v. “______________; ______________
He is rejuvenated by new hope. I feel rejuvenated after a holiday.
rejuvenate 一般用于被动语态.
3. put forward _____________ She put forward a new plan.
4. The CSA, the Chinese Space Agency, has developed the highly successful Long March rocket series. 1) series __________ They decided to publish a new series of reading materials for students of English.
2)电视系列节目, 电视连续剧
3) 一套邮票
5. 2001, Chinese scientists announced that they had completed mapping out their part of the international human genome project, proving that Chinese scientists are among the world’s best.
announce vt.宣布, 通告announcement n.宣告, 发表, 一项公告, 一项私人告示
declare1）正式地公告；布告；宣告；声明; 申报（例如，可纳税品）
It has been ___________ that Mr. A and Miss B will be married next week.
已正式宣布A先生与B小姐将于下星期结婚。
to __________ war 宣战 to _________ the result of election 公布选举结果
Have you anything to _________?你有要申报纳税的物品吗？
6.China has long been a leader in the field of genetic research aimed at improving agriculture.
Aim: aim to do: I aim to be a millionaire by the time I'm 35.
We are aiming for (= planning to achieve) a 50% share of the German market.
3)aim at ①瞄准,对准你瞄的不准.
②(向某方面)努力;力争她争取获得奖学金She’s aiming at a scholar ship.
③针对某人我的话并非针对你 My remarks were not aimed at you.
7 deadly: adj.1)___________ Fog is the sailor's deadly enemy.
2)势不两立的， 殊死的
3)极度的，非常的 deadly haste至急
4)死一般的 a deadly paleness如死人般的苍白
Adv.极度地；非常地deadly dull极为枯燥无味
UNIT 11 过关练习
1 . He is the only driver ______ for the journey.
A. possible B. probable C. possibly D. likely
2 Having decided to rent a flat, we _____to contact all the accommodation agencies in the city.
A. set about B. set down C. set out D. set up
3 I was advised to arrange for insurance _____ I needed medical treatment.
A. although B. incase C. so that D. if only
4 The professor could hardly find enough grounds ______ his arguments in favor of the new theory.
A．to be based on B．to base on C．which to base on D．on which to base
5.The new appointment of our headmaster ______ from the very beginning of the next semester.
A. takes effect B. takes place C. takes turns D. takes part
6. If you ___________ a mistake in reviewing the report, please bring it to my attention.
A. come along B. come across C. come around D. come about
7. --- Not getting that job was a big bet down. ---Don’t worry. Something better will .
A. come along B. take on C. go by C. fall behind
8. Our English teacher _____ by the teachers and students.
A. is good thought of B. is thought high of C. is sung highly praise for D. is spoken highly of
9.When the famous scientist was making a speech, many eyes were________ on him.
A. set B. centered C. fixed D. aimed
10 Whether this work of art is valuable remains ____________.
A. to prove B. proving C. to be proved D. proved
11 We had thought the examination would be difficult, but it easy.
A．turned B．came C．appeared D．proved
12. We’ll never forget the ____Premier Chou Enlai. A. late B. dead C. past D. deadly
13．The adverbial phrase ”every day“ has ____ space between _____ two words.
A. the; the B. a; the C. 不填; the D. 不填； 不填
14 Yang Liwei is _____ first Chinese who has _____ experience of traveling in space.
A. 不填; 不填 B. 不填; the C. the; 不填 D. the; an
15．- The young man is good at a lot of things but you can’t say he is ________ .
- I agree with you. Actually no one is.
A. wonderful B. splendid C. perfect D. complete
16.1) I wrote him a letter and suggested ____ the meeting ____.
A. to put ; away B. to put ; off C. putting ; off D. putting ; away
17 Once you are contracted with the disease, you will never hope to ______ the virus and sufferings from it all your life.
A. be free from B. avoid C. defeat D. cure
18 I don’t doubt _______ the medicine is _______ effect for cancer.
A. that, a cure of B. if, cure of C. how, a cure for D. that, cure for
19 Such ________ the case, I couldn't help but________ him.
A. being; support B. is; to support C. has been; supporting D. be; supported
20---If you like the new house, I suggest you buying it.
---But it”s really too expensive. I can”t______ it. A. get B. afford C. supply D. support
1-5 ACBDA 6-10 BADCC 11-15 DABDC 16-20 CAAAB 21-22
21. Some hospitals allow patients to keep their own blood______ several weeks in advance of surgery. A. in general B. in store C. at stake D. at ease
22. What he's saying is that they play away quite happily, not realizing what's _____for them in the rest of their lives. A. in general B. in store C. at stake D. at ease
23. I’d rather have a room of my own, however small it is, than ________ a room with someone else.
A. share B. to share C. sharing D. to have shared
24. ---Do you understand what I said? ---I didn’t ____ the last two words.
A. grasp B. catch C. seize D. follow
25. Every day the boy, together with his classmates, ______ to go to the sports ground and ______ football, ______ themselves.
A. are noticed, play, enjoying B. is noticed, plays, enjoying
C. are noticed, plays, enjoys D. is noticed, play, enjoying
26. _____ back to life, the sailor found all his things _____at sea.
A．Having come; missing B．Coming; lost
C．Having come; going D．Coming; missed
27. He will _____ our class to sing at the school singing contest.
A. take place of B. stand for C. represent D. representative of
28. My English teacher usually _____ the students into pairs to practice using new vocabulary.
A．breaks out B．breaks through C．breaks up D．breaks down
29. The Chinese Space Agency has developed the __ successful Long March rocked series.
A. highly B. heavily C. even D. much
30. _____ has been announced, we shall have our final exams next month.
A. That B. As C. It D. Which
31. I’d rather have a room of my own, however small it is, than ________ a room with someone else.
A. share B. to share C. sharing D. to have shared
32. Red is usually ____ danger so traffic lights include red ones.
A. marked with B. lined with C. related with D. associated with
21-25 BBABD 26-30 BCCAB 31-32 AD
Topic: art and architecture
1.Stimulate the students’ interests in talking about art and architecture
2.Cultivate the students’ ability of speaking, reading, discussing.
3.Enable the students to learn some useful words and expressions: architecture, architect, prefer, design, style
I would not feel happy if …
I would not feel happy if ….
I don not get very excited about …
I really prefer…
I can not stand
Teaching important point:
1. Enable the students to master the ways of discussing differences between modern and traditional things, to encourage them to talk about their preference.
2. Help the students to learn about the past participle: used as object complement
Teaching difficult point:
Inspire the students to express their design of house.
Teaching methods: free talk, communicative method to improve students’ speaking ability and communicative skills.
Teaching aids: multimedia. recorder.
Teaching procedures:
Period 1: Warming-up and Speaking
Period 2: Reading
Period 3: Language study
Period 4: Listening and writing
Period 5: Integrating skills
Period 1：Warming up and Speaking
Step 1. Greetings and warming-up
T: Good morning, class.
S: Good morning, Miss Qiu.
T: where are you from, a city or a small town?
Can you describe the buildings in your hometown?
What kind of buildings do you live in, a traditional house or an apartment?
S: …
(Show students two pictures, a tall building and a traditional yard.)
T: what can you see in the two pictures?
S: We can see two different styles of house: block of flats and traditional house.
T: What is the difference between them?
Suggested answers:
Block of flats Traditional house
Modern.
Convenient.
The rooms are big.
Every flat has a toilet and bathroom.
Not much contact with their neighbors.
People often feel lonely.
Flat roof.
… Old-style.
The rooms are small.
Sometimes no toilet or bathroom.
Life is much more interesting. Neighbors get on well with each other. People can grow flowers in the yard.
The roof is sloping.(why?)
…
T: In which house would you prefer to live? Why?
S: I like living in …. because….
I prefer living…
I’d rather live…
(For example, living in the small house makes me feel warm. I like making friends with my neighbors. It looks like a big family. Encourage them to express their ideas freely.)
T: Buildings in the different places are different. So what words and phrases do you think will be useful when you want to talk about art and architecture?
(Show the students some different kinds of houses, and ask them to describe them.)
S: appearance: high, low, great. The palaces were large and beautiful, and they often looked like something out of a fairy tale.；materials: brick, stone, steel, glass, wood…
T: If you were free to design your own dream house, what would that house look like? What materials would you use? Explain why you made certain choices about your dream house?
S: ……
Step 2 Speaking
T: Now let’s move to the speaking part. Turn to P18. Please listen to the sample dialogue .Pay attention to the ways how to express their preferences.
(After listening to the dialogue for once)
T: Ok! The dialogue is about two persons talking about their preference for styles of architecture. The noun form of “prefer” is “preference”. The stress should be put on the first syllable. Please read the word after me .
S: ……
T: There are some useful expressions in the dialogue. Such as “I wouldn’t feel happy if …”
“I prefer something that…” “I don’t get very excited…”
T: Now please look at the pictures and talk with your partner which of the things below you prefer. Try to explain why you prefer one thing to another.
S: …
(Show some chairs on the screen)
T: In your dream houses, are there any chairs? Which one do you like? Why?
Sample dialogue:
A: which do you like better, classical chairs or modern chairs?
B: I prefer modern chairs.
A: Why?
B: In my opinion, modern chairs are lighter and more colorful. They are comfortable.
Step 3 . Homework
Decorate your bedroom and classroom. And talk about your decoration.
Period 2: Reading
Step1: Pre-reading
(Show pictures of both modern architecture and classical architecture)
T: We’ve really had a wonderful tour around the world last time, seeing the marvelous architecture home and abroad, modern and classical. I hope you enjoy that… but I wonder if all of you can recognize some of the most famous architecture.
S: Sydney House; the Eiffel Tower; the Temple of Heaven…
T: Among all of these pictures, which ones belong to modern architecture?
S: …
T: How do you know which ones belong to modern architecture? What’s the difference between modern architecture and classical architecture?
S: …
T: If you want to know more and to enjoy the beauty of modern architecture, you’d better join us, as we are going to have a new journey, the journey to the world of modern architecture.(Show modern architecture on the screen)
Step2: While-reading
1. Fast- reading
T: Q1:Wha’s the difference between modern architecture and classical architecture?
Q2: What kind of materials is used? What other materials do you know?
Q3: What’s the characteristic? How do people feel towards modern architecture?
Difference
Modern architecture Classical architecture
Materials Steel, iron, glass… Stone, brick, wood…
Characteristics Huge; like boxes; unfriendly Beautiful, closer to nature
2. Careful-reading
T: Now please find out the information according to the key words on the screen.
Modern architecture
Q1: When was modernism invented? -----1920s
Q2: How many architects are there in the text? ---Antonio Gaudi/ Wright
Q3: What did Gaudi want to be used in his works? What’s the characteristic of his architecture? How is his architecture like?
----Natural materials/ like a dream, full of fantastic colors and shapes.
Q4: What inspired Wright? ----Japanese seashells
Q5: How many examples are there in the text?
----The Opera House/ the new Olympic Stadium
Q6: How do they look like? ----Seashell/ nest
Q7: What do they (two architects / two examples) have in common? ---Nature
3. Listening
T: While listening, please pay attention to the key points in the text. (Show the key points on the screen)
Step3. Post-reading
Interview (group work)
Step4. Homework
Report what you have learned about modern architecture next time.
Period 3: Language study
Step 1 Lead-in
T: Hello, everybody, yesterday we have seen a lot of wonderful modern architectures and got to know some famous architects. Today I’d like to introduce you one of my friends. He is an architect. Who can tell me the meaning of “architect”. (a person who designs buildings). He lived in this house when he was young. Do you think this house beautiful or not beautiful? (not beautiful) Can you use another word to replace “not beautiful”. (ugly). So when he became an architect, he designed some pretty houses. Not long ago he designed a new house for me. Let’s go and see my new house.
Step 2 Vocabulary
T: Welcome to my new house. Could you say something about my new home?
T: I’m not alone here, because I have two neighbors. Do you know who are they and where they live? (nest, dog house)
T: Let’s learn some new words of house.
(balcony concrete nest brick roof)
Try to remember these new words, then fill in the blanks.
1. An area with a wall or bars around it, joined to the outside wall of a building ________________.
2.A strong construction material which is a mixture of stone, and sand and water _________________
3.A shelter made by a bird to hold its eggs and young ____________
4.The structure on the top of a building to keep the rain out_________
Step 3 Word Study
T: Can you tell me which is the most ancient building in my yard? (nest)
A nest is to a bird what a house to a man.
Who can tell me the meaning of this sentence?
(鸟剿和鸟的关系就和房子和人的关系一样)
T: Good. Let’s try another one
Water is to fish what air is to men.
(水和鱼的关系就于空气和人的关系一样)
T: Well done. These two sentences have something in common-they are using the same sentence pattern. What is it?
S: →A is to B what C is to D
T: Very good. Now I will show you more pictures, you should find out the relationship between these pictures, and create sentences using the above pattern.
Fur is to a fox what the_____is to a banana.
____are to a house what words are to a text.
An architect is to_______what a painter is to art.
A___is to a boat what an engine is to a car.
A____is to a fisherman what a gun is to a hunter.
Arms are to the body what_______are to a tree.
Step 4 Grammar
T: I’m very glad that you like my new home. Our new school is far away from the downtown, so a new market is build near our school. I’ll guide you to the market to see what you can do there.
(show the Ss the picture and ask them to describe it.)
T: What can you see in the market? Let’s see what can we do here?
For examples: I can have my hair cut here. I can have my bike mended.
Please make similar sentences.
S:…
T: In all these sentences we use a sentence pattern-“have something done”.
Now let’s see the pairs of sentences, and compare A and B.
A: I can have my bike mended
B: I can have the car waiting for me.
A: I found myself tied to a tree.
B: I found myself walking in a forest.
T: when we use –ing form, we are using passive voice. When we use –ed form, we are using active voice.
→ passive voice: -ed
active voice: - ing
T: Now let’s do some exercises.
Matching
Did you find the city done?
When will he ever get the work greatly changed?
She can’t make herself called.
Next week I’ll have my bedroom understood.
You’ve got to keep the door locked.
I got the watch repaired.
She heard her name decorated
Completing
I don’t want any bad words____(say) about him behind his back.
Please get the work____(do) as soon as possible.
I’ll have the materials_____(send) to you next Monday morning.
She won’t have her long and beautiful hair____ (cut) short.
You should make your voice______(hear).
I want you to keep me_________(inform) of how things are going with you.
The rent sounds reasonable. How would you like it________(pay).
At last I succeeded in making myself__________(understand).
We’ll move to the new school, and four people will share one room. There will be a competition on decorating your room. The most beautiful and most special room will he the winner. Now work in groups of four to design your room. Five minutes later the group leaders should give a simple report. And pay attention to use –ed form in your report.
Step 5 Homework
1.Workbook page 97, exercises 1-5
2.Workbook page 98, exercises 1-2
Period4: listening and writing
Step 1 : Greeting and Warming up
T: The National Day is coming. I know most students in our class are waiting for the exciting day, so am I .On holiday ,we can do many exciting things. Such as going shopping, visiting beautiful place, visiting good friends…Now I will ask some students to share your ideas. **, Please, what are you going to do on the National Day?
S: …
T: What about you? What’s your opinion?
S: …
T: On National Day, what cloth will you put on? School uniforms or cloth with personal style?
T: …
T: I think most students in our class will put on cloth with personal style ,because this kind of cloth can make us feel confident .Right?
S :…
T: It is time to buy some furniture. What kind of furniture will you buy? And why do you prefer them?
S:…
T: For most young person, their choices in buying furniture is very much like buying clothes, while old people often choose traditional furniture that is made of strong materials and can be used for a long time .
Step 2. Listening
T: Today, we are going to learn the listening part . Turn to P18. This dialogue is about a young married couple, Danny and Amy and a shop assistant.. They want to buy some furniture for their new house. They visit a shop and talk with a shop assistant about their tastes and preferences.
(Play the tape twice for the students to listen and finish the exercises by themselves. They may check the answers in pairs. Then play it a third time for the students to check their answers. Check them with the whole class in the end..)
Step 3. writing
T: Do you think the building in our school is beautiful?”
S1: It is very beautiful…
S2: The school looks like a desert ,The walls are white-washed and there aren’t any art works on them.
T: We think the building would be more beautiful if the school would be decorated with paintings ,photos and art works. We think art in the school could give us many new experiences and enrich our lives. But suppose that the school does not have a lot of money. How can our school be decorated? Now please work in groups of 4 to make a plan that show how the whole school can be decorated? I will give you 3 minutes to have a discussion.
Suggest answer:
1. Mangy art works ca be made by teachers and students.
2. Art posters can be used for decorating.
Step 4. Homework.
T: Please write a letter to the headmaster explaining how you want to decorate the school with art works. Describe the art of your choice, what function it should have in your school and why it is important to have art in school buildings.
Paragraph1. Explain why the school should be decorated.
Paragraph2. Explain what function the art should have in the school.
Paragraph3. Describe different types of art works that could be chosen and where they should be hung up in the school.
Paragraph4. Discuss the different prices of different art works and write a plan to decorate the school as well as possible using little money .
Period 5: Integrating skills
Step 1. Revision:
T: Dear class, I’m especially happy these days, because I’ve just bought a new house. It’s very beautiful. Look, here it is. I want to share my happiness with you. So would you like to help me design my house? How should I decorate my room? Please discuss it and give me some advice, OK?
(Show them the sentence pattern on the screen to revise the grammar.
--- You should have your walls painted white.
--- You had better have … done. )
T: Now I will call out some pairs to report their design. which group will give me good suggestions?
S:…
T: Thank you very much! You’re good designers. I’ll decorate my room according to your design.
Step 2. Lead-in
T: Now after I finished decorating the rooms, I moved into my new beautiful house. But what should I do to deal with my old house? Should I pull it down? No, I don’t want to do that. Anyway it’s so lovely a house. Should I let it stand empty? No, not a good idea. I want to give it a second life. What shall I do? Please discuss again in groups and this time give me advice on how to deal with the old house.
S:…
T: Wow, you have so many wonderful ideas! I think I like to change it into a beautiful teahouse and I can rent it to somebody else since I am too busy to run it myself. And thus I can give my old house a second life. Thank you very much! Would you like to come in and have a cup of tea in my teahouse some day?
Step 3. Fast reading on “ Factory 798 ”
T: Thank you for your ideas to give my old house a second life. And the same story goes with another old factory which is no longer used in Beijing. It is the famous place called “Factory 798”. Has anybody ever heard of that? If no, let’s open our books and read the passage on Page 23. Try to find out: “What is Factory 798? ” I will give you 2 minutes.
(a few minutes later. )
T: Who has found out the answer?
S: → an old army factory ; an arts centre;
Step 4. Listening and reading
T: Now, let’s listen to the tape and get a better understanding of the text. Please follow the tape in a low voice and pay attention to the pronunciation of the new words and phrases which you’re not sure of. At the same time, please try to find out the following new language points in the text and see how much you can understand them in English.
( Show the language points on the screen. )
1. pull down
2. stand
3. with… aid
4. remind … of
5. set aside
Step 5. Careful reading
T: Now let’s get some detailed information about Factory 798. Please read the second paragraph of the passage carefully again and find out:
Q1:What was Factory 798 like?
→ huge factory halls of bricks
→ small round windows that remind you of ships
→ bent roofs
→ 20-foot high walls of glass
Q2:When was Factory 798 built?
--- We’ve known that Factory 798 was built in 1950s.
Q3:As time went by and things developed, what happened to it then?
→ no longer used/ needed
→ stood empty
Q4: What has happened to it now?
→ turned into an arts center
Q5:Why was Factory 798 welcomed by painters, music bands, artists and musicians?
(Check the answers with Ss one by one, explain the language points meanwhile. Explain some difficult sentences in the text at the same time)
Step 6. Retelling
T: Now it’s time for you to read the text by yourselves and try to summarize the text. That is to say, suppose you are a journalist from CCTV 9 and you’ve just paid a visit to the famous Factory 798. Please make a TV program to introduce Factory 798 to our citizens in your own words. I’ll give you three minutes to read through the text by yourselves and get prepared for the retelling, OK?
S: …
Step 7. Discussion
T: In almost every city around the world, there are old buildings which are no longer used, such as schools, hospitals, factories or even churches. What do you think people should do with them? Why?
S1: To pull down the old buildings and set up new modern ones to keep up with the pace of the society.
S2: New uses should be given to old special buildings. It’s a great way to save the architecture from the past.
Step 8. Homework.
1. Finish the program about Factory 798 as a TV reporter.
2. Make your plan about how to reuse our old school buildings.
Period 1：Warming up, Speaking & Listening
Step 1. Greetings and warming-up
Greet the students as usual.
Ask the Ss to talk about their hometown and their houses.
Qs: where are you from, a city or a small town?
Can you describe the buildings in your hometown?
What kind of buildings do you live in, a traditional house or an apartment?
Show students two pictures, a tall building and a traditional yard.
T: what can you see in the two pictures?
What is the difference between them?
(When the Ss describe the pictures, remind the students to think about the differences in the two pictures. The students may have different opinions. Encourage them to think out reasons as many as possible. They may have a discussion.)
Suggested answers:
Block of flats Traditional house
Modern.
Convenient.
The rooms are big.
Every flat has a toilet and bathroom.
Not much contact with their neighbors.
People often feel lonely.
Flat roof.
…
Old-style.
The rooms are small.
Sometimes no toilet or bathroom.
Life is much more interesting. Neighbors get on well with each other. People can grow flowers in the yard.
The roof is sloping.(why?)
…
In which house would you prefer to live? Why?
S: I like living in ….because….
I prefer living…
I’d rather live…
The students should tell others their reasons to support their choices. For example, living in the small house makes me feel warm. I like making friends with my neighbors. It looks like a big family. Encourage them to express their ideas freely.
T: Buildings in the different places are different. So what words and phrases do you think will be useful when you want to talk about art and architecture?
Show the students some different kinds of houses , ask them to describe them.
Collect their answers.( appearance: high, low, great, The palaces were large and beautiful, and they often looked like something out of a fairy tale.；materials: brick, stone, steel ,glass, wood…)
T: If you were free to design your own dream house, what would that house look like? What materials would you use? Explain why you made certain choices about your dream house?
Architect: one who designs the construction of buildings or other large structures.
Give the students enough time to discuss the question. Collect their answers.
Step 2 Speaking
Books open, page 18. Ask the students to listen to the sample dialogue and follow the tape. Study the useful expressions. Remind them to learn the structure how to express their preferences.
Practice. Ask them to look at the pictures and choose the item they prefer. Try to explain the reasons.
Two tasks: One is to talk about traditional and classical furniture. And the second task is choosing a picture to decorate their room.
T: In your dream houses, are there any chairs?
(Show some chairs) which one do you like? Why?
When they answer the question, encourage them to use expressions in the following table. A moment later, ask them to act out their own dialogue.
Sample dialogue:
A: which do you like better, classical chairs or modern chairs?
B: I prefer modern chairs.
A: Why?
B: In my opinion, modern chairs are lighter and more colorful. They are comfortable.
A:…
Step 3 : Preparation for listening
T: You have already designed your own dream house , it is time to buy some furniture. What kind of furniture will you buy? And why do you prefer them?
Have a short discussion in pairs. You can introduce names of furniture, such as heater, air-conditioner and so on.
Step 4. Listening.
Books open, Page 18, listening part. It is a talk between a young married couple, Danny and Amy and a shop assistant.. They want to buy some furniture for their new house. Ask the students to go though the exercises and make sure what to do.
Play the tape twice for the students to listen and finish the exercises by themselves. They may check the answers in pairs.
Then play it a third time for the students to check their answers. Check them with the whole class in the end.
Step 5.Homework
1.Decorate your bedroom and classroom. And talk about your decoration.
2.Find out about the history of art and architecture, names of artists and architects, famous buildings and works of art in the world as much as possible. Share the ideas with others.
Period 2&3: Reading
Step1: Pre-reading
----Enjoy pictures of both modern architecture and classical architecture
1. Greetings
T: We’ve really had a wonderful tour around the world last time, seeing the marvelous architecture home and abroad, modern and classical. I hope you enjoy that… but I wonder if all of you can recognize some of the most famous architecture.
2.Brainstorming or guessing game
---Name the pictures: Sydney House; the Eiffel Tower; the Temple of Heaven…
Q: Among all of these pictures, which ones are different from others? Or you may say which ones belong to modern architecture.
SS: …
Q: How do you know which ones belong to modern architecture? What’s the difference between modern architecture and classical (ancient) architecture?
SS: …
T: If you want to know more and to enjoy the beauty of modern architecture, you’d better join us, as we are going to have a new journey, the journey to the world of modern architecture.
Step2: While-reading
1. Fast- reading
----Find the difference between modern architecture and classical architecture in the text.
Q: what’s the difference between modern architecture and classical architecture?
Difference
Modern architecture Classical architecture
Materials Steel, iron, glass… Stone, brick, wood…
Characteristics Huge; like boxes; unfriendly Beautiful, closer to nature
Q: What kind of materials is used? What other materials do you know?
Q: What’s the characteristic? How do people feel towards modern architecture?
2. Careful-reading
----Find out the information according to the key words
Modern architecture
Q1: When was modernism invented? -----1920s
Q2: How many architects are there in the text? ---Antonio Gaudi/ Wright
Q3: Where were they from? ----Spanish/ American architect
Q4: What did Gaudi want to be used in his works? What’s the characteristic of his architecture? How is his architecture like?
----Natural materials/ like a dream, full of fantastic colors and shapes.
Q5: What inspired Wright? ----Japanese seashells
Q6: How many examples are there in the text?
----The Opera House/ the new Olympic Stadium
Q7: How do they look like? ----Seashell/ nest
Q8: Why do we call the Olympic Stadium in Beijing” the Bird’s nest”?
Q9: What do they (two architects / two examples) have in common? ---Nature
3. Listening
----While listening, pay attention to the key points in the text.
Step3. Post-reading
1. Task 1: Interview (group work)
2. Task2: Design (group work)
--- Design the architecture of a new school.
---Report four elements: what kind of materials is used? / Why do you design in this way? / How do the architecture look like? / What’s the style?
Step4. Homework
1. Exchange designs with your classmates and exhibit them.
2. Report what you have learned about modern architecture next time.
Period 4: Language study
Step 1, Lead-in
T: Hello, everybody, yesterday we have seen a lot of wonderful modern architectures and got to know some famous architects. Today I’d like to introduce you one of my friends. He is an architect. Who can tell me the meaning of “architect”. (a person who designs buildings). He lived in this house when he was young. Do you think this house beautiful or not beautiful? (not beautiful) Can you use another word to replace “not beautiful”. (ugly). So when he became an architect, he designed some pretty houses. Not long ago he designed a new house for me. Let’s go and see my new house.
Step 2, Vocabulary
T: Welcome to my new house. Could you say something about my new home?
T: I’m not alone here, because I have two neighbors. Do you know who are they and where they live? (nest, dog house)
T: Let’s learn some new words of house.
(balcony concrete nest brick roof)
Try to remember these new words, then fill in the blanks.
an area with a wall or bars around it, joined to the outside wall of a building ________________.
A strong construction material which is a mixture of stone, and sand and water _________________
a shelter made by a bird to hold its eggs and young ____________
the structure on the top of a building to keep the rain out_________
Step 3, Word Study
T: Can you tell me which is the most ancient building in my yard? (nest)
A nest is to a bird what a house to a man.
Who can tell me the meaning of this sentence?
(鸟剿和鸟的关系就和房子和人的关系一样)
T: Good. Let’s try another one
Water is to fish what air is to men.
(水和鱼的关系就于空气和人的关系一样)
T: Well done. These two sentences have something in common-they are using the same sentence pattern. What is it?
→A is to B what C is to D
T: Very good. Now I will show you more pictures, you should find out the relationship between these pictures, and create sentences using the above pattern.
Fur is to a fox what the_____is to a banana.
____are to a house what words are to a text.
An architect is to____________what a painter is to art.
A___is to a boat what an engine is to a car.
A____is to a fisherman what a gun is to a hunter.
Arms are to the body what_______are to a tree.
Step 4, Grammar
T: I’m very glad that you like my new home. Our new school is far away from the downtown, so a new market is build near our school. I’ll guide you to the market to see what you can do there.
show the Ss the picture and ask them to describe it.
--What can you see in the market?
--Let’s see what can we do here?
Give examples: I can have my hair cut here.
I can have my bike mended.
Ask the Ss to make similar sentences.
T: in all these sentences we use a sentence pattern-“have something done”.
Now let’s see the pairs of sentences, and compare A and B.
A: I can have my bike mended
B: I can have the car waiting for me.
A: I found myself tied to a tree.
B: I found myself walking in a forest.
Watch more sentences on page 22.
Examine all the sentences carefully, and find out when we use –ing form and when we use –ed form.
→ passive voice: -ed
active voice: -ing
Look at the pictures, can you find out another difference between –ing form and –ed form.
Let’s do some exercises.
Matching
Did you find the city done?
When will he ever get the work greatly changed?
She can’t make herself called.
Next week I’ll have my bedroom understood.
You’ve got to keep the door locked.
I got the watch repaired.
She heard her name decorated
Completing
I don’t want any bad words____(say) about him behind his back.
Please get the work____(do) as soon as possible.
I’ll have the materials_____(send) to you next Monday morning.
She won’t have her long and beautiful hair____ (cut) short.
You should make your voice______(hear).
I want you to keep me_________(inform) of how things are going with you.
The rent sounds reasonable. How would you like it________(pay).
At last I succeeded in making myself__________(understand).
We’ll move to the new school, and four people will share one room. There will be a competition on decorating your room. The most beautiful and most special room will he the winner. Now work in groups of four to design your room. Five minutes later the group leaders should give a simple report. And pay attention to use –ed form in your report. Here are some phrases to help you:
Step 5, Homework
1.Workbook page 97, exercises 1-5
2.Workbook page 98, exercises 1-2
Period 5: Integrating skills
Step 1. Revision:
( Talk about new house decoration to revise the grammar: have… done)
--- Dear class, I’m especially happy these days, because I’ve just bought a new house. It’s very beautiful. Look, here it is. I want to share my happiness with you. So would you like to help me design my house? How should I decorate my room? Please discuss it and give me some advice, OK?
--- You should have your walls painted white.
--- You had better have … done.
A few minutes later, call out some pairs to report their design. >
--- Ok, which group will give me good suggestions?
--- Thank you very much! You’re good designers. I’ll decorate my room according to your design.
Step 2. Lead-in
( Talk about how to deal with the old house.)
--- Now after I finished decorating the rooms, I moved into my new beautiful house. But what should I do to deal with my old house? Should I pull it down? No, I don’t want to do that. Anyway it’s so lovely a house. Should I let it stand empty? No, not a good idea. I want to give it a second life. What shall I do? Please discuss again in groups and this time give me advice on how to deal with the old house.
< Ss discuss and give advice. >
--- Wow, you have so many wonderful ideas! I think I like to change it into a beautiful teahouse and I can rent it to somebody else since I am too busy to run it myself. And thus I can give my old house a second life. Thank you very much! Would you like to come in and have a cup of tea in my teahouse some day?
Step 3. Fast reading on “ Factory 798 ”
--- Thank you for your ideas to give my old house a second life. And the same story goes with another old factory which is no longer used in Beijing. It is the famous place called “Factory 798”. Has anybody ever heard of that? If no, let’s open our books and read the passage on Page 23. Try to find out: “What is Factory 798? ”
< Ss fast reading for a few minutes. >
--- Who has found out the answer?
→ an old army factory ; an arts centre;
Step 4. Careful reading
--- Now let’s get some detailed information about Factory 798. Please read the second paragraph of the passage carefully again and find out:
--- What was Factory 798 like?
→ huge factory halls of bricks
→ small round windows that remind you of ships
→ bent roofs
→ 20-foot high walls of glass
More questions on the screen to guide the reading:
1. When was Factory 798 built? Who designed it? Who built it?
2. Why is it very different from Chinese architecture?
--- We’ve known that Factory 798 was built in 1950s. As time went by and things developed, what happened to it then?
→ no longer used/ needed
→ stood empty
--- What has happened to it now?
→ turned into an arts center
More questions:
3. How did Factory 798 turn into an arts center?
4. Why was Factory 798 welcomed by painters, music bands, artists and musicians?
Step 5. Listening and reading
--- Now, let’s listen to the tape and get a better understanding of the text. Please follow the tape in a low voice and pay attention to the pronunciation of the new words and phrases which you’re not sure of. At the same time, please try to find out the following new language points in the text and see how much you can understand them in English.
< Show the language points on the screen. >
1. pull down
2. stand
3. with… aid
4. remind … of
5. set aside
Step 6. Retelling
--- Now it’s time for you to read the text by yourselves and try to summarize the text. That is to say, suppose you are a journalist from CCTV 9 and you’ve just paid a visit to the famous Factory 798. Please make a TV program to introduce Factory 798 to our citizens in your own words. I’ll give you three minutes to read through the text by yourselves and get prepared for the retelling, OK?
Step 7. Discussion
--- In almost every city around the world, there are old buildings which are no longer used, such as schools, hospitals, factories or even churches. What do you think people should do with them? Why?
→To pull down the old buildings and set up new modern ones to keep up with the pace of the society.
→New uses should be given to old special buildings. It’s a great way to save the architecture from the past.
Step 8. Writing.
--- Since we all agree that giving the old special buildings new uses is a great way to save the architecture from the past, now it’s time for you to have a practice and show your ability. You know our school is moving to the new campus now and the old campus will be left empty then. Suppose you are young painters, artists, musicians, and you can rent some parts of the school building to practice. How do you want to change the school buildings? What new uses can be given to the old school buildings? Please work in groups and make a plan about it.
Step 9. Homework.
1. Finish the program about Factory 798 as a TV reporter.
2. Finish your plan about how to reuse our old school buildings.
In this unit you have learnt about art and architecture. How comfortable do you feel doing each of the skills below?
The things I can do Evaluation
I can understand and read about art and architecture. 5 4 3 2 1
I can describe buildings and works of art. 5 4 3 2 1
I can tell the differences between traditional architecture and modern architecture. 5 4 3 2 1
I can express my preferences in English. 5 4 3 2 1
I can draw and talk about floor plans of a building. 5 4 3 2 1
I can use the past participle as the object complement. 5 4 3 2 1
I can remember and use the new words and expressions in new situations. 5 4 3 2 1
1. 拯救地球 save the earth
2. 地球面临的最大问题是什么？
What is the biggest problem facing the earth?
3. 一个有价值的资源 a valuable resource
4. 造成严重的污染 cause serious pollution
5. 讨论该问题 discuss the issue
6. 烧煤 burn the coal
7. 用一个比较好的方式 in a better way
8. 做笔记 take notes of…
9. 得出结论 draw a conclusion
10. 支持/反对 be for/ against
11. 交换意见 share ideas
12. 取得进步 make much progress
13. 主题 main theme
14. 可持续发展 sustainable development
15. 谈论 speak about/ of
16. 在不破坏环境的情况
without damaging the environment
17. 出席国际会议
attend the international conference
18. 做了一个很重要的演讲
make a very important speech
19. 根据世卫组织的意思
according to the World Health Organization
20. 愿意做某事 be willing to do
21. 参加活动 take part in
22. 自由利用 have free access to
23. 与。。。和谐 in harmony with
24. 结束死亡和苦难
put an end to the death and suffering
25. 擦干净 wipe out
26. 对。。。有影响 have an effect on
27. 劝说某人做某事 advise sb to do
28. 尽所能去做某事 do whatever one can to do
29. 在农村地区 in rural areas
30. 采取行动 take action
31. 采取措施 take measures to do
32. 有大的成效/有所不同 make a difference
33. 空调 air conditioner
34. 改变现状 improve the situation
35. 对。。。有更好的了解
have a better understanding of
36. 对。。。掌握；熟悉 have a good knowledge of
37. 找到解决办法 find solution to the problem
38. 教育是未来的关键
Education is the key to the future
39. 上学 attend school
40. 对学习满意 be content/satisfied with
41. 偶然 by chance
42. 充分利用时间 make full use of time
43. 以。。。的速度 at a speed of
44. 防御 defend oneself against/from
45. 因。。。表扬。。。 praise sb for sth
46. 强调保护水资源的重要性
stress the importance of protecting
the water resources
47. 对。。。负责 be responsible for
48. 刚。。。就。。。 hardly/ barely/ scarcely… when
no sooner…than
49. 照顾；护理 attend to
50. 与某人有共同的信仰/信念
share one’s belief/faith
51. 一个备用轮胎 a spare tire
52. 在空闲时间 in the spare time
53. 递给我一个婚礼请柬
hand me a wedding invitation
54. 加强；增强 build up
55. 消息传开 Word got around.
56. 一位著名的教育专家
a well-known educational expert
57. 有意义；行得通；有道理 make sense
58. 在危险中 at risk/ in danger
59. 与其说。。。不如说 more… than…(分开)
60. 不仅仅 more than （不分开）
61. 面对激烈的竞争 face fierce competition
62. 受益于 benefit from
63. 店员 a shop assistant
64. 受到压力 under pressure
65. 带某人参观 show sb around sp
66. 展览 on show
67. 名胜古迹
a place of interest/ places of interest
68. 过得高兴 have a wonderful time
69. 为你的观点辩护 defend your argument
70. 插嘴 cut in / break in
71. 插队 jump the queue
72. 令我惊讶的是 to my surprise
73. 收到某人的来信 hear from sb
74. 找出, 发现, 查明(真相等), 认识到, 想出, 揭发 find out
75. 别无选择只能 have no alternative but to do
Unit 9
1 attend vt.出席参加; 上(学, 教堂)
attend a meeting [lecture]出席会议[听演讲, 听课]
attend a wedding [a funeral]参加婚礼[葬礼]
attend school [church]上学[教堂]
be well attended出席(听...)...人数很多
be attended by由...陪同; 由...照料
I will attend you to the classroom.我将陪你到教室去。
May good luck attend you!祝你幸运!
vi.出席,参加[(+at)] attend (at) a wedding 出席婚礼
照料,处理[(+to)]
I'll attend to the matter.我来处理此事。
护理;侍候[(+on/upon)]
注意,倾听;致力(于)[(+to)]
She didn't attend to what I was saying.她并不注意听我所说的话
【习惯用语】
attend on 服侍, 照料; 陪, 随从
attend upon 服侍, 照料; 陪, 随从
attend to 倾听, 注意, 留心 ；关心, 照顾, 护理; 办理
2 content a.满足的,满意的;甘愿的[F][(+with)][+to-v]
She seems content to live with him.她似乎很满意与他生活在一起。
He was content with his work.他对自己的工作很满意。
vt.使满足[(+with)]
Her answer seemed to content him.她的回答好像令他满意。
【习惯用语】
be content to do sth. 乐于做某事
be content with 沉迷［满足］于
to one's heart's content 心满意足， 尽情地 I ate to my heart’s content. 我尽情地吃。
content oneself with 满足于， 对...感到满足
3 access 接近,进入;接近的机会,进入的权利;使用[U][(+to)]
access broadcasting
向公众开放的节目播送(电台、电视台开放给少数民族或利益团体传递讯息或做宣传的节目播送)
Only a few people have access to the full facts of the case.只有少数几个人能看到有关该案全部事实的材料。
Citizens may have free accessto the library. 市民可以自由使用图书馆。
通道,入口,门路[C][U][(+to)]
The only access to their house is along that narrow road.只有沿着那条狭窄的路走才能到达他们的房子。
【习惯用语】
be easy [hard, difficult] of access 容易[难]接近
give access to 接见; 准许出入
have [gain, get, obtain] access to 得接近; 得会见; 得进入; 得使用
4 stress
n.压力;紧张;压迫[U][C][(+on)]
Susan was completely weighed down by the stress of examinations.苏珊被考试的压力压垮了。
under the stress of poverty 在贫困的压力下
着重;重要性[U][(+on)]
She lay great stress on proper behavior.她很强调行为端正。
time of stress 危难之际, 非常时期
【语】重音;重读[U][C][(+on)]
In the word ”mother“ the stress is on the first syllable.在”mother“这一字里,重音在第一个音节上。
vt.强调,着重
The English teacher stressed the importance of reading aloud.
英语老师强调了朗读的重要性。
I must stress that we haven't much time. 我必须强调我们没有多少时间了。
用重音读Stress the second syllable.重读第二个音节。
加压力于;使紧张
The weight of snow stressed the roof to the point of collapsing.
雪的重量压得屋顶快要塌了。
【习惯用语】
in the stress of the moment 一时紧张
lay [place, put] stress on 把重点放在...上; 在...上用力
under [driven by] the stress of 为...所迫; 为...所驱使; 处境紧张[困难]
5 responsibility n. 责任, 职责
【习惯用语】
be relieved of one's responsibility [-ties] (被)解除职责
bear responsibility for 对...负有责任
decline all responsibility for 声明对...不负任何责任
on one's own responsibility 自作主张地, 自负全责地
take full responsibility for 对... 负完全 责任
take the responsibility upon oneself 自己承担起责任来
undertake fresh responsibility 担负起新的职责
6 alternative n. 二中择一, 可供选择的办法, 事物抉择；选择余地[the …+of)]
adj. 选择性的, 二中择一的
If you don't like the school lunch, you have the alternative of bringing your own.
要是你不喜欢学校准备的午餐,你可以自己带饭。
What alternatives are there?还有什么可选择的?
选择的自由(或余地)[U]
They had no alternative in the matter.在这件事上,他们没有选择的余地
We have no alternative but to go on. 除了继续下去,我们没有选择的余地。
There was no other alternative but to fight till the victory.
除了战斗直到胜利,别无选择。
【习惯用语】
have no alternative but 除...外别无选择; 只有; 只好
7 affect
vt. 影响, 对...起作用[反应]; 使...感光; 改变; 损[伤]害
The amount of rain affects the growth of crops.雨量影响作物的生长。
感动 ; He was deeply affected by my words. 他听了我的话很受感动。
(病)侵袭;罹患 患(病), 中(暑) be affected by heat [cold] 中暑[着凉]
Her kidneys had become affected.她的肾脏受到了感染。
【参考词汇】
affect effect influence 作为动词, 都含“影响”的意思。
affect 指“产生的影响之大足以引起反应”,着重“影响”的动作, 有时含有“对...产生不利影响”的意思, 如:
This article will affect my thinking. 这篇文章将会影响我的思想。
effect 指“实现”、“达成”,着重“造成”一种特殊的效果, 如:
This book effected a change in my opinion. 这本书使我的看法起了变化。
The reform was effected. 改革实现了。
influence 指“通过说服、举例等对行动、思想、性格等产生不易觉察到的,潜移默化的影响”, 如: Influenced by a high-school biology teacher, he took up the study of medicine.
在一位中学生物教师的影响下, 他从事医学研究。
8 wipe out 扫除；清除掉 ;勾销（债务） ;消灭；毁灭 ;洗雪(耻辱)
to wipe out a whole army 歼灭一个整军
wipe up 揩干（洗净的碟盘） ;揩干
wipe off 勾销（债务
wipe down 把…擦干净
（常与away, off连用）擦干；揩净
wipe your tears away 擦干你的眼泪
9 issue vt.(1)发行;发布
The post office issued the stamps last week.上星期邮局发行了这些邮票。
(2). 发给,配给[O][(+to)],核发
They issued the soldiers with guns. 他们把枪发给士兵。
(3.) 使流出,放出,排出
vi.(1). 出来[(+forth)](2). 流出[(+from)]
Lava issued from the volcano.熔岩从火山口流出来。
(3). 由...得出,由...产生[(+from)]
His difficulties in his work issue from his lack of experience.
他工作中的困难是由于缺乏经验而引起的。
(4). 发行,颁布,出版
A new coinage issued.一种新硬币发行了。
n.(1). 问题;争论;争议[C]
They have published a lot of new books on international issues.
他们已经出版了很多论述国际问题的新书。
(2). 发行(物);一次发行量;(报刊)期号[C]
There's an article about Jamaica in this issue.
在这一期里有一篇关于牙买加的文章。
【习惯用语】
at issue 在争论中; 不一致, 有分歧; 待裁决的
raise a new issue 提出新论点
take issue against 反对
issue sth.to sb. 把某物发给某人 = issue sb. with sth.
issue from 从...流出[冒出、传出]
join issue (=take issue) with sb on sth争论, 进行辨论
make an issue of sth. 使某事成为有争论的问题
10 advise：可用作动词（vt.＆vi.）。主要义项有：忠告，劝告，建议，通知，商量。
用作动词时的主要搭配形式为：（1）advise+名词/动名词；
Eg. I advise waiting until tomorrow.我建议等到明天。
（2）+sb. to do sth. Eg. I advise you to start at once. 我劝你立刻出发。
（3）+宾语从句Eg. Can you advise me whether I should go abroad?
你能不能指点我该不该出国？
（4）sb. against doing sth.
Eg. I strongly advise you against going abroad.我力劝你不要出国。
（5）sb. on sth.
Eg. He advises us on economic affairs.他给我们提供有关经济事务的建议。
（6）sb.+疑问词+不定式
Eg. He could not advise me what to do next.他无法教我接下来该做什么。
（7）sb. of sth.Eg. Please advise us of the date. 请将日期通知我们。
注意：advise作“通知”讲后跟宾语从句时，用陈述语气；作“建议”讲后跟宾语从句时，用虚拟语气。
Eg. We were advised that they could not accept our offer.
我们获得通知，说他们不能接受我们的提议。
I advised him that he (should) go at once.我劝他应该马上去。
11 face
Unit 10
1 frighten vt. vi. 使惊吓; 惊恐
习惯用语】
be frightened of [口]害怕, 对...感到恐惧
frighten away 吓跑, 吓走
frighten off 吓跑, 吓走
frighten sb. into doing sth. 用恐吓手段迫使某人做[不做]某事
frighten sb. out of doing sth. 用恐吓手段迫使某人做[不做]某事
He was frightened of the fierce dog. 他让这只凶猛的狗吓怕了。
He was frightened at the thought of his huge debts.
他一想到他背负的巨额债务便胆战心惊。
2 urge vt.催促;力劝;激励;怂恿
They urged us to go at once.他们催促我们马上去。
极力主张;强烈要求[(+on)][+that]
urge sth. on [upon] sb. 向某人极力陈述某事
My friends urged that I (should) apply for the job.朋友们力劝我申请那份工作。
The people in that country urged independence.那个国家的人民要求独立。
推进;驱策[ on [onward, forward] 推进; 驱策
We urged the school team on with loud cheers.我们大声助威,激励校队拼搏。
vi. 极力主张;强烈要求
urge against 极力反对
The citizens urged for the construction of a new hospital.市民们强烈要求建造一个新医院。
n.[C]. 强烈的欲望;冲动;迫切的要求
The vacation is coming and I have an urge to travel.假期快到了,我很想外出旅行。
【习惯用语】
urge... into doing [to do] [怂恿]...做
3 board
n. 木板;板,牌子;布告牌;黑板;(棋)盘[C]
He sawed the board in half.他将木板锯成两块。
膳食;伙食[U]We will provide room and board for them.我们将提供他们的食宿。
委员会;理事会;董事会;(政府的)部,局,会
He has recently joined the board of the company.最近加入了该公司的董事会。
舞台;演员的职业[the P]He quit the boards years ago.数年前他就离开了舞台。
vt.. 用木板覆盖(或封闭)[(+up/over)]
He boarded up the windows.他用木板将窗钉上。
上(船、车、飞机等)
The passengers boarded the plane at 9 a.m.旅客们上午九时登上飞机。
包饭;供...膳宿
【习惯用语】
above board 诚实地, 公开地, 光明正大地
All on board! 请大家上车!
go on board 上船; 上飞机, 上火车
go on the boards 当演员
Trade Board 劳资协商会
board in 在寄宿处吃饭
board up 栅木板阻断(道路等) 用木板围住 用木板钉起
across the board 包括所有团体或成员
A wage rise of 10 pounds a week across the board. 全体成员每人每周加薪10镑
go by the board （计划、安排等）失败，落空
sweep the board 赢得一切；几乎全胜
Our team swept the board in the sports games. 我们代表队在运动会中大获全胜。
4 live through：度过, 经受过
Eg. They lived through the Second World War.他们经历过第二次世界大战。
相关归纳：（1）get through 做/办/看完；通过/让通过；接通电话
Eg. I will be with you as soon as I get through this work.我一做好这项工作就到你这儿来。
I got through the book in one evening.我一个晚上就看完了这本书。
（2）go through 审阅；检查；讨论；查看；看一遍；经历（困难、痛苦等），经过（阶段等）Eg. I’d like to have you go through the book.我想让你审阅一下这本书。
Most families went through a lot during the war.大多数家庭在战争期间经历了很多的苦。
5 on end：竖着, 连续地
Eg. He stood the box on end.他把箱子竖立起来。
It snowed for three days on end. 一连下了三天雪。
相关归纳：（1）at the end 结束；尽头
Eg. She was at the end of the patience. 她已忍无可忍。
（2）in the end 最后；终于
Eg. He tired again and again and succeeded in the end.他一试再试，终于成功了。
（3）put an end to 结束；停止
Eg. Let’s put an end to this quarrel. 我们结束这场争吵吧。
（4）come to an end完毕；终止；结束
Eg. The meeting came to an end early. 会议很早结束。
注意：end构成的词组中不定冠词、定冠词、零冠词的使用
6 at hand：在手边, 在附近, 即将到来
Eg. I always keep the handbook at hand.我总是把那本手册放在手边。
Final examinations are at hand. 期末考试快到了。
相关归纳：（1）by hand 用手
She did all the sewing by hand.她用手工做了所有的缝纫工作。
（2）in hand 所有；在控制下；已经着手；正在考虑中
I have only $50 in hand.我手头只有50美元。
Let’s finish the work in hand. 我们把手头的工作完成吧。
（3）on hand 在近处；出席；迫近
They have some new goods on hand.他们有一些新货。
He advised me to be on hand.他劝我出席。
A change may be on hand.一项改变可能已经迫近。
注意：以上由hand构成的词组hand前不用冠词。
Unit 7
1 via prep. 经由，途经
to travel from Beijing to Shanghai via Tianjin 由北京经由天津去上海
通过；凭藉
I sent a message to Mary via her brother. 我托玛丽的兄弟把信带给她。
2 persuade：主要用作及物动词。主要有两个义项：说服；使相信。主要搭配形式为：persuade sb. to do sth.；
Eg. She tried to persuade him to change his mind.她试图劝他改变主意。
persuade sb. into doing sth.；persuade sb. out of doing sth.；
Eg. Can you persuade her into/out of wearing that dress?你能劝她穿（不穿）那件衣服吗？
persuade sb. that-clause。（常与of, that连用）使相信
Eg. I couldn’t persuade him that she was a thief.我无法使他相信她是个小偷。
How can I persuade you of my sincerity?我怎样才能使你相信我的诚意呢?
We worked hard to persuade them that we were genuinely interested in the project.
我们想尽办法以使他们相信我们确实对这一计划感兴趣。
注意：persuade sb. to do sth.意为“说服某人做某事”，强调结果；而advise sb. to do sth.和try to persuade sb. to do sth.意为“劝某人做某事”，强调动作。
3 lack：可用作动词（vi.＆vt.）和名词。主要义项有：缺乏，不足；不足之物，欠缺之物。
注意：lack用作名词时常与介词of连用，用作动词常与介词for连用。
Eg. We have no lack of food. 我们不缺乏食物。
It was lack of current capital that defeated their business. ”因为缺少流动资本,他们的企业才告失败。“
Owing to lack of time, we cannot do more than what we have done.
由于时间不够，我们只能做到这样。
vt. 缺乏；不足；没有
He lacks courage. 他缺乏勇气。
Their actions lack consistency; they say one thing and do another.
”他们言行不一,说的是一回事,做的又是另一回事。“
短少；不足；需要
Something is lacking. 缺少点什么东西。
Is she lacking in courage? 她缺乏勇气吗?
They did not lack for money.他们并不缺钱。
【习惯用语】
For by from through lack of 因缺乏...; 因无...
supply the lack 补缺
be lacking in 在...缺少[不足]
no lack of 不缺乏, 很多
lack (for)…缺乏
4 infect vt.
传染；使感染Be infected with cholera被传染上霍乱
One of the boys in the class had a fever and he soon infected other children.
班上的一个孩子发烧了，不久他就传染上了其他孩子。
”If your eyes are infected, you must go to an oculist.“
”如果你的眼睛受到感染,就要去看眼科医生。“
感染；影响
Mary's high spirits infected all the girls in the class.玛丽振奋的精神感染了班上所有的女孩子。
be infected with感染, 沾染上
infector n.传播者, 传染者
infectious adj.有传染性的, 易传染的, 有感染力的
”Colds are infectious, and so are some eye diseases.“”感冒是传染的,有些眼病也是传染的。“
an infectious laugh有感染力的笑声
infectious water带菌水
vi.受感染
I didn't pay any attention to it because I never infect.
我对这事毫不注意, 因为我从来 未受感染。
5 deadly adj.-lier, -liest
致命的
Fog is the sailor's deadly enemy.雾是航海者最致命的敌人。
势不两立的， 殊死的
极度的，非常的deadly haste至急
死一般的a dead paleness如死人般的苍白
adv.如死一般地;极度地；非常地
deadly dull极为枯燥无味
6 cheer n. 欢呼,喝彩[C]
A cheer arose from the crowd when the president appeared.
当总统露面时,人群中发出了欢呼声。
振奋,高兴;鼓励,激励[U]
The doctor spoke words of cheer to the sick child.
医生向病孩说了一些鼓励的话。
He's always full of cheer at Christmas.圣诞节他总是兴致勃勃。
vt., vi.欢呼；喝采
The good news of our football team winning the game cheered up everybody who heard it.
我们足球队获胜的喜讯使每一个听到的人都感到高兴。
Cheer up! The news isn't too bad.振作起来吧!消息还不算太坏。
（常与on连用）以欢呼声激励；为…加油
The crowd cheered their favourite team on.观众为自己支持的球队欢呼加油。
Cheer int.干杯
What cheer with you?近况如何?近来心情好否?
with good cheer高高兴兴地; 欢乐地; 心甘情愿地
cheer up(用话)鼓舞(某人);高兴起来, 振奋起来;打起精神来! 别灰心!
7 discourage vt.-aged, -aging
使丧失勇气；使气馁； 使沮丧
Don't let one failure discourage you, try again.不要因为一次失败就气馁，再试一试看。
”If you meet with any difficulty in your study, don't be discouraged.“
”如果你学习中遇到什么困难,不要灰心。“
试图阻止；阻拦；劝阻
The school teachers discourage smoking.学校老师不赞成吸烟。
His parents discouraged him from joining the airforce.他的父母亲劝他不要参加空军。
Inflation discourages saving.通货膨胀阻碍储蓄的积累。
discourage from阻止[妨碍, 不鼓励]做...; 使失信心
encourage vt.鼓励, 激励, 怂恿;赞助, 促进, 助长
encourage sb. to do sth.鼓励某人(做某事)
be encouraged by受...鼓励[鼓舞]
8 identify vt. -fied, -fying
认出；识别；鉴定
I identified the jacket at once; it was my brother's.”我立即认出了那件外套,它是我兄弟的。
identify handwriting鉴定笔迹
（与with连用）认为同一
He identifies beauty with goodness.他认为美与善是一致的。
（与with连用）与…有关系
That politician is too closely identified with the former government to become a minister in ours.“那位政客被认为与上届政府关系过于密切,不能成为本届政府里的部长。”
（常与with连用）同情；理解
She identified with foreign workers.她同情并理解外籍工人。
identify oneself with支持; 参与; 与....密切结合; 和....打成一片
9 for the moment：暂时, 目前
Eg. I have nothing to do for the moment. 我目前没事做。
Stop the discussion for the moment. 请暂停讨论。
at any moment随时; 在任何时候; 马上
at moments时刻, 常常
at the last [critical] moment在最后关头
at the moment此刻; (正当)那时
every moment时时刻刻
for a moment片刻
in a moment一会儿, 不久; 立即, 马上
in one's extreme [last] moment在临终时刻
not [never] for a moment决不; 从来没有
of great moment关系重大的 matter of great moment重大事件
of no moment不重要的, 无足轻重的
the moment立刻, 马上; 刚才
to the (very) moment及时, 准时, 不差片刻
10 contrary adj.（常与to连用）别扭的；格格不入的；固执的; 相反的；相对的
Mrs. Smith is too contrary to make friends easily.史密斯太太过于固执而不易交朋友。
contrary opinions相反的意见
n.-ries（前面与the连用）相反；反面；对立面
‘You must be tired.’ ‘On the contrary, I feel wide awake.’“你一定很累了。”“相反, 我感觉很清醒。”
Contrary adv.（常与to连用） 相反地；相对地
He passed the examination, contrary to what I expected.他考试及格了，和我预料的情况相反。
Contrary to all advice he gave up his job and left for the south.“他不听任何劝告,放弃了工作,去了南方。”
be contrary to与...相反
by -ries相反地； 出乎预料地
Many things in our lives go by contraries.在我们的生活当中，许多事情与预期相反。
on the contrary(与此)相反， (不是...)而是， 反之
quite the contrary恰恰相反
just the contrary恰恰相反
to the contrary反对地， 与此相反地， 有相反情况
He produced no evidence to the contrary.他没有拿出相反的证据。
11 live with忍受
“I don't enjoy the pain, but I can live with it.”“我虽然不以疼痛为乐,但还可以忍受。”
live adj.活的, 生动的, 精力充沛的, 实况转播的, 点燃的
vi.活着, 生活, 居住
vt.过着, 度过, 经历
None of the others have lived my experiences.其他人没有一个经历过我的这些遭遇。
adv.以实况地
live down悔过自新使人忘掉
He was drunk at school--he'll never live it down.“他上学时喝醉过 - 他怎么改,人们也忘不了。”
live for为…而活着
live up to真正做到，生活得无愧于
We will live up to what our parents expect of us.我们决不辜负父母亲对我们的期望。
Did the TV play live up to your expectations?这部电视剧有你期望的那样好吗?
（与on, off连用）靠…生活
The minority in the primitive forest used to live on a diet of wild animals.
原始森林里的少数民族过去用野兽作为主食。
I live off the money from my first book.我靠我第一本书赚的钱生活。
Unit 8
1 aid n.帮助；援助
first aid急救
帮助者；有帮助的事物
An English-Chinese Dictionary is an important aid in learning the English.
一本英汉词典是学习英语的重要工具。
Vtvi .帮助；援助
I aided him with money.我资助了他。
They aided in solving the problem.他们帮忙解决这个问题。
by the aid of借助于, 通过...的帮助
with the aid of借助于, 通过...的帮助
come to sb.'s aid前来[去]援助某人
in aid of用以援助...; 作为援助...之用
2 recommend
vt. 推荐；推举
Can you recommend a good dictionary?你能介绍一本好词典吗？
劝告；忠告 [O2][+v-ing][+that]
I recommend you to comply with safety regulations.我劝你遵守安全规则。
I recommend you to wait.我劝你等一等。
（与to连用）交付；托付
The dying man recommended his soul to God.这垂危病人把灵魂交付上帝。
recommend a child to sb.把小孩子托给某人照管
3 witness cn.(=eyewitness)目击者; (在法庭上经过宣誓的)证人 [(+of/to)]
Un [主要用于give witness, bear witness]证据, 证明; 证词+to)]
a witness of the accident事件的目击者
She gave witness on behalf of the accused person.她替被告作证。
vt., vi.亲眼看见，目睹
He witnessed the accident.他亲眼看见那个意外事故。
（常与for, againt,to连用）作证；连署
None could witness that he was present.没有人能证明他在场。
witness against [for] the accused证明被告有罪[无罪]
He witnessed to the facts.他为事实作证 。
表示；表明
His tears witnessed the shame he felt.他的眼泪说明他感到羞愧。
bear false witness against sb.作对某人不利的伪证
bear witness to构成...的证据;为...作证, 证明
call... to witness请...证明; 传...做证人
give witness on behalf of sb.为某人作证
in witness of作为...的证明, 为...作证
4 silent, quiet, still, calm, noiseless
silent主要指人“沉默的,不出声的”，但不一定无活动。
quiet意为“安静的,宁静的”，指人时表示生性安静，不易激动；用于自然环境时，指没有干扰活动、没有喧闹声的寂静状态。
still意为“安静的，不动的”，不指心理状态，指环境和人“静的，静止的”状态。
calm意为“镇静的，平静的”，主要指人“沉着镇定”，指自然界“无风无浪”。
noiseless意为“声音很轻的，无声的”,常用来形容机器。
Exercises:（1）This is a ______ typewriter.
（2）In order not to lose the job, he kept _____ about the matter.
（3）It is a ______ place；I enjoy living here.
（4）Mary is a ______ girl.
（5）He remained ______ in face of danger.
（6）Stand ______ while I take a photo of you.
（7）We visited Beijing in ______ weather.
答案：（1）noiseless （2）silent （3）quiet （4）quiet （5）calm （6）still （7）calm
5 panic n.恐慌,惊慌[CU]
Rumours of an imminent earthquake started a panic.谣传即将发生地震引起了一阵恐慌。
feel panic感到惊慌
be in a panic在惊慌中
be seized with a panic惊慌失措
cause a panic引起恐慌
a.恐慌的;起于恐慌的 a panic fear莫明其妙的恐慌
vt.使恐慌（常与into连用）
The idea might panic the investors.这个想法可能会使投资者惶恐不安。
The banks were panicked into selling dollars.银行惊恐地抛售美元。
vi.十分惊慌[(+at/over)]
“Don't panic, boys; there's no danger.”“不要慌,孩子们;没有危险。”
6 Respond vi.作答,回答[(+to)]
Has she responded to your letter?她有没有回过你的信?
作出反应;响应[(+to/by/with)]
The government has responded to pressure and dropped the proposal.
政府已在压力下放弃了这一建议。
(对治疗等)有良好反应;(对操纵等)作出灵敏反应[(+to)]
The patient is responding well to treatment.病人对治疗反应良好。
Response n.回答, 响应, 反应
in response to响应, 反应
make no response不回答
7 slight adj.轻微的, 微小的
I have a slight headache.我有点轻微的头疼。
a slight difference微小的区别
vt.轻[蔑]视;玩忽, 怠慢
feel slighted感觉受到轻蔑
slight one's work玩忽职守
make slight of轻视
not in the slightest一点不, 完全不
put a slight on [upon] sb.蔑视某人; 慢待[轻视]某人
slight over轻视; 草率从事
8 match vt.Vi
使较量,使比赛[(+against/with)]
Read will be matched against Stone in the semifinal.里德将在半决赛中与斯通较量。
敌得过,比得上[(+for/in)]
His latest film doesn't match his previous ones.他最新的一部影片比不上他以前的一些影片。
These two are well matched in strength.他们俩势均力敌。
和...相配,和...相称
The color of the shirt does not match that of the tie.衬衫的颜色与领带不相配。
The curtains do not match with the decoration.窗帘与室内装璜不相配。
使比较;使成对,使相配[(+with)]
Can you match this fabric?你能找一块和这相配的布吗?
n.比赛, 竞赛;对手; 相似的人[物], 相配的人[物]
You are no match for him.你不是他的对手。
9 catch fire：着火
Eg. The house caught fire. 房子着火了。
相关归纳：（1）（be） on fire着火
Eg. When he arrived, he found the house was still on fire.他到的时候，发现那幢房子还在烧。
（2）make a fire生火
Eg. They made a fire to keep warm. 他们生火取暖。
（3）start/light a fire点火
Eg. They started a fire to be seen by the rescuing team.他们点火好让援救队看见。
（4）put out the fire扑灭大火
Eg. The fire had been put out before the firemen arrived.
消防队员还未赶到大火就被扑灭了。
（5）set...on fire/set fire to纵火，放火烧
Eg. The Japanese set fire to his house.日本人烧了他的家。
注意：fire所构成的短语中定冠词、不定冠词、零冠词的使用。
play with fire玩火；冒险
under fire受到攻击
10 count vt., vi.
点数；数；算to count from 1 to 100从1数到100
计算；清点；总计达…Count these apples.清点一下这些苹果。
认为；视为；看作[(+as/among)]
count it an honor (to do sth.)（把做某事）引以为荣
You should count yourself fortunate in having good health.
你身体健康,这就算幸运了
有价值；重要；有用Every second counts.每一秒钟都很重要。
In sport what really counts is not the winning but the playing.
就运动而言,重要的不是赢,而是参与。
count down倒数计时
count on依靠;指望；期待 (= count upon) count out 〈拳击〉宣告失败
11 free from
v.解除
ph.没有;免于;无...之忧;无...之搀杂
12 upside down adv.颠倒, 混乱
13 roll over(睡时)翻身, 反侧
Period 2 Speaking
北京十八中 宋红靖
Type of lesson: Speaking
Contents: 1. Dialogue on P18
2.Useful expressions on preferences
3.Practice of the useful expressions
Teaching aims : Ss can use the expressions on preferences naturally and correctly.
Key point：Useful expressions on preferences
Teaching aids: computer & tape recorder
Teaching procedures:
Step 1: Warming up:
Show the Ss the following pictures to review what they’ve learnt in the previous lesson and lead in today’s topic------ talking about one’s preferences.
Q: 1. What are they?
2. Which do you prefer?
3. Why? (If the Ss can’t tell the reason , let them read the sample dialogue on P18 to help them .)
Step 2: Useful expressions:
Ss learn the expressions on P19 to enlarge the Ss’ vocabulary about preferences.
I’d rather…
I wouldn’t feel happy if …
I prefer something that…
I’m much more interested in …
I’m not very interested in …
I like seeing something …
In my opinion, …
I don’t get very excited about …
What I like is …
I really prefer …
If you ask me, then …
I can’t stand …
Step 3: Practice & Evaluation:
1. Show the Ss some sample dialogues with blanks for the Ss to fill in with
the suitable expressions above.
Example
1). (Betty came in, tired. Lisa said to her)
Lisa: We are going out to have a walk. What about you?
Betty: _______________________________. I am too tired. I need a rest.
2).----- What would you like to drink, coffee or tea?
------- Either is ok. But ____________________________.
3).------- What kind of music do you like?
------- _________________________.
--------What music don’t you like?
-------__________________________.
2. Give the Ss a situation with different topics and let them practice the dialogue in pairs, using proper expressions on preferences.
Practice:
Suppose you are shopping with your mother / friends / classmates and you have different opinions about clothes , books , pictures , food, …Make up a dialogue with your partner and tell each other what your preference is and why, using proper expressions you’ve learnt in this class.
Clothes Books
Food Pictures
3. When the Ss are acting their dialogue , the rest should listen carefully and take some notes and give them a proper evaluation.
When one group is reporting or acting, the listeners should do the following job.
Content/ topic Expressions used The reason (s)
Evaluation:
Score
Cooperation 5 4 3 2 1
Expressions learnt 5 4 3 2 1
Creative 5 4 3 2 1
Language 5 4 3 2 1
Logical 5 4 3 2 1
Step 4: Homework:
Talk about anything you like with your partner and try to use the expressions on preferences naturally and correctly.
Reading
北京十八中 杨芳
Type of lesson: Reading---Modern Architecture
Teaching Aims:
1. To train the Ss’ reading abilities.
2. To enrich the Ss’ vocabulary on art and architecture.
3. To enable the Ss to get some information about art and architecture and can talk about it .
Key point:
To understand the reading passage and talk about it..
Teaching aids: Computer and tape recorder.
Teaching procedures:
Step I. Pre-reading
1. Ask the Ss some questions with the pictures on the textbook:
Q1: What do these buildings look like?
Q2: What do they have in common?
2. Show the Ss some building pictures.（幻灯片3）
Q1: Are these buildings different in stylematerial…? (Yes..)
Q2: Can you divide them into two kinds? (Modern and traditional.)
Q3: Can you tell the differences between them?
Step II. Reading
1. Scanning
Q1: What is Modernism?
Q2: What are the names of the architects mentioned in the text?
2. Reading for details
Comparing ancient architecture with modern architecture.
(见下页表格).
style Material Feeling Examples
Ancient architecture
Like things we find in nature. Nature does not have any straight lines. Earth, stone, brick, wood and bamboo Natural and beautiful Tailhe Dian
…
Modern architecture Like things we find in nature.
Tradinational materials
Warm and friendly
Gaudi
The Olympic Stadium
Huge, like boxes with flat roofs, sharp
corners and glass walls. Steel, glass, concrete, alnico and plastic
Hard and unfriendly
The Twin Tower
3. Working in pairs and dealing with the difficult sentences.
1). Architect looks at the man-made living environment.
They refused to look at my suggestion.
look at : pay attention to
建筑学做关注的是人造的生活环境。
2). Modernism was invented in the 1920s by a group of architects who wanted to change society with buildings that went against people’s feeling of beauty.
Q1: Who invented the modernism?
Q2: How do they want to change society?
现代主义是20世纪代一群建筑师们创立的，他们想用背离人们审美标准的建筑来改变社会。
3). Frank Lloyd Wright, who built an art museum in New York, found himself inspired by Japanese seashells.
Q: What inspired Frank to build the art museum?
弗兰克设计了纽约的艺术博物馆，是日本的海贝壳激发了他的灵感。
4. Reading the text carefully and analyzing the structure of the text and the main idea. (Let Ss express their opinions .Then the teacher can give them some help.)
Part 1(Para.1): Every great culture in the past had its own ideas expressed in art
and architecture.
Part 2 (Para. 2): How and when modernism came into being.
Part 3 (Para.3---5): The differences between traditional architecture and modern
architecture and some examples of ancient architecture.
Part 4 (Para 6---8) : Examples of famous architects and great buildings that take examples from nature.
Step III. Post-reading
.Ss guessing the names of the architects who designed the buildings on the pictures and telling the reasons with the information provided in the text.(幻灯片10，11)
Step IV. Homework
Describe the 2008 Olympic Games Stadium and your feeling about the design of it.
Design the 2008 Olympic Games Stadium as you wish.
教学目的和要求
课程标准要求掌握的项目
目
标 1．Talking about and architecture
2．Talking about architects and their works
3．Talking about works ofaIt
4．Talking about preferences
词
汇
architecture architect preference design furniture taste sofa honey modem convenient block apartment style old-styled stand passage ugly construct construction steelconcrete impress roof balcony fantastic create seashell sail stadium net nest belong
paint aside rent development
功
能
句
式
偏爱(Preference)
I'd rather… I wouldn't feel happy if…
I prefer something that．．． I’m much more interested in…
I'm not very interested in… I like seeing something．．．
In my opinion… I don't get very excited about…
What I like is… I really prefer…
If Vou ask me．then… I Can't stand…
语
法
过去分词(短语)作宾语补足语
We noticed the mailbag carried onto the train．
Everyone was surprised t0 see the buildings∥nished so soon．
Please keep me informed oj how things are going．
They weFe happy to hear the work alrea匆如.
课文听力
S:Can I help you? what is it you are looking for? Furniture
for the bedroom, the kitchen or the living room?
D: We're looking for a fewthings, but we aren't very sure yet. We bought a new flat, and we already have some furniture, but the new house is so big. We can use a few more things, and perhaps replace some very old pieces.
A: I think we need a kitchen table, one that is large enough to have dinner with five or six people.
S: Very well. Ifyou would like something modern, I suggest you think of something like this. The legs of the table are silver coloured while the table top is made of thick glass. Very beautiful and very easy to clean.
D: Yes, I really like that.
A: No. 1 don't like such cold and hard things. I think a table made of wood would look much nicer. Wood is warm, and makes you feel comfortable.
D: Honey, I knowyou like that, but I'm afraid it'll be too expensive.
S: That's no problem. I can show you some really nice modern tables that look as if they were made of wood.
A: Great! We are also looking for something on the wall. There's a big piece of white wall over the sofa.
S: Were you thinking of a painting or perhaps a poster or something ...
D: Yes. Could you show us something?
S: Something classical?
A: Oh, no. You can show us something modern. I like classical things in the kitchen and the bedroom, but our living room is quite modern, isn't it, Danny?
D: By the way, we are also still looking for two comfortable chairs, something modern and classic at the same time. Would you have anything like that?
S: Oh dear! Oh dear! What do you mean by that?
A: Well, something classic and fine but also cool, you know.
Answers to Exercise 1:
kitchen table, wooden tables
Answers to Exercise 2:
True: 4, 5
Answers to Exercise 3:
1 things, replace, pieces 2 wood, would
3 warm, comfortable 4 wall, sofa
5 something moderm
课后听力
The history of architecture in China and most European countries is very different. As a result, the way people look at art and architecture has also developed along different lines.
Much of China's ancient architecture was constructed of wood. Only the Great Wall and city walls were made of large bricks. Earthquakes have occurred quite often in China's history. Besides that, many temples were destroyed by fire. Sometimes the fires were caused by accident. However, it also happened that emperors would destroy temples and architecture that were built in the past. They wanted to get rid of all architecture that reminded people of the former emperor. After burning the old temples and palaces, the emperor would have everything built new in the style that he preferred. That's why all over China we find many temples that were
rebuilt or restored about 250 to 300 years ago, during the age of Qianlong. Few temples are left over from earlier times.
Much of Europe's ancient architecture is 300 to 1,000 years old. Architects used natural materials, such as stone and brick to construct their buildings. There weren't many earthquakes, and unlike China, European kings would usually not bum the churches and other architecture built before their time. They constructed new buildings in the style they preferred at other places.
Wood is not a very strong material. Weather conditions make repairs necessary and by the end of about-100 years usually every part of a wooden construction has been replaced. So, although the design can be hundreds of years old, every part of the building may have been made less than a hundred years ago. Stone and brick are strong enough to stand the test of time. These materials do not need to be replaced. So when looking at old buildings in Europe, we are actually looking at what was built many centuries ago. While in China the architecture may be old, what we look at is in fact quite new.
语篇领悟
阅读本单元课文，完成下列各题
(Passage 1 )
1. Why did architects in the 1920's want their buildings un-natural?
A. They didn't like traditional architecture style.
B. They wanted to change people's feelings of beauty.
C. They didn't like building materials such as earth,stone, brick and wood.
D. They like buildings materials such as steel, glass and concrete.
2. In what ways is ancient architecture different from mod-ern architecture?
A. materials, shapes B. roofs, corners
C. size, height D. balconies, windows
3. Which of the following belongs to modern architecture?
A. Taihe Dian.
B. The Temple of Heaven.
C. The Opera House is Sydney.
D. The great European Cathedrals.
(Passage 2)
4. Old buildings are pulled down because
A. they are too small
B. they are too old
C. they are of no use any more
D. people don't like them any more
5. Factory 798 was designed by
A. Germans B. Russians
C. Germans and Russians D. Chinese and Russians
6. Which is NoT the benefit for people working in an old
factory building?
A. The rent is low.
B. It is convenient for artists to make large objects.
C. It is fairly quiet there.
D. People can visit there.
主旨大意
7.Which of the following best expresses the main idea of Passage 1 ?
A. Ancient architecture is popular.
B. Modern architecture is popular.
C. Ancient buildings look more beautiful than modern ones.
D. Different times,different styles of architecture.
8. Which of the following best expresses the main idea of Passag2?
A. Factory 798 is of great value in modern times.
B. People should save architecture from the past.
C. People should build more factories like Factory 798.
D. People shouldn't pull down old buildings.
推理判断
9．From Passage 1 we can infer that
A. the writer prefers ancient buildings to modern ones
B. the writer prefers traditional materials to modern ones
C. the writer doesn't like modern architects at all
D. the writer prefers buildings which look nature that look unnature.
10. From Passage 2 we can infer that
A. Factory 798 was out of use for long
B. people rent Factory 798 because of his German building style
C. in many large cities, people build many factories like factory 798
D. old buildings can be only used as art centres
知识点
1． prefer喜欢；偏好；宁愿(后接名词或代词、不定式、动名词、不定式复合结构、接从句)
Which would you prefer , tea or coffee?
茶和咖啡你喜欢哪一种?
I prefer coffee．我更喜欢咖啡。
Jeffenson preferred to go and see in the people．
杰斐逊喜欢到人民中间去调查走访。
Our families preferred going out west to celebrate
American 200 birthday．
我们全家人宁愿去西部旅行庆祝美国200周年庆典。
I prefer you to stay here with me．
我愿意让你和我一起住在这儿。
I prefer that you can phone me as soon as you arrive at your home．
我更愿意你一到家就给我打电话。
l prefer science to languages．
我喜欢理科而不喜欢文科。
I prefer reading to watching TV．
与看电视相比我更喜欢阅读。
He preferred to die rather than give in． 他宁死不屈 =Rather than give in，he preferred to die．
[考题1] (1)Rather than on a crowded bus,
he always prefers _____ bicyele．(全国高考题)
A．ride：ride B．riding；ride
C．ride；to ride D．t0 ride；riding
[解析] 分析句子结构可知，本题考查prefer to do sth．rather than do sth．的句型用法.该结构中可以将rather than do sth．提前至句首以予强调。[答案] C
(2)一Which would you prefer ，tea 0r coffee?
I'm not thirsty．Thanks anyway．
A．better；Neither B．best；Both
C．more；None D．不填；Neinler
[解析]prefer的含义为like doing sth else better，释义中已含有比较级的意味，因此在实际运用中，不再与比较或最高级连用；从答语的“不口渴”，可知，无论是茶还是咖啡，都不想品尝，因此否定两者用neither，而用来否定三者或以上的副词要用none。[答案] D
2．impress压出印记；印上；给……留下印象；强调
He impressed the pot with his seal．
他把他的印记印在罐子上.
The book didnt’impress me at a11．
这本书没有给我留下一点印象。
She impressed me as being very rude．
她给我的印象是十分粗鲁。
He impressed me with the importance of the work．
他让我明白了工作的重要性。
His first speech as president made a strong impression on his audience．他当主席后的第一次演讲给听众留下了深刻的印象。
[考题2] (1)The speech by the mayor of Shanghaii before the final
voting for EXPO 20lO is strongly impressed my memory．
A．t0 B．over C．by D．0n (上海春季高考题)
[解析] 句意表示“上海市的市长为争取世博会的演讲给我留下了极为深刻的印象.”所缺介词与impress组成“给……留下印象”讲，介词用on，为习惯表达。[答案] D
(2)He--a design on cloth．。
A．pressed B．impressed C．put D．placed
[解析] 句意表示“把设计图案印制在布上”，而press表示“按，压”不合题意。C、D两项只表示“放置”，也不合题意.[答案] B
3． creation J1．创造
creature n．生命；生物
Man creates himself.人类创造了他本身。
Shakespeare created many comic characters．
莎士比亚创造了许多喜剧人物。
That would create a wrong impression．
那会造成一个错误的印象。
Her new dress created much excitement．
她的新衣引起了极大兴奋。
[考题3] It is the people who history
A．create B．invent C．discover D．find
[解析] 易排除c、D两项，因为本题不是考查“找寻”的用法，而是考查“创造”。create指从无到有，从粗糙的原料到完美的产品，既可用于具体事物，也可用于抽象的事物；invent指经过研究，实验等手段设计或创造出前所未有的东西，常用于具体的东西。本句话的含义为“创造历史的正是人民大众。”[答案]A
4．fill up填写；斟满；占掉(时间)；淤积
I want you to fill up this form.我要你填这张表。
Fill up the cask with hot water． 请把热水瓶灌满开水。
I filled the room up with furniture. 我把房间装满家具。
The theatre filled up rapidly．剧院很快坐满人。
Ihe gutter has filled up with mud． 沟槽里都是泥。
[考题4]Seeing her lovely daughter running towards her，the young mothers heart tenderness and happiness．
A．was filled 0f B．Was full with
C．Was filled with D．was full by
[解析] 本题考查“充满”的表达，除了用be filled with外，还可以用be full 0f。因为均是习语，所以不可更改两个词组的任何部分。
[答案] C
5.stick贴、粘；插、扎；卡住、陷在……里；伸出；突出，n．棍 子 .手杖
stick to坚持(真理、作法等)；坚持干(某事)
He stuck a needle in my arm． 他把针扎进我的胳膊里。
The key has stuck in the lock．钥匙卡在锁里了。
I stick to what I said/the truth.我坚持我所说的／真理。
[考题5]He had a great idea that one should whatever one had begun．
A．insist on B．stick to C．stick out D．stick with
[解析] 本题既考查了insist on与同义词sitck to的区别，又兼顾了stick out／with的用法。insist on后一般接v一ing形式，表示“坚持做某事”，很少直接接名词或从句。stick out意为“伸出；坚持到底(vi)”，stick with意为“和……在一起；扎／刺”，二者均不符合题意。 [答案]B
6．set aside存储；放在一边；取消(=put away)
Each week he tried to set aside a few dollars 0f his salary．
每周他尽量从薪水中省下几块钱。
My objections were set aside．
我的反对无人理会。
Peter set aside the papers and reached for his cigarettes and matehes．彼得把文件放在一边拿起了火柴。
[考题6] It is wise to have some money for old age．
A．put away B．kept up
C．given away D．1aid out (全国高考题)
[解析] 本题测试具体语境中动词的运用问题。keep up有“保
持下去”之意，give away表示“免费赠送；分发”，lay out表示“花费，使用”，均不符合语境体现出来的“为年老而存钱”。[答案]A
7．share分享；分担；合用；共同具有 n.一份；一份责任、功劳；股票
We need friends to share happiness and sorrow．
我们需要朋友分享幸福，分担悲伤，。
Those chestnuts smeⅡgood．Let’s share them．
那些栗子闻起来真香，咱们一起吃咆。
Everyone in the house shares the bathroom．
这所房子的人合用一个浴室。
We all take an equal share．
我们都分到了均等的一份。
[考题7]Let Harry play with your toys as well，Clare - you must learn to ．
A．support B．care C．spare D．share (高考题)
[解析] support表示“支持；阐述；赡养”，care表示“关怀；在乎”，spare表示“抽出，均出”，均不符合语境所体现的“克劳尔，让亨利一起同你分享玩具玩”。本题考查从具体语境中选择词汇的用法。[答案] D
8．taste的用法
作名词讲时。有“味道；爱好；鉴赏力，品味”等意。
作形容词讲时，有“有吸引力的；经精心挑选”的意思。
作动词讲时，有“尝，品尝”之意。
I don't 1ike the taste 0fthis coffee．
我不喜欢这杯咖啡的味道。
She has developed a taste for modern art．
她渐渐培养出对现代艺术的爱好。
The fumiture Was very tasteful．
家具十分雅致。
Can I taste a piece 0f that cheese t0 see what it’slike?
我可以尝一尝那块干酪的味道吗?
引申：(be)in bad taste指举止言谈粗俗；失当。
Some 0f his comments were in bad taste．
Tasteless akj.庸俗；没味道；不得体
Tasty adj.(tastier，tastiest)美味
have a taste 0f sth．有……的味道
The pudding has a taste 0foranges．那布丁带有橙味
[考题8](1)The oranges taste ________
A．well B．good C．badly D．wonderfully
[解析】 “尝起来”，taste后应跟形容词作表语。[答案] B
(2)Pop music is liked by many poople,but it is not_____everyone's taste．
A．with B．in C．on D．to
[解析] “适合某人的口味”应为短语to one's taste。[答案] D
(3)The cook______the soup．It_______delicious．
A．tasted；tasted B．is tasted；is tasted
C．tasted；was tasted D．i8 tasted；tastes
[解析] 分析句子结构及用法可知，第一空测试taste作为实义动词的用法，含义为“品尝（某食物）”，是个及物动词；第二空因为有句未形容词delicious ，所以taste此时“摇身一变”，变成了连系动词，表示“尝起来”，后接形容词作表语，无被动式。
9．convenient adj．方便。便利的
I’m willing to meet you on any day that is convenient for you．
我乐意在你方便的任何日期与你相见。
[考题9] Come over and have a chat witlI me whenever_______ ．
A．you will be convenient B．it wiU be convenient to you
C．you are convenient D．it is convenient to you
[解析] It is+adj.for sb．／sth．to do sth．为固定词组。类似于
convenient用法的还有necessary、national、important、impossible等等，这些形容词都是用来说明做某些事的特点，因而不可用人作主语，而应用于上述句型当中。[答案]D
10．复合形容词的构成
(1)数词+名词，数词+名词-ed或数词+名词+单数+形容词
a ten-speed bieyele 十速自行车
(2)形容词+名词
a full-timejob 专职工作
(3)名词+现在分词
Englingh-speaking countries 讲英语的国家
(4)形容词+现在分词
an ordinary-looking girl. 相貌一般的女孩
(5)名词+过去分词
a man-made satellite 人造卫星
(6)副词+现在分词
hard-working people 勤劳的人们
(7)副词+过去分词
a well-known doctor 著名医生
[考题10](1)The village is far away from here indeed．It’s_____
walk．
A．a four hour B．a four hour’s
c．a four-hours D．a four hours’(上海高考题)
[解析] “四小时的路程”有两种表达：a four hours’walk和a
four-hour walk。[答案]D
(2)His job is t0 sell the______carvings(雕)in the______ department 0f the company(湖北省部分重点中学联考题)
A．Wooden； sales B．wood；sales
C．Wood；sale D．wooden；sale
[解析]在Wood与carve之间存在动宾关系：所以形成构词法时，用“名词+ V．-ing'’形式，即wood carving；表示“销售”时。作定语要用sales。[答案] B
11．表示“忍受”的三个词(组)
它们是stand、bear与put up with。
He cannot titand criticism．他受不了批评。
It will stand firing up to 1300℃．它可以经受住高达1300度的度。
If I were you I wonldn't put up with his behaviour any 1onger．
如果我是你，我将再也忍受不了他的行为。
I can't bear the pain／my brother／this weather．
我受不了这苦痛／我的弟弟／这种天气。
[考题11] --Mum，it is nice weather．I want to skate this afternoon．(--20海淀区期中练习题)
--Don't you think the ice on the lake is too thin to____your weight?
A．stand B．bear C．catch D．take
[解析] 儿子想去滑冰，母亲担心冰层太薄，承受不住儿子的重量。所缺词表示“承担；承受……重量／负彬东西”等，应用bear。
stand常用于人，指面对痛苦、艰难、侮辱等不畏缩后退，bear指能忍受磨难、冷静地面对现实，强调容忍的能力，常用于口语，常可与put up will连用。[答案] B
12．表示“瞟；望”的三个词组
(1)glance，指“很快地望一望，看一眼”，多与at连用。
He glanced at tlle envelope and reeognized his ather’s handwriting．
他看了一下信封就认出来了他父亲的笔迹。
I glanced around／abou∥round the room．
我向屋子里四处看了看。
(2)stare表示目不转晴地长时间的“注视”；
(3)glare表示怒气冲冲地“盯着”，二者一般都与at连用。
The two fighters glared at eaeh other．
两位斗士恶狠狠地盯着对方。
Robinson stared at the footprints．full 0f fear．
鲁滨逊盯着脚印看，心里充满了恐惧。
[考题12](1)一Do you like________in public?
一I don't think so．It makes me nervous．
A．to be glared B．being stared
C．to be 100ked D．being stared at
[解析] 表示“盯、看”时，后一般要接介词at，所以A、B项排除。c项中的1ook为不及物动词，本身就没有被动式，也被排除。句意为“你喜欢在大庭广众之下被人盯着看吗?”[答案]D
(2)The two men stood____angrily at each other，while the crowd
loeked on with amusement．
A．staring B．daring C．dancing D．seeing
[解析] 三个同义词中，只有glare可以与表示感情的词连用。本题中含有angrily，所以用glare。[答案]B
13．如何“举例子”
take．．．for example举……为一个例子
for example(=for instance)例如
Such as(=like)比如／诸如
and so on等等(进行概括，不一一列举)
Chadie’s early films，such as(=like)City Lights，are well received．
Take Xiao Wang(for example)．举小王为例。
=Take Xiao Wang(for instanee)．
[考题13] There are several people interested in your new plan，
__________Mr Jones and Dr Simpson．
A．that is B．for an example C．1ike D．included
[解析]that is作插入语，含义为“也就是说”，不用来举例子；for example是习惯用法，中间的an因为习惯而要省略；include含义为“包含”，也不用来举例，用来表示附加说明，而且放在名词前面时要用including，放在名词后面时才用included。[答案] c
14．1ook at与1ook after的次常见含义
look at (1)（彻底）检查 (2)考虑，研究
(3) 认为 (4)读；阅读
My tooth aches，I think a dentist shotlld 1ook at it．
我牙痛，想找牙医检查一下。
The government is looking at ways of reducing the number of stray dogs．
政府正研究减少野狗数目的方法。
Different races and nation-alities 1ook at life differendIy．
不同种族和国籍的人对生命都有不同的看法。
look after负责某事物
our neighbours are looking after the garden while
we are away
我们不在家的时候，由邻居照料花园。
[考题14](1)r11le old woman's son_______all her financial affairs．
A．does with B．10eks after C．100ks at D．deals with
[解析]look after有“料理，照料”的意思。题目意思为“这位老妇人的所有财务都由她的儿子打理。”[答案] B
(2)一I felt very bad these days．
-0h，you should_______your body．
A．build up B．1ook at C．think D．take care
[解析]依题意，可知1ook at符合题意，在句中表示“彻底检查”之意。若选D项则加0f。若用build one's body则表示“强身健体”，也不完全符合题意。[答案] B
15．句型A is to B what C is to D的用法
这个句型是用来打比喻的，用已知来比喻未知。它的主句是作者要告诉读者的语义重点(新信息)，而what从句只不过是读者已知的内容(道理)而已。what在这种句型中是关系代词，在语义上相当于that which(the thing which)。what从句在主句中起表语(主语补语)的作用，what在句中也起表语(主语补语)的作用。
The Chinese Communist Parst is to people what fish is to water．
中国共产党对于人民就像鱼对于水
[考题15] Reading is to the mind_______food is to the body．
A．what B．that C．which D．of which (大学生竞赛题)
[解析] 句意为“读书之于头脑正如食物之于身体。”What food is to the body这个从句表达的是读者已知、熟悉的内容，而reading is to the mind才是全句的语义重点。又如：
Furniture is to the living room what playground equipment is to the playground．
家具对于卧室就像体育设施对于操场。[答案]A
16．“充当”的三种表达
act as作“充当；起……作用”。类似用法有 work as．serve as . .
He acted as chairman in my absence．
我不在时，他临时充当主席。
He acted as secretary to the Board．
他担任董事会的秘书一职。
He will serve as mayor．他将任市长一职。
The sofa served as a bed．那张沙发作为床用。
[考题16]_____monitor of our class，little Mike decided to
_____his classmates heart and soul．
A．Serving as；serve B．Serving as；serve as
C．Serving；serve as D．Serving；serve
[解析] 本题要求区别serve与serve as的用法。前者为“为……服务”，后者为“作为…’’。从语境可知，第一空符合后者，第二空符合前者。
[答案]A
17．“不顾”的两种表达
despite作介词，意为“尽管(有某种情况)”。In spite of与其意义及用法完全相同，可以互换。
He came to the meeting despite his serious illness．
尽管他的病很严重，他还是来出席会议了。
Despite advanced years-he is 1earning t0 drive．
尽管有一大把年纪了，他还是开始学起开车来。
In spite of the heavy rain．she went to school as usual．
尽管有大雨，她还像往常一样上学。
[考题17]一You 1ook upset．Anything wrong?
一I failed in the physics exam again___all the efforts I made．
A．in spite of B．because of
C．but for D．as to (20武汉市供题训练题)
[解析] 答语前半句意为“我的物理考试又失败了”，后半句意为
“我作了全部努力”，两句之间存在着让步关系，所以填表示该关系的in spite of，相当于despite。而because of所表示的含义与情理不符，but for引导虚拟语气，也不合题意。As to表示“至于，关于”，被排除。[答案]A
18．“连接”的两种表达
(1)join to作“把……和……连接在一起”。
He joined the two pieces of wood with nails．‘
他用钉子把那两块木板钉起来。
The worker are joining an island to the mainland by a bridge．
工人们正在架桥把一个小岛与大陆连起来。
(2)同义词组为connect…with，强调用中间媒介或一定的手段把两个或多个物体在某一点上连接起来，但彼此较为独立。
Buses and trucks connect the mountain villages with the outside．
公汽与卡车把山村和外界连起来了。
[考题18] (1)A good student must_____what he reads_______what he sees around him．
A．connect；to B．join；to
C．connect；with D．join；with
[解析]本题测试了“把……与……连接起来”的表达，看起来B项与C项均可，但本题并未强调外形结合及连接后的独立性(join的用法)，而是强调“关联；联系”：一个善于学习的学生应该把所学的知识与所见所闻联系起来。答案为C。
(2)Countries all over the world are______with computer．
A．joined B．connected C．taken D．related
[解析] join与relate均与介词to连用。只有be connected with才为正确表达。表示“由……连接”。[答案] B
19．“make+宾语+宾语补足语”的用法
这个结构中的宾语补足语可以用名词、形容词、动词的过去分词、不定式、副词等表示宾语的情况或动作。make带不定式作宾语补足语时，要省略不定式符号，但当make用于被动语态时，不定式符号不能省略。
The Americans elected Bush their President．
美国人民选布什为他们的总统。
We wi11 make our country richer and stronger．
我们将会使我们的国家变得更富强。
He tried to speak clearly to make himself understood．
他尽量说得清楚些以使别人听懂他的话。
Don't make him drink too much．
别让他喝得太多。
[考题19] (1)Little Tom doesn't have to be made_____．He always works hard． (全国高考题)
A．1earn B．to learn C．1earning D．1earned
[解析] 从to be made可知，被动语态中表示动作的不定式符号要恢复。[答案] B
(2)He is made_______monitor of our class．
A．a B．the C．one D．不填
[解析]在“make+宾语+宾补”句型中，如果作宾补的名词是表示独一无二的职位时，该名词前不再加任何冠词；。否则会产生误解与歧义。[答案] D
20．含set的词组小结
set about开始(某工作)；着手做某事
set aside把……放在一边，存储
set down写／记下来(指车辆)停下来让(乘客)下车
set free释放
set off开始，启程
set out从某地出发上路
set up使某人健康／有钱创业等；设置；建立
They've set off on ajourney round the world．
他们已经开始环游世界。
The government has set up a working party to 1ook into the problem of drug abuse．
政府已成立工作组调查滥用毒品问题。
[考题20] (1)The company has______a new braneh in wales．
A．took up B．changed C．set up D．set out
[解析]A选项通常指“从事”，如“take up doing sth.”而B、D两项与句意不符。[答案] C
(2)It is time for supper now．Please______your books aside so that.we can use the table for supper．
A．take B bring C．set D．carry
[解析]set．．．aside表示“把……放在一边，收起来”，符合语境“把书收起来以便吃晚饭”。[答案] c
21．过去分词作宾语补足语的学习
(1)在某些动词如make，have，get，find，keep，leave或某些介词(如with)等感觉动词等后面往往可以带上宾语及宾语补足语(对宾语进行进一步补充、说明、修饰、限定)形式。充当宾语补足语的重要部分之一是过去分词，用来表示该动作的被动与完成。
I found a dog killed on the road．
我发现一只狗被碾死在路上。
He left his work unfinished．
他走了，工作未完成。
Please get the report typed as soon as possible．
请尽快地把报告打印出来。
(2)have sth．done的三重含义：
①请叫／让别人(替自己)做某事
I had my hair cut yesterday．昨天我理发了。
②使某事(被人或自己)完成
He had his house repaired．他把房子修了一下。
③(别人)使(宾语)遭受(意外、不好的)某事
I had my wallet stolen．我的钱包被偷了。
I had my leg broken．我的腿摔断了。
[考题21](1)一Cood morning．Can I help you?
-I’d Iike to have this package_____，madam．
A．be weiglIed B to be weiglled
C．to weigh D．weished (全国高考题)
[解析] 这是顾客与营业员之间的对话。顾客要把包裹给营业员称量一下，符合have sth．done的用法。[答案] D
(2)Having passed all the tests，she felt a great weight____off her mind．(山东潍坊题)
A．taking B．taken c．take D．to be taken
[解析]从结构可知，本题测试“动词+宾语+宾补”的用法中不同形式作宾补的区别：不定式表未来的动作， V．-ing表示正在进行的动作，过去分词表示完成、被动的动作。从本题语境看，通过考试后，她精神上的负担也被卸下了，因此要用过去分词作宾语补足语。[答案]B
(3) Ihe murderer was bfought in，with his hands___behind．
A．tied B．tying c．to tie D．being tied
(全国高考题)
[解析]从句中含有with可知，本题测试with后面的宾语补足语的形式问题。从tie与hand之间存在动宾关系可知，此处宾语补足语要用过去分词形式。[答案]A ’
22．I must say I'd rather live in a traditional siheyuan．我想我 宁愿住在传统的四合院里。
(1)would rather后跟不带to的不定式，即动词原形，常用缩写式’d rather。
一How about a drink?喝一杯怎么样?
一I'd rather have something to eat．我宁愿来点儿吃的。
(2)would rather的否定式是在would rather后加否定词not，即would rather not do sth．
eg：I would rather not go out tonight，if you don't mind．
如果你不介意的话，今晚我不想外出了。
He would rather not listen to jazz．他不愿意听爵士音乐。
(3)在表示“宁愿……而不愿……”时，要用would rather．．．than．．．这一结构，表示在两者之中进行选择。使用这一表达方式要注意用“平行结构”，即在than的前后要用两个同类的词或词组，如两个名词，两个动词不定式，两个介词词组等。
eg：I would rather have red apples than green ones．
我宁愿要红苹果，而不愿意要绿的。
I would rathdr listen to music than go swimming．
我宁愿听音乐，而不愿去游泳。
I would rather talk with her mother than with her father．
我宁愿同她母亲谈，而不愿同她父亲谈。
(4)would rather后接从句，通常用过去式表示虚拟语气。
eg：I'd much rather you told me the truth．我真宁愿你把真相告诉我。
I'd rather he had told me about it．我宁愿他告诉了我那件事。
一What would you like ，the bigger or the smaller?
一1 would rather the smaller．
A.choose；choose B. to choose；choose
C to choose；to choose D. choose；to choose
23．furniture
n. a11 those movable things such as chairs，beds，desks,etc
needed in a house，room，office，etc．(总称)家具；是不可数名词。 eg：a piece of furniture一件家具
two old pieces of furniture两件旧家具
We had little furniture．我们几乎没什么家具。
The old table was a very valuable piece of furniture．那张旧桌子是一件很值钱的家具。
He would like to buy some fashionable for his new flat.
A.furniture B. furnitures C.luggage D. luggages
24．roof[ru：f]．top covering of a building屋顶，顶部
eg：Don't climb onto the roof．不要爬上屋顶。
They can't live under the same roof．他们无法生活在同一个屋 。
【警示】roof的复数形式是roofs，而不是rooves(×)，类似的以“f”结尾的可数名询复数直接加s的词有以下几个：belief(信仰、信念)、chief(首领)、cliff(悬崖)、gulf (海湾)、proof(证据)、serf(农奴)
25.belong．be the property 0f属于，适合
eg：These books belong to me．这些书是我的。
That 1id belongs to this jar．那个盖子是配这个瓶子的。
I belong to the tenni’s club．我是这个网球俱乐部的人员。
【警示】该词不可用于进行时态，如不能说The car is belonging to my uncle．也不用于被动语态，后面的宾语常是名词或宾格代词，不能用名词性物主代词：“mine， yours，hers，his．．．”
belongings n．(使用复数)(个人的)所有物，财产，携带物品eg：
The tourists lost all their belongings in the hotel fire．
因旅馆失火，游客财物尽失。
26. pull down
(1)拉下(遮帘，帘子等)
eg：Shall I pull down the blinds?我可以放下百叶窗吗?
(2)拆毁，拆掉
eg：The old houses were being pulled down．那些旧房子正在拆除中。
(3)使……虚弱
eg：His long illness had pulled him down．他因长期患病身体虚弱。
【拓展】
① pull in拉近，(列车等)到达，进站
② ②pull off脱掉、取下
③ pull on穿上，戴上
④ ④pull OUt拔出，驶出，出站
⑤pull through渡过难关
⑥pull up使……停止
⑦pull up to／with追上，赶上
These houses are being pulled . A new building will be built there．
A．out B．0n C．down D．off
单项填空
1.He seems to like me but I can’t_______the sight of him．
A．take B．hold C．stand D．make
2.Did they Iive_____European style when they were in Japan?
A．in B．on C．with D．to
3.Will you drop in at my house this afternoon if_______?
A．it is convenient for you B．you are convenient
C．it is convenient of you D．you will be convenknt
4.she missed the plane，_____driving very fast to the air-port．
A．despite B．unless C．though D．without
5._____their country has plenty of oil，ours has none．
A．While B．When C．Before D．Where
6.They used to take their holidays in their own country
______foreign countries．
A．in favour of B．in preference to
C．in honour of D．in spite of
7.We saw the houses in the street____in order to make room for a large square．
A．puned off B．pulled up
C．pulled down D．pulled in
8.They hurried back home only to find their house______ into．
A．break B．to break
C．broken D．breaking
9. -Doesn’t Elaine want to see that movie?
-Yes，but she says____go tonight．
A．she’ll rather not B．she’d rather not
C．she’d not rather D．she won’t rather
10.The house has been standing_____without use for months．
A．empty B still C．quietly D．1onely
11.A nest is to a bird____a house is to a man．
A．where B．how C．what D．when
12.When he came to，he found himself____on a chair；
with his hands______back．
A．to sit；tied B．sitting；tying 。
C．sat；tied D．sitting tied
13.We do not feel______to enter modern buildings；every-thing about them seems unfriendly．
A．invited B．inviting C．to invite D．to be invited
14.I’m going to have my letters_____tomorrow if I’ve got them ready by then．
A．to type B．type C．typed D．typing
15.Every great Culture in the past had its own ideas of beauty___in art and literature．
A．expressed B．to express
C．being expressed D．to be expressed
短文改错
Late in the afternoon，the boys put up thek tent 1．____
in the middle of a field．As soon as this was done it， 2．____
they had cooked a meal over an open fire．They were 3．____
all ungry and the food smelt well．After a wonderful 4．____
meal，they said stories and sang songs by the camp 5. ____
fire．But some times later it began to rain．The boys 6．____
felt tired so they put out the fire and crept into his 7._____
tent．Their sleep-bags warm alld comfortable，so 8．_____
they all slept.sounldly．At the middle of the night， 9. _____
one of the boys woke up or began shouting，The tent 10._____
had been flooded!
答案：单项填空
1 C 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 B 7 C 8 C
9 B 10 A 11 C 12 D 13 A 14 C 15 A
短文改错
1.√ 2.去掉it 3.去掉had 4.well→good
5.said→told 6.times→time 7.his→their
8.warm前加were 9.At→In 10.or→and
知识与能力同步测控题
一、单项填空（共15小题；每小题1分）
1. A computer does only what thinking people __
A. have it do B. have it done
C. have clone it D. having it done
2. The lady said she would buy a gift for her daughter with the
A. 20 dollars remained B. 20 dollars remain
C. remained 20 dollars D. remaining 20 dollars
3.--What happened to Mr Smith early this morning?
--Oh,he was seen __ down and the driver __ away.
A. knock; drive B. knocking; driving
C. knocked; drove D, to knock; driven
4. After half a year's training, they were made entirely used __underwater again.
A. to stay B. to staying C. staying D. stay
5. Mr. Brown was much disappointed to see the washing machine she had had __ went wrong again.
A. it repaired B. to be repaired
C. repair D. repaired
6. I'd rather have a room of my own, however small it is, than______ a room with someone else.
A. share B. to share C. sharing D. to have shared_
7. _______ Lucy for example, she raised her voice so as to make____
A. Take ; herself heard B. Make; her hear
C. Put; herself heaving D. Follow; her heard
8. She was glad that her success would __ for the women who would follow.
A. make things easier B. be easier
C. make it easier D. be easier to make
9. The murderer was brought in, with his hands __ behind his back.
A. being tied B. having tied C. to be tied D. tied
10. --What do you think of your new roommate?
--I can't really_____ her, She's always making loud noises atmidnight. And when I remind her, she always makes rude
remarks.
A. put up with B. catch up with
C. come up with D. keep up with
11. We got lost in the dark forests.______ ,it began to rain.
A. Beside B. Besides C. Expect D. Though
12. He always did weU at school __ having to do part-time jobs every now and then.
A. in spite of B. instead
C. in case of D. in favor of
13. What a great weight the mother felt __ her mind the moment she found her lost son!
A.turned off B. taken off
C. set free D. brought into
14. I think she will____ a good monitor, so I'm going to vote for her.
A. remain B. grow C. turn D. make
15. With our life developing rapidly, people buy ____ to decorate their rooms.
A, a great many furniture B. a lot of furnitures
C. a large number of furitures D. plenty of furniture
二．完形填空（共20小题，每小题1.5分，满分30分）
Building a house costs quite a lot of money. Your first __16___
will be to find a 17 piece of land. Your 18 will depend on many different things. You will probably try to find a sunny place,with 19 surroundings near shops and bus stops, not too farfrom your friends and the place where you work.
20 you will find an excellent 21 , and together with the builder you will work out a 22 . The builder will draw theplan. It will 23 the number of rooms, their position and
24 , and other 25 which must be noticed, 26
windows, doors, and electric outlets. The builder will work out how much money is 27 to build your house. He will work out the 28 of the wood, bricks, the glass, and 29 else that must be used in building the house. Later on, when he starts to build, this estimate mustbe corrected and revised. His estimate is based on 30 price, but prices of such things may change, and many other things may happen 31 the time when he makes the 32 and the time when he builds the house.
When the builder gives his estimate, you may wish to change
your plan. You may also wish to change your builder, if his estimate is too 33 ! You may find that some of the features you wanted at first cost too much, or that you can spend a little more and 34 something to your plan. The builder's estimate depends on the plan, 35 the final plan depends on the builder's estimate.
16. A. step B. plan C. way D. idea
17. A. small B. large C. right D. exact
18. A. land B. choice C. house D. preference
19. A. quiet B. pleased C. lonely D. pleasant
20. A. Yet B. Next C. However D. Though
21. A. worker B. engineer C. builder D. drawer
22. A. plan B. cost C. suggestion D. price
23. A. appear B. design C. show D. recite
24. A. height B. width C. length D. size
25. A. rooms B. doors C. parts D. roofs
26. A. for example B. such as
C. in other words D. on the other hand
27. A. needed B. spent C: collected D. taken
28. A. numbers B. amount C. cost D. level
29. A. something B. everything C. whatever D. others
30. A. rising B. falling C. existing D. remaining
31. A. by B. in C.among D. between
32. A. plans B. design C. estimate D. cost
33. A. expensive B. high C. cheap D. low
34. A. reduce B. place C. add D. lay
35. A. but B. so C. and D. then
三．阅读理解（共20小题，每 题2分，满分40分）
A
In the late 1960's,many people in North America turned their attention to environmental problems, and new steel-and-glass skyscrapers were widely criticized. Ecologists pointed out that a forest of tall buildings in a city often overburdens public transportation and parking lots.
Skyscrapers are also consumers and wasters of electric power.In one recent year, the addition of 17 million square feet of skyscrapers office space in New York City raised the peak daily demand for electricity by 120,000 kilowatts--enough to supply the entire city of Albany, New York, for a day.
Glass-walled skyscrapers can be especially wasteful. The heat loss ( or gain) through a wall of half-inch plate glass is more than ten times that through a typical brick wall filled with insulation (绝缘) board. To lessen the strain on heating and air-conditioning equipment,builders of skyscrapers have begun to use double-glazed panels of glass, and reflective glasses coated with silver or gold mirror films that reduce glare(眩目的光) as well as heat gain.
However, mirror-walled skyscrapers raise the temperature ofthe surrounding air and affect neighboring buildings.
Skyscrapers put a strain on a city's sanitation facilities(卫生设备),too. If fully occupied,the two World Trade Center towers in New York City would alone produce 2.25 million gallons of wastes each year-as much a city the size of Stanford, Connecticut, which has a population of more than 109,000.
Skyscrapers also affect television reception,block bird flyways and air traffic, In Boston in the late 1960's, some people even feared that shadows from skyscrapers would kill the grass on Boston Common. Still ,people continue to build skyscrapers for all the reasons that they have always built them-personal pride and the desire of owners to have the largest possible amount of space to rent.
36. The main purpose of the passage is to __
A. compare skyscrapers with other modern structures
B. describe some architectural designs of skyscrapers
C. describe skyscrapers and their effect on the environment
D. encourage using bricks in the construction of skyscrapers
37. According to the passage, what is one disadvantage of skyscrapers that have mirrored walls?
A. The surrounding air is heated.
B. Construction time is increased.
C. The windows must be cleaned daily.
D. Extra air-conditioning equipment is needed.
38. According to the passage, in the late 1960's some residents of Boston were concerned with which aspect of skyscrapers?
A. The noise from their construction.
B. The high cost of renting an office.
C. The harmful effects on the city's grass.
D. The removal of trees from building sites.
39. The author raises problems that would most concern which of the following groups?
A. Pilots . B. Electricians.
C. Environmentalists. D. Construction workers
B
Art museums are places where people can learn about various cultures. The increasingly popular “ design museums”that are opening today, however, perform quite a different role. Unlike most art museums, the design museum shows objects that are easilyfound by the general public. These museums sometimes even placethings like fridges and washing machines in the center of the hall.
People have argued that design museums are often made useof as advertisements for new industrial technology. But their role is not simply a matter of sales--it is the honoring of excellently invented products. The difference between the window of a department store and the showcase in a design museum is that the first tries to sell you something, while the second tells you the success of a sale.
One advantage of design museums is that they are places where people feel familiar with the exhibits. Unlike the average art museum visitors, design museum visitors seldom feel frightened or puzzled. This is partly because design museums clearly show how and why mass-preduced products work and look as they do, and how design has improved the quality of our lives. Art museum exhibits, on the other hand, would most probably fill visitors with a feeling that there is something beyond their understanding.
In recent years, several new design museums have opened their doors. Each of these museums has tried to satisfy the public's growing interest in the field with new ideas. London's Design Museum,for example, shows a collection of mass-produced objects from Zippo lighters to electric typewriters to a group of Italian fish-tins. The choices open to design museums seem far less strict than those to art museums, and visitors may also sense the humorous part of our society while walking around such exhibits as interesting and unusually attractive toys collected in our everyday life.
40. Showcases in design museums are different from store windows because they __
A. show more technologic~Llly advanced products
B. help increase the sales of products
C. show why the products have sold well
D. attract more people than store windows do
41. The author believes that most design museum visitors.
A. do not admire maes-preduced products
B. are puzzled with technological exhibits
C. dislike exhibits in art museums
D. know the exhibits very well
42. The choices open to design museums __
A. are not as strict as those to art museums
B. are not aimed to interest the public
C. may fail to bring some pleasure to visitors
D. often contain precious exhibits
43. The best title for this passage is .
A.The Forms of Design Museums
B.The Exhibits of Design Museums
C.The Nature of Design Museums
D.The Choice Open of Design Museums
C
CAIRO--After nearly a decade 0f planning , the Egyptian Government has announced an ambitious plan t0 build the world the biggest museum devoted entirelyto exhibitingthe ancient relics(遗物)．Called the New Egyptian Museum，it will eventually housethe largest collection 0f pharaonic(法老的)monuments，including the solid gold death musk of Tutankhamun．King Nebkheperura TutankhalTlun remains the most famous ofallthe Pharaohs 0f Ancient Egypt．He lived over 3，300 years ag0 during the period known as the New Kingdom．The museum will als0 house more than 120，000 antiquities (古代艺术品)from the 4th milknnium(1，000 years)Bc to the fall 0f the Roman Empire．
For the first time．the entire 3，500 items from Tutankhamun’sTomb will be disDlayed．Permanent exhibitions will include the royal mummies of Ramses Ⅱand Ⅲand other pharaohs and a largequantitv 0f collection of Pharaonic jewellery．
Antiquities wiU be 0rganized by the theme rather thanchronogically(编年地)．The four main themes will be：the 1and of EgYPt；royalty and the state；arts of life and death；and scribes(文牍)and wisdom．With building costs estimated near US$31 1 mimon，funding forthe new museum’viU Come from corporate sponsorship(资助)and charitable(慈善的)donations．The Egyptian Government isexpected to pay one tlliId 0f the final bill．
44．Wh0 has planned t0 build the wodd’s biggest museum?
A．The EgYPtian Government．
B．A corporate body．
C．The charitable body．
D．The EgYPtian Government and a corporate body．
45．When you go into one exhibiting hall 0f the wouldbe museum，you’ll see
A．all the exhibits are arranged bythe year
B．all the exhibits are arranged by the theme
C．more than 120，000 Egyptian antiquities are on show
D．Pharaonic monuments of Tutankhamun and the royal relics
46．According to the passage，---
A. the most valuable relics that are to be displayed are 120，000 antiquities from t11e 4th miueBBiuin BC
B．3．500 items 0f relics have been discovered from Tmankhamun's
tomb
C．the Pharaonic monuments ofTutankhamun arethe oldest relics
D．the royal mummies 0f RamsesⅡand Ⅲand 0ther pharaohs
Will be displayed for the second time
47．The best title for the passage should be“--”．
A．Egypt’s AmbitiOUS Plan
B．The Wodd’s Biggest Museum for tlle Ancient Relics
C．EgYPt to Construct New Museum
D．Ancient Egyptian Relics Are to Be Displayed
D
Experts have put forward detailed plans for a tunnel to join Taiwan with the Chinese mainland．
The shortest proposed route wonld be 126 kilometers-more than twice the length 0f the Endish Channel Tunnel．And the longest proposed route would be 207 kilometers．
A recent conference in xiamen，Fujian Province brought together more than 70 experts．The event was co一sponsored(共同发起)by universities from Taiwan and the Chinese mainland．Fujian is the province where both proposed mutes would begin．
There is no direct passenger access(通道)between the mainland and Taiwan by air or sea at the moment．
Experts say that it is better to start research sooner rather than later，althongh there is a lack 0f government funding(资金)．There are no technical problems t0 build a Taiwan tunnel．But it will require an improved political relationship across the Straits．
A professor 0f TsinghHa University said，“A special feature 0f huge projects is that the period of preparation is longer than the period 0f construction．”
For example，he said，the Endish channel Tunnel took 14 years 0f planning and had been discussed for two centuTies．And
preparations for the huge Three Corges(三峡)dam on the Yangze River began in the 1950s．
The xiamen conference focused on the longest southern route，which would use the Taiwan-controlled islands of Jinmen and Penghu as stepping_stones.
The first stage 0f the new project could be a bridge to cross the five kilometers between Xiamen and Jinmen．This would mean that traveling from Xiamen to Jinmen by car would only take five minutes．
The longest tunnel now being planned anywhere in the world is the 54-kilometer land tunnel to link Lyon in France with Turin in Italy．The tunnel will not be completed until -．
48．Which is the longest tunnel in the world at present?
A．The Endish Channel Tunnel．
B．The tunnel between Lyon and Turin．
C．The Taiwan straits tunnel_
D．The passage does’t mention it．
49．The example of English Channel Tunnel shows--．
A．it’s important to complete a huge project
B．there are many problems to be solved before doing somethihg
C．discussions among countries usually take a lot 0f time
D．the preparation takes 1onger time than the construction
50．Which oftlle following is NOT true?
A．Universities both at_home and abroad have sponsored(赞助)the plan．
B.If the project is completed，the world's longest tunnel willappear． ．
C．You can't reach Taiwan from the mainland directly atPresent.
D．The starting point of the proposed tunnel is in Fujian．
51．What is the possible difficulty in carrying out the plan?
A．The 1ack 0f money for the project from the government．
B．Improving the relationship between Taiwan and the mainland．
C．The detailed plans for the tunnel．
D．The technical problems with the tunnel．
E
SHANGHAI--The Shanghai World Financial Centre will be
the tallest land-mark in the world after its completion this century in Pudong, according to the project's Japanese investors.
The building will be located in the prime Lujiazui Zone in
Pudong , on a 30,000-square-metre site. The building was originally designed to be a 94-floor office tower with a height of 460 metres.
The project broke ground in but was later halted as a
result of the financial crisis in Southeast Asia.
“As the economy warms up, we are more confident about
Shanghai and the whole China and we are working hard to get the
Project restarted as soon as possible,” said Katsuyuki Takeuchi,
vice-president and general manager of the Shanghai World
Financial Centre Company.
Its parent company, Japan-based Moil Building Co. Ltd,
established the Shanghai subsidiary as the opreator responsible for this ambitious project. The design, which is undergoing revision in apan, will accommodate international high-tech businesses,
department stores, art galleries, clubs and a five-star hotel. Unlike the gloomy economies of the United States, Europe and Japan, China enjoys a strong growth with brighter prospects, Takeuchi said.
More capital and businesses are expected to flow into
Shanghai, which aims to become a world centre for trade and the
financial industry--with Lujiazui as its showpiece.
The layout of Luijiazui includes three tall buildings, one of
which is the completed Jinmao Tower, each rising above 400
metres, as designed by local government after holding an international design competition early last decade.
Other buildings nearby fall in height gradually, creating a
special shape against the skyline. The Shanghai World Financial
Centre will be built as the peak of the mountain.
“The peak will be safe thanks to the perfect design,advanced
technology and the stable social and political environment in
Shanghai,” Takeuchi said, reassuring those who might be anxious
about the safety of the soon-to-be world's tallest building.
52. Why is the Shanghai World Financial Center to be built? :
A. Because it is by the bank of the Changjiang River.
B. Because it is going to be the highest building in China.
C. Because the economy of China is of a better future than of other countries.
D. Because the builders in Shanghai could be sure of the quality of the building.
53. Seen from a long distance,the Lujiazui Zone looks like a(an)
A. apple B. mountain C. box D. basin
54. Why will the Shanghai World Financial Center be of great safety?
A. Because it will be the peak of a mountain.
B. Because its design and technology are of the top levels.
C. In Shanghai there is a stable social and political environment.
D.B and C.
55. Which of the following has the same meaning as the sentence“... reassuring those who might be anxious about the safety of the soon-to-be world's tallest building”
A. Comfort the people so that they won't worry about the safetyof the peak.
B. Tell the people the tallest building will be finished soon.
C. Advise people not to be anxious about the building until it is finished.
D. Make sure that the building will be built in Shanghai.
短文改错（满分10分）
The Great Wall of China is being called“the
56.
Ten-Thousand-Li Great Wall”in Chinese. It has the history of
57.
over twenty centuries. Parts of it were built through different 58.
dynasties. It was during the Qin Dynasty when the parts were 59.
joined up into one long wall. It's very difficult build such 60.
a long wall in the ancient days without some modern machines. 61.
All the work were done by hand. Thousands of men died 62.
of cold and hungry when they were forced to work on the 63.
wall. Today the Great Wall has become a place of interesting 64.
to the Chinese and to the people in all over the world~ 65.
书面表达（满分25分）
请你根据以吓图表和提示写一篇关于我国手机拥有量变化的报道，并阐述手机给人们生活带来利与弊。
1。方便
2． 随时，随地联系；
3． 许多功能满足不同要求。如发短信，上网等；
4． 接到打错的电话并为之付费；
5． 电磁辅射（radiation）有害健康。
注意：1。词数100左右；2。开头已写好
As can be seen from the chart...
Unit3 知识与能力同步测控题
1．A it指代计算机；人们让计算机做事情，所以d0的逻辑主 语就是计算机(it)，那魔作为宾语补足语的形式用动词原形 即可。 ’
2．D本句含”with+宾语+宾补”句型，因为一remain为不及物。
动词，所以没有过去分词形式作宾补及定语用法，所以表示“剩 下的”时，用remaining即可。
3．C Mr!Smith是被人看到被车撞倒，所以作宾补的应是过去分词形式。后一分句由and连接，独立成句，所缺成分作谓 语动词。
4．B be used to doing sth．表示“习惯于做某事”，当它作宾语 补足语时．be动词去掉即可。、
5．D“she had”作定语从句，修饰“洗衣机”；洗衣机是让别人修理，所以应用被动语态作宾补。
6．A 中包含句型would rather do sth than do sthl．。
7．A表示“举例子”用take…for example；第二空表示Lucy 提高嗓音以便让她自己被别人听见。
8．A若选B、D则成了“成功是较容易”，不符合题意。it一般要代替不定式，但本题中无不定式。who引导的定语从句只修饰women，而for the women作本句的状语，所以只能选意义完整的A项作为答案。
9．D该结构的难点在于应用哪一种形式作宾补。本题中的 “小偷被带来了，他的双手是被人绑在身后”，所以应用过去分词形式作宾补。
lO．A catch up witll表示“跟上；赶上”，come up with表示“提出”，keep up with表示“跟上”，均不符合语境体现出来的 “我的确容忍不了她”。
11．B从句意及用法看，后者表示的是递进关系，所以用副词 besides .
12．A “did well”与后半句的“不时地做兼职工作”之间是让步关系。
13．B turn 0ff表示“关闭；使人厌倦”，set free表示“释放”，bring into表示“使进入某种状态”。语境表示“当她见到失踪的儿子时候，心头多么大的负担被卸掉了啊!” feel a great weight taken off是其正常语序。
14．D当表示“有条件成为……(人或物)”时，用make表示。 又如：She will mke a good wife．她将会成为一位好妻子。
15．D fumiture表示家具的总称，是个不可数名词，不可由a great many，a number of等词修饰，也无复数形式。
16．A此处指建房的第一步(step)是选择一块合适的土地。
17．C此处指建房选择土地。不是选大、小土地，而是选合适的土地。 。
18．B “选址”这个选择取决于很多东西。
19. D 一般要选择阳光充足，周围环境优美的地方。
20．B 现在指下一步该干什么。
21. C 就在此空后面有the builder，所以本空指选一个好的建筑师。
22．A 从下文the builder will draw the plan可知。
23．C it指代建筑图纸，它的上面是标明了各自的位置。
24．D 图纸上标的是房间数、房间的大小及位置等。
25．C 一座房子不仅仅只有房间，还有其他的部分。
26．B 这些部分比如说(such as)，有门、窗、电线等部分。举出部分例子用such as。
27．A 此处指建筑师也会帮你算出建房要多少钱。
28．C 这些材料得花费多少钱。
29．B 指其他的建房需要的一切。
30．C 此时的预算只是依当时存在的价钱算的，所以在以后的日子会有浮动。
31．D 由下文的the time…与the time…可知指两段时间之间。
32．C指作预算的时间与做房子时的两个时间。
33．B 当然指价钱要得太高的话，你可能换个建筑师。
34．C add．．．t0为习语，表示“把……添加到……上去”。
35. A 两句话(建筑师的估计取决于计划、计划取决于建筑师的估计)之间存在对比转折关系。
36．C本文主要记叙摩天大楼及其对环境的影响。
37．A 从第三段最后一句话中的raise the temperature可以推出。
38．C本题是个细节理解题。从第五段最后一句话可知。
39．C从36题可知，摩天大楼对环境产生极大的影响，因为与此最相关的人当然是环境学家了。
40．C从第二段内容可知。
41．D普通博物馆似乎拒人于千里之外，但大多数参观“设计博物馆”的人十分喜欢这种形式，那么对展品就不太陌生,甚至很了解了。
42．A见最后一段第三句话。
43．C nature此处指“本性、特征”。而不是指自然。因此“设计博物馆的特性”便是最好的标题了。
44．A答案可以从第一段知道。
45．B倒数第二段第一句提供了答案。
46．B见第五段内容。其余三个选项均与文中事实不符。
47．C第一段告诉读者，埃及政府经过多年的筹划，现在宣布将建造世界上最大的古文物博物馆。随后讲了该博物馆的作用、特点以及筹款方式等。所以C项才能恰当地反映文章主题。
48．D 题目的意思是指现在世界上最长的已经建成的隧道。英吉利海峡隧道并没有在文章中提到是否是最长的；根据文章的最后一段，法国到意大利的海峡隧道还未建成；台湾海峡隧道虽是文章介绍的主题，但还在计划之中，所以文章没有告诉我们答案。
49．D 英吉利海峡隧道的例子在第八段，主要是为了证明第七段的观点。
50．A文章只提到计划是台湾和大陆的大学发起，没有提到国外的大学，故A项不对；B项不能只看文章最后一段提到法国至意大利的海峡隧道是最长的，而the project(台湾海峡隧道)比它要长的多；c项在第五段提到；D项在第四段提到。
51．B 从第六段的But it will require and improved political relationship across the Straits．中"require(需要)”，说明这方面还是障碍；虽然第六段中提到A项，但句中用了although(尽管)这个词，可见资金方面不是主要问题；c项是文章一开始就说明已经完成的事项；D项从第六段There are no technical problems to build a Taiwan tunnel．得知，也是不成问题的。
52．c由第五段可知，与日本、美国、欧洲等相比，中国经济发展的潜力更大。
53．B由倒数第二段可知，陆家嘴金融区分三部分，中间高，四周低，nearby，gradually，in the middle是关键词。
54．D最后一段可知，在上海建造世界金融中心，有三个有利因素：完美的设计；先进的技术；安定的社会环境。
55．A在所给的四个选项中，唯有comfort与reassure(打消……的疑虑)最接近，其他三项均与文意不符。
56．去掉being 。is being called是现在进行时态的被动语态。此处应该用一般现在时。is called表示“被称为……”。
57．the改为a 。have a history of…为固定用法。
58．√。
59．when改为that。此处是强调句型。
60．在build前面加to。It is+adj．+to do sth．结构中，it为形式主语。动词不定式是真正的主语。
61．some改为any。without表示否定意义。
62．were改为was。work为不可数名词，谓语动词用单数形式。
63．hungry改为hunger。die 0f cold and hunger：死于寒冷和饥饿．。
64．interesting改为interest。习惯用法。a place 0f interest：名胜。风景。
65．in改为from。表示“来自世界各地”。应用介词from。
书面表达One possible version：
As can be seen from the chart，great changes have been taking place in the ownership 0f mobile phones in China．At the end of ，there were 20 million mobile users．By the year ，the number will reach up to 30 million．People have found mobile phones very convenient．they Can get in touch with each other whenver and wherever they like．There are many different functions for different needs．Such as sending short messages and surfing the Internet．However，it may also bring
us some trouble．For example．You will have to pay for a wrong number，and the radiation from the phone may do harm to our health．In spite of this，the number of people having mobile phones is still increasing steadily．
Art and Architecture
Period 1 冯波云
Type of the lesson: Warming up and Listening
Teaching aims:
Help the Ss talk about architecture.
Train the Ss listening ability.
Teaching aid: Computer
Teaching procedures:
Step 1 Warming up
Ⅰ. Show the Ss some pictures of buildings and ask them to name them and talk about them.
the Orient Pearl the National Grand Theatre the Sydney Opera House
the White House the Great Pyramid the Forbidden City
Q：We’ve enjoyed so many wonderful pictures. Can you guess what we will learn in this Unit? ( building or architecture )
Ⅱ. Show the Ss another two pictures and ask them to compare them. Get the Ss to speak out the differences between them.
Q: Which house would you like to live in? Why? ( Help the Ss with the following questions.)
1). Which one do you think is more comfortable?
2). Which one is more convenient for you? Why?
3). What do you think are they made of?
4). Which design do you like better?
5). What’s your feeling when you see them?
Step 2 Listening
I. Pre-listening:
T: Suppose you have a new flat, and you want to decorate it. What kind of furniture will you buy for it?
Encourage the Ss to say as many words as possible. The following questions may help them.
1) What will you buy to decorate your bedroom?
2) What do you want to buy for your living room?
3) What do you need for your kitchen?
4) How about your dining room?
Show the Ss some pictures of furniture to review the words that may appear in the listening material.
II. While-listening
Tell the Ss that they will listen to a dialogue between a young married couple, Amy and Danny, and a shop assistant who helps them choose the furniture for their new home. Ask the students to go through the exercises and make sure what to do.
1. First listening.
Play the tape for the first time to finish Ex.1 on Page 19 in Fengtai Workbook. Check the answers.
2. Second listening.
Listen again and do Ex. 2. Check the answers.
3. Third listening
Listen for the specific information and write down the missing words. (Ex. 3 on P18, Ss Book. )
Answers:
1). things, replace, pieces
2). wood, would
3) warm, comfortable
4) wall, sofa
5) something modern
III. Post-listening:
Pair work:
Ss work in groups and .fill in the form according to what they heard.
What do they want to buy? What kind of … do they want to buy?
A kitchen table
Something on the wall
Comfortable, modern and classic, cool
IV. Homework:
Blackboard Design:
architecture
furniture
Self-evaluation
Step 5.Homework
Find out famous buildings and works of art in the world as many as possible. Prepare one of them to introduce to your classmates tomorrow.
